Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service and Troubleshooting

AquaSnap®
30RB060-390 Air-Cooled Chillers and

30RB080-390 Air-Cooled Chillers with
Greenspeed® Intelligence
Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service

and Troubleshooting
CONTENTS Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Page RTPF (Round Tube Plate Fin) Condenser Coil
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations 56
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 MCHX Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Condenser Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Basic Control Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Refrigerant Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Scroll Protection Module (SPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board . . . . . . . . 7
Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 60
Fan Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reverse Rotation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Thermistors (Tables 51-53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim . . . . . . 14
Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Local Equipment Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES. . . . . . . . . . 93
Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 APPENDIX C — CCN ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . 16 APPENDIX D — R-410A PRESSURE VS.
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 TEMPERATURE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Dual Chiller Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND
LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION
Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
High-Efficiency Variable Condenser Fans (HEVCF) APPENDIX G — SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW
(30RB080-390 with Greenspeed Intelligence) . . . . 26 AMBIENT DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Machine Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RB
LIQUID CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL-1
Cooling Set Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Remote Alarm and Alert Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be
Broadcast Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only
trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or
Alarm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 service air-conditioning equipment.
PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Untrained personnel can perform basic maintenance functions of
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 cleaning coils and filters and replacing filters. All other operations
START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 should be performed by trained service personnel. When working
Actual Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions in the
Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 precautions that may apply.
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Follow all safety codes, including ANSI (American National
Standards Institute) Z223.1. Wear safety glasses and work gloves.
Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations. Have fire
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 extinguisher available for all brazing operations.
Optional Heat Reclaim Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 It is important to recognize safety information. This is the safety-
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 alert symbol . When you see this symbol on the unit and in
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg 1 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T
instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal
injury.
WARNING
Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING,
CAUTION, and NOTE. These words are used with the safety- Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off
alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which all power to this equipment during installation. There may be
will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations
hazards which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.
is used to identify unsafe practices, which may result in minor
personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to
highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, CAUTION
reliability, or operation.
This unit uses a microprocessor control system. Do not short
or jumper between terminations on circuit boards or modules;
DANGER control or board failure may result.
DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System Be aware of electrostatic discharge (static electricity) when
contains oil and refrigerant under pressure. handling or making contact with circuit boards or module con-
nections. Always touch a chassis (grounded) part to dissipate
To remove a component, wear protective gloves and goggles body electrostatic charge before working inside control center.
and proceed as follows:
Use extreme care when handling tools near boards and when
a. Shut off electrical power to unit. connecting or disconnecting terminal plugs. Circuit boards
b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from system can easily be damaged. Always hold boards by the edges and
using both high-pressure and low pressure ports. avoid touching components and connections.
c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen and This equipment uses, and can radiate, radio frequency energy.
the work area should be well ventilated. Refrigerant in If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
contact with an open flame produces toxic gases. manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. It
d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter and has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
remove component from unit. Use a pan to catch any oil A computing device pursuant to International Standard in
that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how North America EN 61000-2/3 which are designed to provide
much oil to add to the system. reasonable protection against such interference when operated
e. Carefully un-sweat remaining tubing stubs when neces- in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in
sary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame. a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case
the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever
Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal inju- measures may be required to correct the interference.
ry or death.
Always store and transport replacement or defective boards in
anti-static shipping bag.
WARNING
DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. CAUTION
Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in accor- To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run
dance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing refrig-
National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, erant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler fluid
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety loop to prevent the freezing of heat exchanger, optional
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of hydronic section and/or interconnecting piping when the
refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32°F (0°C). Proof
cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed of flow switch and strainer are factory installed on all models.
or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of Do NOT remove power from this chiller during winter shut-
vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregularities, uncon- down periods without taking precaution to remove all water
sciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than from heat exchanger and optional hydronic system. Failure to
air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. properly protect the system from freezing may constitute abuse
Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition prod- and may void warranty.
ucts are hazardous.
CAUTION
WARNING
Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require
UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD specific rotation. Check reverse rotation board. If lower (red)
Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury, LED is blinking, the phase sequence is incorrect. Swap any
death and/or equipment damage. two incoming power leads to correct condenser fan rotation
R-410A refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than before starting any other motors. Operating the unit without
standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service equipment or verifying proper phasing could result in equipment damage.
components on R-410A refrigerant equipment.
CAUTION
Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss of
compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.
2
CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN tables are lo-
cated in Appendix B of the manual.
CAUTION
Basic Control Usage
DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been ex-
posed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes and SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY
regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to air any The scrolling marquee display is the standard interface display to
longer than the actual time required to service the equipment. the ComfortLink control system for 30RB units. The display has
Seal circuits being serviced and charge with dry nitrogen to up and down arrow keys, an ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key.
prevent oil contamination when timely repairs cannot be com-
pleted. Failure to follow these procedures may result in dam- These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the
age to equipment. display structure. Press the ESCAPE key until the highest operat-
ing level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indi-
GENERAL cated by LEDs (light-emitting diodes) on the left side of the dis-
play. See Fig. 1.
This publication contains Controls, Operation, Start-Up, Service
and Troubleshooting information for the 30RB060-390 air-cooled Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the ENTER and
liquid chillers with electronic controls. The 30RB chillers are ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the scrolling marquee
equipped with ComfortLink controls and electronic expansion display into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all
valves. sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed for the current
NOTE: Unit sizes 315-390 are modular units that are shipped in selection. Press the ENTER and ESCAPE keys to return the
separate sections as modules A or B as noted in position 8 of the scrolling marquee display to its default menu of rotating display
unit model number. Installation directions specific to these units items (those items in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the pass-
are noted in these instructions. For modules 315A, 315B, 330A, word will be disabled, requiring that it be entered again before
330B, 345A, 345B, and 360B, follow all general instructions as changes can be made to password protected items. Press the
noted for unit sizes 30RB160,170. For modules 360A, 390A, and
390B, follow instructions for 30RB190. See Table 1 for a listing of ESCAPE key to exit out of the expanded text mode.
unit sizes and modular combinations.
NOTE: The nameplate for modular units contains only the first MODE
two digits in the model number. For example, 315A and 315B
nameplates read 31A and 31B.
Run Status
Service Test
Temperature
Table 1 — Modular Unit Combinations Pressures

Setpoints
Inputs Alarm Status
UNIT SIZE MODULE A MODULE B Outputs
30RB315 30RB160 30RB160 Configuration

ESCAPE ENTER
Time Clock
30RB330 30RB170 30RB160 Operating Modes
30RB345 30RB170 30RB170 Alarms
30RB360 30RB190 30RB170

30RB390 30RB190 30RB190 Fig. 1 — Scrolling Marquee Display
Conventions Used in This Manual NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration
The following conventions for discussing configuration points for DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display ex-
the local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory) pansions will immediately change to the new language. No pow-
will be used in this manual. er-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages.
Point names will be written with the mode name first, then any When a specific item is located, the item name alternates with the
sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow sym- value. Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the value
bol (. Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an ex-
ample, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point, which is located in the will be displayed. Press ENTER again and the value will begin
Configuration mode, Option sub-mode, would be written as Con- to flash indicating that the value can be changed. Use the up and
figuration OPTNLLCS. down arrow keys to change the value, and confirm the value by
This path name will show the user how to navigate through the lo- pressing the ENTER key.
cal display to reach the desired configuration. The user would Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the
scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the and same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press
keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing ENTER so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to
ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure. change the value or state and press the ENTER key to accept it.
When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown Press the ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of struc-
at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value rep- ture. Repeat the process as required for other items.
resents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in pa- Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password
renthesis after the value. As an example, Configuration protected. The words ‘PASS’ and ‘WORD’ will alternate on the
OPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads). display when required. The default password is 0111. Press
Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will ENTER and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press
scroll an expanded text description of the point name or value ENTER again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the ar-
across the display. The expanded description is shown in the local
display tables but will not be shown with the path names in text. row keys to change the number and press ENTER to accept the
The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) point names are also refer- digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. The
enced in the local display tables for users configuring the unit with password can only be changed through CCN operator interface
software such as ComfortWORKS®, ComfortVIEW™ and Ser-
vice Tool. See Table 2 and Appendix A for further details.
3
ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE Adjusting the Contrast
The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the The display contrast can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions.
ComfortLink control system, which is only available as a field-in- To adjust the contrast of the Navigator module, press the
stalled accessory. The display has up and down arrow keys, an ESCAPE key until the display reads, “Select a menu item.”
ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key. These keys are used to nav- Using the arrow keys move to the Configuration mode. Press
igate through the different levels of the display structure. Press the ENTER to obtain access to this mode. The display will read:
ESCAPE key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is displayed to move > TEST OFF
through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side METR OFF
of the display. See Fig. 2.
. LANG ENGLISH
Com
Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up or
fortL
down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing ENTER will il-

ink
luminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Press-
ing ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously allows the user to
MOD
E
Alarm adjust the display contrast. Use the up or down arrows to adjust
the contrast. The screen’s contrast will change with the adjust-
Run Status
Status
Servic
e Tes
t
Tem
peratu
res
Pressu
res
Setpo
ment. Press ENTER to accept the change. The Navigator module

ints
Inputs
Outpu
ts
Config
uration
will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN (local

Time
Clock
Opera ESC
ting
Modes
Alarm
s
ENTE
R equipment network) bus.
Adjusting the Backlight Brightness
The display backlight can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions.
The factory default is set to the highest level. To adjust the Navi-
gator module backlight, press the ESCAPE key until the display
Fig. 2 — Accessory Navigator Display Module reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the
Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the currently se- Configuration mode. Press ENTER to obtain access to this
mode. The display will read:
lected item on the display screen. Pressing the ENTER and
> TEST OFF
ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the Navigator module METR OFF
into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes,
LANG ENGLISH
items and their values can be displayed. Pressing the ENTER
and ESCAPE keys when the display says ‘Select Menu Item’ Pressing ENTER will cause “OFF” to flash. Use the up or down
(Mode LED level) will return the Navigator module to its default arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing ENTER will il-
menu of rotating display items (those items in Run Sta- luminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Press-
tusVIEW). In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring ing up and down arrow keys simultaneously adjusts the display
that it be entered again before changes can be made to password brightness. Use the up or down arrow keys to adjust screen bright-
protected items. Press the ESCAPE key to exit out of the ex- ness. Press ENTER to accept the change. The Navigator module
panded text mode. will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.
NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration
DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display ex- CONTROLS
pansions will immediately change to the new language. No pow-
er-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages. General
When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the left The 30RB air-cooled liquid chillers contain the ComfortLink elec-
of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the display tronic control system that controls and monitors all operations of
and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the display. the chiller. The control system is composed of several components
Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the value will be- as listed in the following sections. All machines have at the very
least a main base board (MBB), scrolling marquee display, electric
gin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value, expansion valve board (EXV), fan board, one scroll protection
and confirm the value by pressing the ENTER key. module (SPM) per compressor, Emergency On/Off switch, an En-
Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the able-Off- Remote Contact switch and a reverse rotation board.
same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press ENTER Main Base Board (MBB)
so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the The MBB is the heart of the ComfortLink control system, which
value or state and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the contains the major portion of operating software and controls the
operation of the machine. See Fig. 3. The MBB continuously
ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of structure. Re- monitors input/output channel information received from its in-
peat the process as required for other items. puts and from all other modules. The MBB receives inputs from
Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password status and feedback switches, pressure transducers and thermis-
protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed when re- tors. The MBB also controls several outputs. Some inputs and out-
quired, with 1111 also being displayed. The default password is puts to control the machine are located on other boards, but are
0111. Use the arrow keys to change the number and press transmitted to or from the MBB via the internal communications
ENTER to enter the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of bus. Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire
communication bus or LEN. The CCN bus is also supported. Con-
the password. The password can only be changed through CCN nections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at TB3. For a
operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS™, Comfort- complete description of main base board inputs and outputs and
VIEW™ and Service Tool. their channel identifications, see Table 3.
4
Table 2 — ComfortLink Display Menu Structure
MODE
RUN SERVICE SET TIME OPERATING
TEMPERATURE PRESSURE INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION ALARMS
STATUS TEST POINTS CLOCK MODES
Operating Reset
Auto Manual Unit Circuit A Cooling General Circuit A Display Time of Day Control Current
Display Test Mode Temperatures Pressures Setpoints Inputs Outputs Configuration (TIME) Type Alarms
(VIEW) (TEST) (UNIT) (PRC.A) (COOL) (GEN.I) (CIR.A) (DISP) (SLCT) (R.ALM)
Remote Quick Circuit A Circuit B Heating Circuit B Unit Operating Current
User Test Day, Date
Temperatures Pressures Setpoints Outputs Configuration Modes Alarms
Interface Mode (DATE)
(CIR.A) (PRC.B) (HEAT) (CIR.B) (UNIT) (MODE) (ALRM)
(R.CCN) (QUIC)
Machine Circuit B Circuit C Misc. Circuit C Service Alarm
Starts/ Schedule 1
Temperatures Pressures Setpoints Outputs Configurations History
Hours (SCH1)
(CIR.B) (PRC.C) (MISC) (CIR.C) (SERV) (H.ALM)
(RUN)
Compressor Circuit C General Options Schedule 2
Run Hours Temperatures Outputs Configuration (SCH2)
(HOUR) (CIR.C) (GEN.O) (OPTN)
Compressor Reset, Demand Holidays
Starts Limit, Master/Slave (HOLI)
(STRT) (RSET)
Service
Fan Run Maintenance
Hours Configuration
(FAN) (MCFG)
Compressor
Disable
(CP.UN)
Predictive
Maintenance
(MAIN)
Software
Versions
(VERS)
SIO
(LEN) + G – + G – + G –
STATUS
J10 J13 J9D

19 J12 + G -
CH9
221 221
J7D
J9C J9B
221 221 J9A
J7C
CH8
CCN
CH7
J7B
THERMISTORS PRESSURES
CH6
J7A
CH5
CH4
CH3
J6
CH2
D15
J1A TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 K1 K2
12/11 12/11
CH1
MOV1 195
195
DISCRETE
C41 C42 C43 195 195 INPUTS
195
J15 C32 C33 C34 C35 RELAY 195 J5A
J2A J2B J2C OUTPUTS ANALOG J8 11 195
C16 J5B J5C
J3 INPUTS J4
CH C C
15B 16A CH16B CH17 CH18
CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH C
15A
LOCATION OF
SERIAL NUMBER
Fig. 3 — Main Base Board
5
Table 3 — Main Base Board Inputs and Outputs
SCROLLING MARQUEE CONNECTION POINT
DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE POINT NAME Pin Notation
MBB-J1A, MBB-J1B
Power (24 vac supply) — — — 11 24 vac
12 Ground
MBB-J9A, MBB-J9B,
MBB-J9C, MBB-J9D
Local Equipment Network — — — +
G
-
MBB-J12
Carrier Comfort Network® +
— — —
(CCN) G
-
External Chilled PMPI Switch INPUTSGEN.ILOCK MBB-J4-CH15A
Water Pump Interlock
MBB-J5A-CH15B
Chilled Water Flow Switch CWFS Switch INPUTSGEN.ILOCK
15B
Demand Limit Switch #1 Demand Limit SW1 Switch INPUTSGEN.IDLS1 MBB-J4-CH13
MBB-J7A-CH6
Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer 5V 5 vdc Ref.
DPTA PRESSUREPRC.ADP.A
Pressure Transducer (0-5 VDC) S Signal
R Return
MBB-J7C-CH8
Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer 5V 5 vdc Ref.
DPTB PRESSUREPRC.BDP.B
R Return
Dual Chiller DUAL 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITCHWS MBB-J6-CH3
LWT Thermistor
Dual Set Point Input Dual Set Point Switch INPUTSGEN.IDUAL MBB-J4-CH12
Entering Water Thermistor EWT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITEWT MBB-J6-CH2
Leaving Water Thermistor LWT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITLWT MBB-J6-CH1
Outdoor Air Thermistor OAT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITOAT MBB-J6-CH4
MBB-J5C-CH18
Pump #1 Interlock PMP1 18
Switch INPUTSGEN.IPUMP
Pump #2 Interlock PMP2
C
MBB-J5A-CH16B
Reverse Rotation Board Reverse Rotation Board Switch INPUTSGEN.IELEC
16B
MBB-J7B-CH7
Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer 5V 5 vdc Ref.
SPTA PRESSUREPRC.ASP.A
R Return
MBB-J7D-CH9
Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer 5V 5 vdc Ref.
SPTB PRESSUREPR.BSP.B
R Return
Unit Status Remote Contact-Off-Enable Switch INPUTSGEN.IONOF MBB-J4-CH11
Alarm Relay ALM R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OALRM MBB-J3-CH24
Alert Relay ALT R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OALRT MBB-J3-CH25
Cooler Heater CL-HT TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OCO.HT MBB-J2B-CH21
Circuit A Minimum MLV-A TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.AHGB.A MBB-J2C-CH22
Load Control*
Circuit B Minimum MLV-B TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.BHGB.B MBB-J2C-CH23
Load Control*
Pump #1 Starter PMP1 TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OPMP.1 MBB-J2A-CH19
Pump #2 Starter PMP2 TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OPMP.2 MBB-J2A-CH20
Ready Relay RDY R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OREDY MBB-J3-CH26
* Controls discharge and liquid line isolation solenoids for 30RB120-190
brine units only.
6
Scroll Protection Module (SPM)
There is one SPM per compressor and it is responsible for con-
trolling that compressor. See Fig. 4. The device controls the com- ON
LED1 LED2
pressor contactor and the compressor crankcase heater. The SPM
103
103
module also monitors the compressor motor temperature, and cir- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cuit high pressure switch. The SPM responds to commands from

the MBB (main base board) and sends the MBB the results of the
JP2
JP1
JP6
channels it monitors via the LEN (Local Equipment Network).
See below for SPM board address information. See Table 4 for
SPM inputs and outputs.
JP3
SPM-A1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D4
Address: ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Q4
JP4
JP5
C19
SPM-A2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D6 D5 D7
Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

F1 D9 Q5 U3
SPM-A3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Address: OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
SPM-A4 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Address: OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF QC1
SPM-B1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 QC2

Address: ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Q6 D8 Q3
SPM-B2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF C46 D13 D14
SPM-B3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SMD
Address: OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

LOCATION OF
SERIAL NUMBER
SPM-B4 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Address: OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF Fig. 4 — Scroll Protection Module
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board
SPM-C1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
At least one EXV board is used in all machines. There is one EXV
Address: ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
board for 2-circuit machines. Three-circuit machines have two
SPM-C2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXV boards. See Fig. 5. The board is responsible for monitoring
Address: OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF the return gas temperature thermistors. The board also signals the
EXV motors to open or close. The electronic expansion valve
board responds to commands from the MBB and sends the MBB
SPM-C3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 the results of the channels it monitors via the LEN (local equip-
Address: OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ment network). See below for DIP switch information for EXV1
and EXV2. See Tables 5-6 for EXV inputs and outputs.
SPM-C4 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Address: OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF EXV1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4
Address: 65 OFF OFF OFF OFF
EXV2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4

Address: 66 ON OFF OFF OFF
7
Table 4 — Scroll Protection Module Inputs and Outputs*
SPM-xn-J1
Power (24 vac supply) — — — QC1 24 vac
QC2 Ground
SPM-xn-JP1
1 +
2 G
3 -
Local Equipment Network — — —
SPM-xn-JP2
2 +
3 G
4 -
SPM-xn-JP3
Circuit x High Pressure Switch HPS-x Switch Not available 1
2
SPM-xn-JP4
Compressor xn Motor Temperature MTR-xn PTC Thermistor Not available 1
2
SPM-xn-JP5
Compressor xn Contactor Cxn Relay OUTPUTSCIR.xCP.xn 1
2
SPM-xn-JP6
Crankcase Heater CCH Relay OUTPUTSCIR.xHT.xn 1
2
SPM-xn-JP2
Circuit x High Pressure Switch HPS-x Switch Not available
1
* “x” denotes the circuit, A, B or C. “n” denotes the compressor number, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Table 5 — EXV1 Board Inputs and Outputs

EXV1-J1
12 Ground
EXV1-J4
1 +
Local Equipment Network — — —
2 G
3 –
EXV1-J3
Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor SGTA 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.ASGT.A
THA
EXV1-J3
Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor SGTB 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.BSGT.B
THB
EXV1-J2A
1
Circuit A EXV EXV-A Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.AEXV.A 2
3
4
EXV1-J2B
1
Circuit B EXV EXV-B Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.BEXV.B 2
3
4
8
Table 6 — EXV2 Inputs and Outputs
EXV2-J1
12 Ground
EXV2-J4
— 1 +
Local Equipment Network — —
2 G
3 –
EXV2J3
Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor SGTC 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.CSGT.C
THA
EXV2-J2A
1
Circuit C EXV EXV-C Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.CEXV.C 2
3
4
NOTE: EXV2 inputs and outputs are only used on 30RB210-300.
ADDRESS DIP SWITCH
NOTE: PIN1 OF EACH CONNECTOR MARKED WITH “1”
Fig. 5 — EXV Board
9
Fan Boards FAN BOARD 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
At least one fan board is installed in each unit (see Fig. 6 and 7), DIP Switch
except for 30RB080-190 units with the high-efficiency variable Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
condenser fan (HEVCF) option; fan boards are not used with this
option on these units. There are two types of fan boards, with and FAN BOARD 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
without an analog output signal for the low ambient head pressure DIP Switch
control fan speed controllers. If a unit does not have low ambient Address: ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
head pressure control installed, it will not have the analog connec-
tion terminals. The fan board responds to commands from the FAN BOARD 3
MBB and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP Switch
via the LEN. See below for fan board 1, 2 and 3 DIP switch ad- Address: OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
dresses. See Tables 7-9 for inputs and outputs.
LOCATION OF DIP SWITCH

SERIAL NUMBER
STATUS SIO (LEN)
D7
D5
ON
Q5
D8
S1
Y1
2
D6
1 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1
J9
L2
L5
24 VAC
U1
+
1
Q1
100K 100K
D3
2
G
Q60
100K
L3
–
Q12
3
U2
+
1
U21
Q11
U9
U8
Q10
2
G
U5
U6
U7
U10
–
3
U4
JP2
CH14
J8
CH13
C61
J7
CH13
J4 J5 D12 JP1
TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8
J2 J3
J6
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
Fig. 6 — Fan Board (AUX 1) with Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control
10
Table 7 — Fan Board 1 (AUX1, AUX2) Outputs*
FB1-J1
12 Ground
FB1-J9
+
G
Local Equipment Network — — — -
+
G
-
Circuit A Low Ambient FB1-CH9
Temperature Head Pressure MM-A† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.ASPD.A +
Control Speed Signal -
Circuit B Low Ambient Temperature FB1-CH10
Head Pressure Control Speed Signal MM-B† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.BSPD.B +
(sizes 060-150, 210-250) -
FB1-J2-CH1
(sizes 060-110)
FB1-J2-CH2
TRIAC
Outdoor Fan Motor 1 OFM1 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)
24 VAC FB1-J2-CH3
(sizes 160-190, 275, 300,
Duplex sizes 315-390)
FB1-J2-CH2
(sizes 060-110)
FB1-J2-CH3
TRIAC
24 VAC FB1-J2-CH4
(sizes 160-190, 275, 300,
FB1-J2-CH3
(sizes 060,070,090-110)
FB1-J3-CH5
(size 080)
TRIAC
Outdoor Fan Motor 3 OFM3 FB1-J2-CH1
24 VAC (sizes 120-150, 210-250)
FB1-J2-CH2
(sizes 160-190, 275, 300,
FB1-J2-CH4
(sizes 060,070,130,
150,210-250)
FB1-J3-CH6
TRIAC (size 080)
Outdoor Fan Motor 4 OFM4 24 VAC FB1-J3-CH7
(sizes 090-110)
FB1-J3-CH5
(sizes 160-190, 275-300,
FB1-J3-CH5
(sizes 090-110)
FB1-J3-CH6
TRIAC
24 VAC FB1-J2-CH1
(sizes 160-190, 275-300,
FB1-J3-CH6
(sizes 090-110,
TRIAC 160-190, 275-300,
Outdoor Fan Motor 6 OFM6 24 VAC Duplex sizes 315-390)
FB1-J3-CH7
(sizes 120-150, 210-250)
TRIAC FB1-J3-CH5
Outdoor Fan Motor 7 OFM7 24 VAC (sizes 120-150, 210-250)
TRIAC FB1-J3-CH8
Outdoor Fan Motor 8 OFM8 24 VAC (sizes 120-150, 210-250)
*Fan boards 1 and 2 will use the AUX1 board when the low ambient NOTES:
temperature head pressure control option is installed. 1. Fan board 1 is used on 30RB060-390.
†Supplied on AUX1 board only. 2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is de-
energized.
11
LOCATION OF DIP SWITCH
SERIAL NUMBER
STATUS SIO (LEN)
Q5
D7
ON
D5
S1
Y1
J9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D6
J1
L2
24 VAC
U1
+
1
Q1
100K 100K
2
G
D3
–
3
100K
U2
Q12
+
1
C3
Q9
Q3
Q7
2
G
Q2
U5
Q10
Q11
U9
U8
–
3
U6
D4
Q13
J4
TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

J2
J3
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
Fig. 7 — Fan Board (AUX 2) without Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control
Table 8 — Fan Board 2 (AUX1, AUX2) Outputs*

FB2-J1
12 Ground
FB2-J9
+
G
+
G
-
Circuit B Low Ambient Temperature FB2-CH9
Head Pressure Control +
MM-B† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.BSPD.B
Speed Signal
(sizes 160-190, 275-300, 315-400) -
FB2-J2-CH2
TRIAC (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)
Outdoor Fan Motor 7 OFM7† 24 VAC FB2-J2-CH3
(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)
FB2-J2-CH3
TRIAC (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)
(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)
FB2-J2-CH1
TRIAC (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)
(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)
FB2-J2-CH4
TRIAC (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)
(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)
TRIAC FB2-J2-CH1
Outdoor Fan Motor 11 OFM11 24 VAC (sizes 190, 275-300, 360A, 390)
TRIAC FB2-J3-CH6
Outdoor Fan Motor 12 OFM12 24 VAC (sizes 190, 275-300, 360A, 390)
*Fan boards 1 and 2 will use the AUX1 board when the low ambient NOTES:
temperature head pressure control option is installed. 1. Fan board 2 used on 30RB160-190, 275-300, 315-390.
†Output only on units with low ambient temperature head pressure con- 2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is de-
trol installed (AUX1). energized.
12
Table 9 — Fan Board 3 (AUX1) Inputs and Outputs
CONNECTION POINT
SCROLLING MARQUEE (Unit Size)
DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE POINT NAME
Pin Notation
FB3-J1
12 Ground
FB3-J9
+
G
+
G
-
Circuit C Discharge Pressure Transducer
DPTC PRESSUREPRC.CDP.C FB3-J7-CH13
Pressure Transducer (0-5 VDC)
Circuit C Suction Pressure Transducer
SPTC PRESSUREPRC.CSP.C FB3-J8-CH14
Pressure Transducer (0-5 VDC)
Minimum Load FB3-J3-CH7
MLV-C* TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.CHGB.C
Value Circuit C (sizes 210-300)
Circuit C Low Ambient FB3-CH9
Temperature Head Pressure +
MM-C† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.CSPD.C
Control Speed Signal
(sizes 210-300) -
FB3-J2-CH2
TRIAC (sizes 210, 225)
(size 250)
FB3-J2-CH3
(size 250)
FB3-J2-CH1
(size 250)
FB3-J2-CH3
(size 250)
FB3-J2-CH1
(size 250)
TRIAC FB3-J2-CH2
Outdoor Fan Motor 13 OFM13 24 VAC (size 275)
FB3-J2-CH3
(size 300)
FB3-J3-CH6
(size 250)
TRIAC FB3-J2-CH3
FB3-J2-CH4
(size 300)
FB3-J2-CH1
TRIAC (size 275)
(size 300)
FB3-J2-CH4
TRIAC (size 275)
(size 300)
TRIAC FB3-J2-CH1
TRIAC FB3-J3-CH6
*Controls discharge and liquid line isolation soleniods for 30RB210-300 NOTES:
brine units. 1. Fan board 3 used on 30RB210-300.
†Low ambient temperature head pressure control output is on AUX1 2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is de-
board only. energized.
13
Reverse Rotation Board
The reverse rotation board monitors the three-phase electrical sys-
tem to provide phase reversal, phase loss and under-voltage pro-
tection. See Fig. 8. The reverse rotation board has two LEDs
(light-emitting diodes) and two adjustable dial settings. Under nor-
mal conditions, the upper LED will light up green. The lower
LED is red and will flash (phase reversal) or turn on solid (phase
loss and under-voltage) according to the conditions sensed.
DIAL SETTINGS
The reverse rotation board has two dials. See Fig. 8. The upper
dial should be set to match the incoming three-phase voltage to the
chiller with no compressors running. This dial must be adjusted
for 208/230-v chillers operating on 208-v power supply. The dial
should be adjusted to 200-v minimum setting for this case. The
lower dial is used for trip delay and should be set fully counter-
clockwise to the minimum 0.1 second setting.
PHASE REVERSAL PROTECTION
The control monitors the three-phase power sequence supplied at
terminals L1, L2, and L3. If the control senses an incorrect phase
relationship, the relay contacts (11/14) on the board will open. The
relay contacts will automatically reset when the correct phase se-
quence is applied.
PHASE LOSS AND UNDER-VOLTAGE PROTECTION
If the reverse rotation board senses that any one of the three phase
inputs has no AC voltage or that any one phase has dropped more
than 20% below the voltage dial setting, the relay contacts (11/14)
on the board will open. Contacts will reset automatically when all
three phases are present, in the correct sequence and are within the
limits of the voltage dial setting.
LED STATUS FUNCTION

Relay contacts closed (normal
Upper (green) LED on continuously operation)
Relay contacts open (phase
Lower (red) LED blinking Fig. 8 — Reverse Rotation Board (RRB)
reversal has occurred)
Relay contacts open (phase loss or Energy Management Module (EMM)
Lower (red) LED on continuously under-voltage has occurred)
Upper (green) LED off Power not present at L1, L2, L3 (off) The EMM is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-in-
stalled accessory. The EMM receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the
NOTE: Normal operation of the reverse rotation board (for exam- temperature reset, cooling set point reset and demand limit func-
ple, no faults are detected) results in a closed contact being applied tions. The EMM also receives the switch inputs for the field-in-
to the MBB (plug J5A, channel 16B) through the closed 11/14 re- stalled second stage 2-step or 3-step demand limit, ice done, occu-
lay contact. pancy overrides, and remote lockout functions. The EMM com-
Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch municates the status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB
adjusts the control point, capacity limit, and other functions ac-
This switch is installed in all units and provides the owner and ser- cording to the inputs received. The EMM generates a 0 to 10 vdc
vice person with a local means of enabling or disabling the ma- output that directly corresponds to the unit percent total capacity.
chine. It is a 3-position switch used to control the chiller. When Contacts indicating unit run status and shutdown status are provid-
switched to the Enable position the chiller is under its own control. ed. See Table 10 and Fig. 9.
Move the switch to the Off position to shut the chiller down. Move
the switch to the Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry
contact can be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capa- CAUTION
ble of handling a 24-vac, 20-mA load. In the Enable and Remote
Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-
operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN config- turer’s control systems due to possible power supply differ-
uration and set point control. ences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification, which
could lead to equipment damage. The two different power
Emergency On/Off Switch supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink controls use half wave
This switch is installed in all units. The Emergency On/Off switch rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if
should only be used when it is required to shut the chiller off im- incorporating a full wave bridge rectifier signal generating
mediately. Power to the MBB, energy management module, and device is used.
scrolling marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off
and all outputs from these modules will be turned off. Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim
The EMM HR is available as a factory-installed option. The
EMM HR communicates the status of all of the inputs with the
MBB. The MBB then determines the appropriate operating mode.
Operating modes are: normal cooling, heat reclaim, and simulta-
neous one circuit cooling/one circuit heat reclaim. See Table 11
and Fig. 9.
14
+ G - + G -
SIO LEN SIO LEN
100K
221 221
CH 7
100K
221 221
100K
100K
J8
CH 6
CH 5
J7B
100K
J7A
CH
4
CH
3
CH
2
CH
1
CH
J6
15
CH
14
CH
13
CH
12
12 11
24 VAC
11b
CH
J5
CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
17 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J1 J2A J2B J3 J4
Fig. 9 — Energy Management Module and Energy Management Heat Reclaim Module
Table 10 — Energy Management Module (EMM) Inputs and Outputs

INPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT
4-20 mA or 0-5 vdc Demand Limit 4-20 mA Demand Limit 0-5 vdc* INPUTSGEN.IDMND EMM-J7B-CH6
4-20 mA Temperature Reset/
4-20 mA or 0-5 vdc Temperature Reset/Setpoint 0-5 vdc* INPUTSGEN.IRSET EMM-J7A-CH5
Set point
Demand Limit SW2 Demand Limit Step 2 Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IDLS2 EMM-J4-CH9
Ice Done Ice Done Switch Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IICE.D EMM-J4-CH11A
Occupancy Override Occupied Schedule Override Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IOCCS EMM-J4-CH8
Remote Lockout Switch Chiller Lockout Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IRLOC EMM-J4-CH10
Space Temperature
SPT 10k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITSPT EMM-J6-CH2
Thermistor
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT
% Total Capacity 0-10 vdc OUTPUTSGEN.OCATO EMM-J8-CH7
RUN R Run Relay Relay OUTPUTSGEN.ORUN EMM-J3-CH24
SHD R Shutdown Relay Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OSHUT EMM-J3-CH25
* 250 ohm, 1/2 watt resistor required for 4-20 mA input.
15
Table 11 — Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim (EMM HR) Inputs and Outputs
INPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT
PD.B Circuit B Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pressure Transducer PRESSURECIR.BPD.B EMM-J8-CH6
PD.A Circuit A Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pressure Transducer PRESSURECIR.APD.A EMM-J8-CH5
HRS.B Circuit B Liquid Subcooling — TEMPERATURECIR.BHRS.B —
HRS.A Circuit A Liquid Subcooling — TEMPERATURECIR.AHRS.A —
HRT.B Circuit B Liquid Temperature Temperature TEMPERATURECIR.BHRT.B EMM-J5-CH4
HRT.A Circuit A Liquid Temperature Temperature TEMPERATURECIR.AHRT.A EMM-J5-CH3
HEWT Heat Reclaim Entering Fluid Temperature TEMPERATUREUNITHEWT EMM-J5-CH2
HLWT Heat Reclaim Leaving Fluid Temperature TEMPERATUREUNITHLWT EMM-J5-CH1
C.FLO Condenser Flow Switch Status Switch INPUTSGEN.IC.FLO EMM-J5-CH15
— Power (24 vac supply) — — EMM-J1-CH11,12
— Local Equipment Network — — EMM-J9
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT
Condenser 0-10 VDC Water Valve Output 0-10 VDC — EMM-J8-CH7
CND.P Heat Reclaim Condenser Pump Status Contactor OUTPUTSGEN.OCND.P EMM-J2-CH16
CN.HT Heat Reclaim Condenser Heater Contactor OUTPUTSGEN.OCN.HT EMM-J2-CH17
HR2.A Circuit A, Leaving Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR2.A EMM-J2-CH18
HR2.B Circuit B, Leaving Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR2.B EMM-J2-CH19
HR3.A Circuit A, Entering Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR3.A EMM-J2-CH20
HR3.B Circuit B, Entering Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR3.B EMM-J2-CH21
HR4.A Circuit A, Leaving Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR4.A EMM-J2-CH22
HR4.B Circuit B, Leaving Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR4.B EMM-J2-CH23
HR1.A Circuit A, Entering Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR1.A EMM-J3-CH24
HR1.B Circuit B, Entering Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR1.B EMM-J3-CH25
Local Equipment Network module to module. The J9A connector on the MBB provides
Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire commu- communication directly to the scrolling marquee display or
nication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). External con- the Navigator™ display module.
nection to the LEN bus is made at TB3. YELLOW LED
Board Addresses The MBB has one yellow LED. The Carrier Comfort Network®
All boards (except the main base board and the energy manage- (CCN) LED will blink during times of network communication.
ment module) have 8-position DIP switches. Addresses for all Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface
boards are listed with the input/output tables for each board.
All 30RB units can be connected to the CCN, if desired. The com-
Control Module Communication munication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain
wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements are
RED LED connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement.
Proper operation of the control boards can be visually checked by The positive pin of each system element communication connec-
looking at the red status LEDs (light-emitting diodes). When oper- tor must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on ei-
ating correctly, the red status LEDs will blink in unison at a rate of ther side of it, that is also required for the negative and signal
once every 2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections for CCN
verify that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure should be made at TB3. Consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for
that the MBB is supplied with the current software. If necessary, further information. See Fig. 10.
reload software. If the problem still persists, replace the MBB. A NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American
red LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of once per Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conduc-
second or faster indicates that the board should be replaced. tors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon1, or
GREEN LED polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an
outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a
All boards have a green LEN (SIO) LED which should be minimum operating temperature range of –20°C to 60°C is re-
blinking whenever power is on. If the LEDs are not blinking quired. See Table 12 for recommended wire manufacturers and
as described check LEN connections for potential communi- part numbers.
cation errors at the board connectors. See Table 3 for LEN
connector designations. A 3-wire bus accomplishes commu-
nication between modules. These 3 wires run in parallel from 1. Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont.
Fig. 10 — ComfortLink CCN Communication Wiring
16
Table 12 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring more than the configured Cool Ramp Loading (Setpoints
COOLCRMP), the control does not allow any changes to the
PART NUMBER current stage of capacity.
MANUFACTURER
Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring
MINUTES OFF TIME (ConfigurationOPTN DELY) is a
Alpha 1895 — time delay added to the start when the machine is commanded ON.
American A21451 A48301 This is a field configurable item from 1 to 15 minutes. The factory
Belden 8205 884421 default is 1 minute. This feature is useful when multiple units are in-
Columbia D6451 — stalled. Staggering the start will reduce the inrush potential.
Manhattan M13402 M64430
Quabik 6130 —
Dual Chiller Control
The dual chiller routine is available for the control of two parallel
When connecting to a CCN communication bus, use a color-cod- units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This control is de-
ing scheme for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is signed for a parallel fluid flow arrangement only. One chiller must
recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the be configured as the master chiller, the other as the slave chiller.
signal negative, and white for the signal ground. Use a similar An additional leaving fluid temperature thermistor (dual chiller
scheme for cables containing different colored wires. LWT) must be installed in the common chilled water piping as de-
At each system element, tie the shields of its communication bus scribed in the Installation Instructions for both the master and
cables together. If the communication bus is entirely within one slave chillers. See the Field Wiring section in the 30RB Installa-
building, the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a tion Instructions for dual chiller LWT sensor control wiring. A
ground at one point only. If the communication bus cable exits chilled water flow switch is factory-installed for each chiller.
from one building and enters another, the shields must be connect- Parallel chiller control with dedicated pumps is recommended.
ed to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where Chiller must start and stop its own water pump located on its own
the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). piping. If pumps are not dedicated for each chiller, chiller isolation
To connect the unit to the network: valves are required: each chiller must open and close its own isola-
1. Turn off power to the control box. tion valve through the control (valve shall be connected to the
2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white pump outputs). Pump Control is enabled as described in the Cool-
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropriate er Pump Control section on page 29. One additional parameter is
colors for different colored cables.) set for the dual chiller control. Lag Unit Pump Select (Configura-
3. Connect red wire to (+) terminal on TB3 of the plug, white tionRSET LAGP) allows the user to configure the control to
energize the pump for the lag chiller once the unit enters an occu-
wire to COM terminal, and black wire to the (–) terminal. pied time period or delay the control until the lag chiller is started.
4. The RJ14 CCN connector on TB3 can also be used, but is It is recommended that this parameter be set to 0, OFF IF UNIT
only intended for temporary connection (for example, a lap- STOPPED. The control of the slave chiller is directed through
top computer running Service Tool). commands emitted by the master chiller. The slave chiller has no
action in master/slave operations; it shall only verify that CCN
Important: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some rou- communication with its master is present. See the Dual Chiller Se-
tines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If quence of Operation section on page 44.
abnormal conditions occur, disconnect the CCN bus. If condi- Use dual chiller control to designate a lead chiller between the
tions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. master and slave chiller. Configure the Lead/Lag Balance Select
Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus (ConfigurationRSETLLBL) to ENBL to base the selection
can cause problems with all system elements on the bus. on the Lead/Lag Balance Delta (Configuration RSET
LLBD) between the master and slave run hours. If the run hour
Configuration Options difference between the master and the slave remains less than
The unit Remote-OFF-Enable switch must be in the OFF position LLBD, the chiller designated as the lead will remain the lead
while making changes. If the unit switch is not in the OFF position, chiller. The Lead/Lag changeover between the master and the
REJECTED may be displayed on the scrolling marquee display. slave chiller due to hour balance will occur during chiller operat-
MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL (ConfigurationUNIT ing odd days, such as day 1, day 3, and day 5 of the month, at
HGBP) reduces the capacity of the 30RB chiller below the low- 12:00 a.m. If a lead chiller is not designated, the master chiller will
est standard capacity step by use of hot gas bypass. This capacity always be designated the lead chiller.
step reduction provides more precise control of the leaving water The dual chiller control algorithm has the ability to delay the start
temperature. The minimum load valve accessory cannot be of the lag chiller in two ways. The Lead Pulldown Time (Configu-
used on units configured for brine as the cooler fluid type rationRSETLPUL) provides a field configurable time delay
(Configuration→ SERV?→FLUD). Refer to Brine Chiller Oper- of 0 to 60 minutes. This time delay gives the lead chiller a chance
ation for additional information. to remove the heat that the chilled water loop picked up while be-
ing inactive during an unoccupied period. The Lead Pulldown
Minimum Load Control can be configured in three different ways. Time parameter is a one-time delay initiated after starting the lead
If Minimum Load Control is not used, HGBP must be set to 0. If chiller, manually or by a schedule, before checking whether to
HGBP is set to 1, the control will activate the minimum load control start an additional chiller. This routine provides the lead chiller an
valve when the machine is started only. This will be the first step of opportunity to pull down the loop temperature before starting an-
capacity. If HGBP is set to 2, all stages of capacity can utilize the other chiller. The second time delay, Lead/Lag Delay (Configura-
minimum load control valve. If HGBP is set to 3, the minimum tion RSETLLDY) is a time delay imposed between the last
load control valve will be used only when the circuit has a high pres- stage of the lead chiller and the start of the lag chiller. This pre-
sure override active. This will reduce the capacity of the circuit. vents enabling the lag chiller until the lead/lag delay timer has ex-
RAMP LOADING (ConfigurationOPTNRL.S) limits the pired. See Tables 13 and 14.
rate of change of leaving fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cool-
ing mode and configured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 The Lag Unit Pump Select configuration must be set consistently. If
comparisons before deciding to change stages of capacity. The pump control is NOT being used, set ConfigurationRSET
LAGP to 1. If pump control IS being used, set Configuration
control calculates a temperature difference between the control RSETLAGP to 0, which is the default value. This must be set in
point and leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater both the master and slave chillers, and it must be consistent in both.
than 4°F (2.2°C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is
17
Table 13 — Configuring the Master Chiller
MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT
ENTER DISP
UNIT
SERV
OPTN
Confirm address of chiller. The master and slave chiller must
ENTER
CCNA CCN Address have different addresses.
ENTER
1 Factory default address is 1.
ESCAPE CCNA
Confirm the bus number of the chiller. The master and slave
CCNB CCN Bus Number chiller must be on the same bus.
ENTER 0 Factory default is 0.
ESCAPE CCNB
ESCAPE OPTN
RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp
ENTER CRST Cooling Reset Type
x5 MSSL Master/Slave Select
ENTER 0 Disable
ENTER 0 Disable Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password.
1 Master Use up arrows to change value to 1.
ENTER 1 Accepts the change.

ESCAPE MSSL
SLVA Slave Address
CONFIGURATION ENTER 1
ENTER 1 Flashing to indicate Edit mode.

Use up arrows to change value to 2. This address must
2 match the address of the slave chiller.
ESCAPE SLVA
LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select
ENTER ENBL Factory Default is ENBL

ESCAPE LLBL
LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta
ENTER 168 Factory Default is 168.

ESCAPE LLBD
LLDY Lead/Lag Start Delay

ESCAPE LLDY
LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select

Factory Default is 0, Off if unit is stopped. Master and slave
ENTER 0 Off if U Stp chiller must be configured to the same value.
ESCAPE LAGP
LPUL Lead Pulldown Time

ESCAPE
ESCAPE At mode level.
ENTER SLCT
ENTER OPER Operating Control Type

OPERATING
MODES Master chiller should be configured for job requirements,
ENTER
0 Switch Control Switch Control, Time Schedule, or CCN.
ESCAPE At mode level.
NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.
18
Table 14 — Configuring the Slave Chiller
ENTER DISP
UNIT
SERV
OPTN
Confirm address of chiller. The master and slave chiller must
CCNA CCN Address
ENTER
have different addresses.
Factory default address is 1. The slave chiller address must
1
ENTER
match what was programmed in the Master Chiller SLVA item.
ENTER 1 Flashing to indicate Edit Mode.
2 This item must match Master Chiller SLVA item.

ESCAPE
CCNA
Confirm the bus number of the chiller. The master and slave
CCNB CCN Bus Number chiller must be on the same bus.
ENTER 0 Factory default bus number is 0.
ESCAPE
CCNB
ESCAPE
OPTN
CONFIGURATION RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

x5 MSSL Master/Slave Select

ENTER 0 Disable
ENTER 0 Disable Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password
2 Slave Use up arrows to change value to 2.

ESCAPE
MSSL
SLVA Slave Address Not required.
LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select Not required.
LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta Not required.
LLDY Lead/Lag Start Delay Not required.
LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select Must be configured to the same value as the master chiller.
LPUL Lead Pulldown Time Not required.

ESCAPE
ESCAPE
At mode level
ENTER SLCT
ENTER OPER Operating Control Type
ENTER 0 Switch Control
ENTER 0 Flashing to indicate Edit Mode.
OPERATING MODES
Use up arrows to change value to 2.
2 CCN Control NOTE: Slave chiller must be configured for CCN.
ENTER 2 Accepts the value.
ESCAPE
OPER
ESCAPE
At mode level
19
Capacity Control The electronic expansion valves provide a controlled start-up.
The control system cycles compressors and minimum load valve During start-up, the low pressure logic in the lead circuit will be
solenoids (if equipped) to maintain the user-configured leaving ignored for 5 minutes to allow for the transient changes during
chilled fluid temperature set point. Entering fluid temperature is start-up. As additional stages of compression are required, the pro-
used by the main base board (MBB) to determine the temperature cessor control will add them. The following example is based on a
drop across the cooler and is used in determining the optimum 30RB225 machine, which has three 25-ton compressors in each
time to add or subtract capacity stages. Entering fluid temperature, circuit. See Table 15.
space temperature (requires additional sensor), or outdoor-air tem- Each example below has different configurations and is intended
perature reset features can automatically reset the leaving chilled to illustrate the loading sequences possible for normal operation.
fluid temperature set point. It can also be reset from an external 4 In Example 1 (Table 16), assume the following configurations are
to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module). in place:
The control has an automatic lead-lag feature built in for circuit ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control in-
and compressor starts. If enabled, the control will determine which stalled and enabled for
circuit (ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0) and compressor to Start-Up Only
start to even the wear. The compressor wear factor (combination
of starts and run hours) is used to determine which compressor ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=0 Equal Circuit Loading
starts. ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0 Automatic Circuit Select
Compressor Wear Factor = (Compressor Starts) + 0.1 (Compres- Since Circuit A has the lowest average wear factor, it will be the
sor Run Hours) lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor A3 has the lowest wear
factor and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The
In this case, the circuit with the lowest average compressor wear next stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will
factor (the average of the wear factors of all available compressors start another circuit because of the Equal Circuit Loading configu-
in the circuit) is the circuit that starts first. The compressor within ration. The next circuit with the lowest wear factor is Circuit B,
the circuit with the lowest wear factor is the first to start. If the au- and the compressor with the lowest wear factor is B2. The next
tomatic lead-lag function for the circuit is not enabled [Configura- stage will be a circuit C compressor. The process continues until
tionOPTNLLCS=1 (Circuit A leads), 2 (Circuit B leads), or all compressors are ON. See Table 16.
3 (Circuit C leads)], then the selected circuit will be the first to
start. Again, the compressor with the lowest wear factor within the In Example 2 (Table 17), assume the compressor starts and run
circuit will be the first to start. If Minimum Load Control is en- hours are the same as in the previous example and the following
abled (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1), the valve will be op- configurations are in place:
erational only during the first stage of cooling. ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control in-
Once the lead compressor has been started, the lag compressors stalled and enabled for
will be determined by the wear factor and loading sequence select- Start-Up Only
ed. If equal loading is selected, (ConfigurationOPTN ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1 Staged Circuit Loading
LOAD=0), the circuit with the lowest average wear factor for the ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0 Automatic Circuit Select
available compressors will start next, with the compressor with the
lowest wear factor starting. The control will attempt to keep all Since Circuit A has the lowest average wear factor, it will be the
circuits at approximately the same number of compressors ON. lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor A3 has the lowest wear
For this option to function properly, all circuits must have the factor and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The
same number of compressors available. If a circuit compressor is next stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will
not available due to an alarm condition or demand limit, the ca- start a compressor in the same circuit because of the Staged Cir-
pacity staging will change to staged. If staged loading is selected, cuit Loading configuration. Compressor A2 has the next lowest
(ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1), the started circuit will con- wear factor and will be started next. Compressor A3 will be next
tinue to turn on compressors according to the lowest wear factor to start. Since all compressors in Circuit A are ON, the next stage
until all are on, then start the next circuit with the lowest average will start another circuit. Of the remaining circuits, Circuit B has
wear factor. If Minimum Load Control is enabled for close control the lowest wear factor, and the compressor with the lowest wear
(ConfigurationUNITHGBP=2), the valve will be available factor is B2. All of the Circuit B compressors will be started in the
at all stages for better temperature control. If Minimum Load Con- same manner as Circuit A. Once all Circuit B compressors are
trol is enabled for high ambient control (Configuration ON, then Circuit C will be started. The process continues until all
UNITHGBP=3), the valve will be used only when a high pres- compressors are ON. See Table 17.
sure override is active for that circuit.
Table 15 — Compressor Starts and Run Hours
CIRCUIT AVERAGE
COMPRESSOR STARTS RUN HOURS WEAR FACTOR WEAR FACTOR
A1 25 249 49.9
A2 22 237 45.7 44.8
A3 26 128 38.8
B1 41 453 86.3
B2 38 138 51.8 67.6
B3 35 297 64.7
C1 93 103 103.3
C2 57 98 66.8 80.3
C3 61 99 70.9
20
Table 16 — Compressor Stages and Circuit Cycling, Example 1
CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C
TOTAL
STAGE Cir. Cir. Cir.
CAP. MLC A1 A2 A3 MLC B1 B2 B3 MLC C1 C2 C3
Cap. Cap. Cap.
0 0 0 0 0
1 8 24 X X 0 0
2 11 33 X 0 0
3 22 33 X 33 X 0
4 33 33 X 33 X 33 X
5 44 66 X X 33 X 33 X
6 55 66 X X 66 X X 33 X
7 66 66 X X 66 X X 66 X X
8 77 100 X X X 66 X X 66 X X
9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X
10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X
LEGEND NOTES:
MLC — Minimum Load Control 1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity) are
approximate percentage values.
2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit load-
ing, and automatic circuit select.
Table 17 — Compressor Stages and Circuit Cycling, Example 2

TOTAL
STAGE Cir. Cir. Cir.
CAP. MLC A1 A2 A3 MLC B1 B2 B3 MLC C1 C2 C3
Cap. Cap. Cap.
0 0 0 0 0
1 8 24 X X 0 0
2 11 33 X 0 0
3 22 66 X X 0 0
4 33 100 X X X 0 0
5 44 100 X X X 33 X 0
6 55 100 X X X 66 X X 0
7 66 100 X X X 100 X X X 0
8 77 100 X X X 100 X X X 33 X
9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X
10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X
LEGEND NOTES:
2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit load-
ing, and automatic circuit select.
In Example 3 (Table 18), assume the following configurations are Since Circuit C has been selected, it will be the lead circuit. Within
in place: the circuit, compressor C2 has the lowest wear factor and will start
ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next stage will turn
installed and enabled for OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will start a compressor in
Start-Up Only the same circuit because of the Staged Circuit Loading configura-
tion. Compressor C3 has the next lowest wear factor and will be
ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=0 Equal Circuit Loading started next. Compressor C1 will be next to start. Since all com-
ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=2 Circuit B Leads pressors in Circuit C are ON, the next stage will start another cir-
Since Circuit B has been selected, it will be the lead circuit. Within cuit. Of the remaining circuits, Circuit A has the lowest wear fac-
the circuit, compressor B2 has the lowest wear factor and will start tor, and the compressor with the lowest wear factor is A3. All of
first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next stage will turn the Circuit A compressors will be started in the same manner as
OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will start another circuit Circuit C. Once all Circuit A compressors are ON, then Circuit B
because of the Equal Circuit Loading configuration. Comparing will be started. The process continues until all compressors are
Circuit A and C, the circuit with the lowest average wear factor is ON. See Table 19.
Circuit A, and the compressor with the lowest wear factor is A3. If the circuit capacity is to be reduced, the compressor with the
The next stage will be a circuit C compressor. The process contin- highest wear factor will be shut off first (in most cases). With
ues until all compressors are ON. See Table 18. Equal Circuit Loading, stages will be removed from each circuit,
In Example 4 (Table 19), assume the compressor starts and run following the same criteria used in the loading sequence, but in the
hours are the same as in the first example and the following con- opposite order. Shown in Table 19 based on the current wear fac-
figurations are in place: tor in the opposite to the loading sequence shown above, the com-
pressor with the highest wear factor will be removed first. When
ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control Staged Circuit Loading is selected, the capacity from the last lag
installed and enabled for circuit will be removed first.
Start-Up Only
ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1 Staged Circuit Loading
ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=3 Circuit C Leads
21
Table 18 — Compressor Stage and Circuit Cycling, Example 3
TOTAL CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C
STAGE CAP. Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir. Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3
0 0 0 0 0
1 8 0 X 24 X X 0
2 11 0 33 X 0
3 22 33 X 33 X 0
4 33 33 X 33 X 33 X
5 44 33 X 66 X X 33 X
6 55 66 X X 66 X X 33 X
7 66 66 X X 66 X X 66 X X
8 77 66 X X 100 X X X 66 X X
9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X
10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X
LEGEND NOTES:
2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit loading,
and automatic circuit select.
Table 19 — Compressor Stage and Circuit Cycling, Example 4

TOTAL CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C
STAGE CAP. Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir. Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3
0 0 0 0 0
1 8 0 0 24 X X
2 11 0 0 33 X
3 22 0 0 66 X X
4 33 0 0 100 X X X
5 44 33 X 0 100 X X X
6 55 66 X X 0 100 X X X
7 66 100 X X X 0 100 X X X
8 77 100 X X X 33 X 100 X X X
9 88 100 X X X 66 X X 100 X X X
10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X
LEGEND NOTES:
2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit loading,
and automatic circuit select.
The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The al- B only for size 120). The control system must be correctly config-
gorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired ured for proper operation. The minimum load valve option must
set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and be enabled (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1) and the fluid
leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at type must be set to medium temperature brine (Configuration
which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based SERVFLUD=2). The Minimum Load Valve output is used
on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio (SM2) is calculated to control the discharge and liquid line solenoid valves. As a re-
using the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any sult, Minimum Load Control (Hot Gas Bypass) cannot be utilized
changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value rang- on brine duty chillers. The discharge and liquid line solenoid
es from –100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a com- valves are wired in parallel so they will both open and close at the
pressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the ratio same time. The main function of the solenoid valves is to isolate a
reaches +100% (–100%). portion of the condenser section when only a single compressor is
If the next stage of capacity is the Minimum Load Control, the running to allow for proper oil return to the compressors. A chart
control energizes (deenergizes) the Minimum Load Control when showing solenoid operation is shown below:
the ratio reaches +60% (–60%). If installed, the minimum load
valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity. DISCHARGE/LIQUID
The control will also use the minimum load valve solenoid as the CIRCUIT CAPACITY SOLENOID VALVE
OPERATION
last stage of capacity before turning off the last compressor. If the
close control feature (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=2) is en- All compressors off Solenoids energized
abled the control will use the minimum load valve solenoid when- Solenoids deenergized after
One compressor starting 30-second delay
ever possible to fine tune leaving fluid temperature control. A de-
lay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity step change with Two or more compressors running Solenoids energized
Minimum Load Control. A delay of 3 minutes occurs after each Reduction from two to one Solenoids deenergized with no
compressor running delay
compressor capacity step change.
NOTE: Minimum load valve (HGBP) cannot be utilized if fluid
BRINE CHILLER OPERATION type is set to medium temperature brine (Configuration 
For chiller sizes 120 to 390 with the factory-installed brine option, SERVFLUD=2).
discharge and liquid line solenoids are added to all circuits (Circuit
22
CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES (Run Status VIEWLWT) and the Control Point (Run Status
The following capacity control overrides (Run StatusVIEW VIEWCTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the rate of
CAP.S) will modify the normal operation routine. If any of the fol- change of the water temperature is greater than –0.1°F/min, a
lowing override conditions listed below is satisfied, it will deter- stage will be added.
mine the capacity change instead of the normal control. Override #12: High Temperature Cooling
Override #1: Cooler Freeze Protection This override runs only when Minimum Load Control is Enabled
This override attempts to avoid the freeze protection alarm. If the (ConfigurationUNITHGBP = 1, 2 or 3). This override will
Leaving Water Temperature is less than Brine Freeze Set Point add a stage of capacity if the next stage is Minimum Load Control,
(ConfigurationSERVLOSP) + 2.0°F (1.1°C) then remove a when the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature
stage of capacity. (Run StatusVIEWLWT) and the Control Point (Run Sta-
tusVIEWCTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the rate of
NOTE: The freeze set point is 34°F (1.1°C) for fresh water sys- change of the water temperature is greater than a fixed value.
tems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The freeze set point is
Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERV LOSP), for Override #13: Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay
Medium Temperature Brine systems Whenever a capacity step change has been made, either with Min-
(ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2). imum Load Control or a compressor, the control will remain at
Override #2: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature this capacity stage for the next 90 seconds. During this time, no
in Cooling capacity control algorithm calculations will be made. If the capac-
Override #3: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature ity step is a compressor, an additional 90-second delay is added to
in Cooling the previous hold time (see Override #22). This override allows
Override #4: Circuit C Low Saturated Suction Temperature the system to stabilize before another capacity stage is added or re-
in Cooling moved. If a condition of a higher priority override occurs, the
higher priority override will take precedence.
These overrides attempt to avoid the low suction temperature
alarms. This override is active only when more than one compres- Override #14: Slow Change Override
sor in a circuit is ON. If the Saturated Suction Temperature is less This override prevents compressor stage changes when the leav-
than Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) ing temperature is close to the control point and slowly moving to-
–18.0°F (–10°C) for 90 seconds, or the Saturated Suction Tem- wards the control point.
perature is less than –4°F (–20°C), a compressor in the affected Override #15: System Manager Capacity Control
circuit will be turned off.
If a Chillervisor module is controlling the unit and the Chillervisor
Override #5: Low Temperature Cooling module is controlling multiple chillers, the unit will add a stage to
This override removes one stage of capacity when the difference attempt to load to the demand limited value.
between the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) and the Override #16: Circuit A High Pressure Override
Leaving Water Temperature (Run StatusVIEWLWT) reach- Override #17: Circuit B High Pressure Override
es a predetermined limit and the rate of change of the water is 0 or Override #18: Circuit C High Pressure Override
still decreasing.
This override attempts to avoid a high pressure failure. The algo-
Override #6: Low Temperature Cooling rithm is run every 4 seconds. At least one compressor must be on
This override removes two stages of capacity when the Entering in the circuit. If the Saturated Condensing Temperature for the cir-
Water Temperature (Run StatusVIEWEWT) is less than the cuit is above the High Pressure Threshold (Configuration
Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT.) SERVHP.TH) then a compressor for that circuit will be re-
Override #7: Ramp Loading moved. If Minimum Load Control was enabled for High Ambient
(ConfigurationUNITHGBP=3), then the Minimum Control
If the unit is configured for ramp loading (Configura- Valve will be energized.
tionOPTNRL.S=ENBL) and if the difference between the
Leaving Water Temperature and the Control Point is greater than Override #19: Standby Mode
4º F (2.2º C) and the rate of change of the leaving water is greater This override algorithm will not allow a compressor to run if the
than Cool Ramp Loading Rate (SetpointsCOOLCRMP) then unit is in Standby mode, (Run StatusVIEWHC.ST=2).
no capacity stage increase will be made. Operating mode 5 Override #22: Minimum On Time Delay
(MD05) will be in effect. In addition to Override #13 Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time
Override #8: Service Manual Test Override Delay, for compressor capacity changes, an additional 90-second
The manual test consists in adding a stage of capacity every 30 delay will be added to Override #13 delay. No compressor will be
seconds, until the control enables all of the requested compressors deenergized until 3 minutes have elapsed since the last compressor
and Minimum Load Control selected in the ComfortLink display has been turned ON. When this override is active, the capacity
Service Test menu. All safeties and higher priority overrides are control algorithm calculations will be performed, but no capacity
monitored and acted upon. reduction will be made until the timer has expired. A control with
Override # 9: Demand Limit higher precedence will override the Minimum On Time Delay.
This override mode is active when a command to limit the capaci- Override #23: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction
ty is received. If the current unit capacity is greater than the active Temperature in Cooling
capacity limit value, a stage is removed. If the current capacity is Override #24: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction
lower than the capacity limit value, the control will not add a stage Temperature in Cooling
that will result in the new capacity being greater then the capacity Override #25: Circuit C Low Saturated Suction
limit value. Operating mode 4 (MD04) will be in effect. Temperature in Cooling
Override #10: Cooler Interlock Override If the circuit is operating in an area close to the operational limit of
the compressor, the circuit capacity will remain at the same point
This override prohibits compressor operation until the Cooler In- or unload to raise the saturated suction temperature. This algo-
terlock (InputsGEN.ILOCK) is closed. rithm will be active if at least one compressor in the circuit is on
Override #11: High Temperature Cooling and one of the following conditions is true:
This override algorithm runs once when the unit is switched to 1. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze
ON. If the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) – 6ºF (3.3ºC).
23
2. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze 4. All of these conditions must be true:
(ConfigurationSERVLOSP) and the circuit approach a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-
(Leaving Water Temperature – Saturated Suction Tempera- charge Temperature is less than Leaving Water Tem-
ture) is greater than 15ºF (8.3ºC) and the Circuit Superheat perature by more than 5.4ºF (3.0ºC).
(Return Gas Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-
is greater than 15ºF (8.3ºC). charge Temperature is less than 41º F (5º C).
NOTE: The freeze set point is 34ºF (1.1ºC) for fresh water c. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-
systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The freeze charge Temperature is less than the Outdoor Air Tem-
set point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Configura- perature by more than 9ºF (5ºC).
tionSERVLOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine If any of these conditions 1, 2, 3 or 4 are met, the appropriate oper-
systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2). ating mode, 21 (Circuit A), 22 (Circuit B) or 23 (Circuit C) will be
If any of these conditions are met, the appropriate operating mode, in effect.
21 (Circuit A), 22 (Circuit B) or 23 (Circuit C) will be in effect. Override #37: Circuit A Low Superheat
Override #26: Circuit A Operation Outside Compressor Override #38: Circuit B Low Superheat
Operating Envelope Override #39: Circuit C Low Superheat
Override #27: Circuit B Operation Outside Compressor This override attempts to avoid liquid slugging for the running
Operating Envelope compressors. It also protects against operation with excessively
Override #28: Circuit C Operation Outside Compressor high superheat. No capacity steps will be added to the affected cir-
Operating Envelope cuit until there is a superheat greater than 5ºF (2.8ºC) and less than
This override prevents compressor operation outside of its operat- 45ºF (25ºC). If the capacity of the machine must be increased, the
ing envelope. control will look to another circuit for additional capacity.
1. If the mean saturated discharge temperature (SDT) is greater Head Pressure Control
than 7°F (3.9°C) over the limit, the circuit is unloaded imme-
diately. STANDARD UNIT
2. If the mean SDT is over the limit (but not greater than 7°F The main base board (MBB) controls the condenser fans to main-
(3.9°C) over the limit) for 90 seconds, then the circuit is tain the lowest condensing temperature possible, and thus the
unloaded. highest unit efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing
3. If the mean SDT is more than the limit minus 2°F (1.1°C), the temperature input from the discharge pressure transducer to con-
trol the fans. Head pressure control is maintained through a calcu-
circuit is prevented from loading. This override shall remain lated set point which is automatically adjusted based on actual sat-
active until the mean pressure goes below the limit minus 3°F urated condensing and saturated suction temperatures so that the
(1.7°C). compressor(s) is (are) always operating within the manufacturer’s
Override #34: Circuit A Low Refrigerant Charge specified envelope (see Fig. 11). Each time a fan is added the cal-
Override #35: Circuit B Low Refrigerant Charge culated head pressure set point will be raised 25°F (13.9°C) for 35
Override #36: Circuit C Low Refrigerant Charge seconds to allow the system to stabilize. The control will automat-
The capacity override attempts to protect the compressor from ically reduce the unit capacity as the saturated condensing tem-
starting with no refrigerant in the circuit. This algorithm runs only perature approaches an upper limit. See capacity overrides 16-18.
when the circuit is not operational, (no compressors ON). There The control will indicate through an operating mode that high am-
are several criteria that will enable this override: bient unloading is in effect. If the saturated condensing tempera-
ture in a circuit exceeds the calculated maximum, the circuit will
1. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Discharge be stopped. For these reasons, there are no head pressure control
Temperature is less than –13°F (–10.6°C). methods or set points to enter. The control will turn off a fan stage
2. All of these conditions must be true: when the condensing temperature is below the minimum head
a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- pressure requirement for the compressor. Fan sequences are
charge Temperature is less than Leaving Water Tem- shown in Fig. 12.
perature by more than 5.4ºF (3.0ºC).
b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-
charge Temperature is less than 41°F (5°C). 160
c. Outdoor Air Temperature is less than 32°F (0ºC). 150

d. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-
Condensing Temperature (°F)
140
charge Temperature is less than the Outdoor Air Tem-
perature by more than 5.4º F (3.0ºC). 130
3. All of these conditions must be true: 120

a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- 110
charge Temperature is less than Leaving Water Tem-
perature by more than 5.4ºF (3.0ºC). 100
b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- 90

charge Temperature is less than 41ºF (5ºC). 80
c. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-
70
charge Temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point
(ConfigurationSERVLOSP) by more than 6ºF 60
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
(3.3ºC). Evaporating Temperature (°F)
NOTE: The freeze set point is 34ºF (1.1ºC) for fresh water
systems (Configuration SERVFLUD=1). The freeze
Fig. 11 — Compressor Operating Envelope
set point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Configura-
tionSERV LOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine
systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2).
24
FANS/ FAN STAGE
MODEL CIRCUIT LOCATION
CKT 1 2 3 4 5
Fan Number FM1 FM2 FM3 — —
A 3
Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 — —
060,070
CONTROL
FM1 FM3 Fan Number FM4 — — — —
B 1
BOX
Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 — — — —
FM2 FM4 Fan Number FM1 FM2 — — —
A 2
Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 — — —
080
Fan Number FM3 FM4 — — —
30RB060,070,080 B 2
Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 — — —

CONTROL
FM1 FM3 FM5 A 3

BOX

090,100,
FM2 FM4 FM6 110
B 3
30RB090,100,110 Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 — —

CONTROL
FM1 FM3 FM5 FM7 A 3

BOX
120
FM2 FM6 FM8 Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6 —
B 4
30RB120 Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8 —
Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 —

CONTROL
A 4
FM1 FM3 FM5 FM7
Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 —
BOX
130,150
FM2 FM4 FM6 FM8 Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6 —
B 4
30RB130,150 Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8 —
Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

CONTROL
FM1 FM3 FM5 FM7 FM9 A 6

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5
BOX
160,170
FM2 FM4 FM6 FM8 FM10 Fan Number FM9 FM7 FM10 FM8 —
B 4
30RB160,170 Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 —

A 6
190 FM10
Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM7 FM8
FM12
CONTROL
FM1 FM3 FM5 FM7 FM9

B 6
FM11
BOX

FM2 FM4 FM6 FM8 A 4
FM10 FM12 Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 —
210,225 B 4
30RB190,210,225 Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8 —
C 4
A 4
CONTROL
FM1 FM3 FM5 FM7 FM9 FM11 FM13

BOX

250 B 4
FM2 FM4 FM6 FM8 FM10 FM12 FM14
FM12
C 6 FM14
30RB250 Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4 FB3/CH5
A 6
CONTROL
FM1 FM3 FM5 FM7 FM9 FM11 FM13 FM15

FM10
BOX

275 B 6 FM12
FM2 FM4 FM6 FM8 FM10 FM12 FM14 FM16 Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5
30RB275 C 4
A 6
CONTROL
FM1 FM3 FM5 FM7 FM9 FM11 FM13 FM15 FM17

FM10
BOX

B 6 FM12
300
FM2 FM4 FM6 FM8 FM10 FM12 FM14 FM16 FM18 Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5
FM16
FM18
30RB300 C 6
Fig. 12 — Condenser Fan Staging (Standard Unit)
25
LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE Fan speed is controlled to maintain SCT set point. The set point is
CONTROL OPTION calculated from conditions and adjusted to the most efficient oper-
For low-ambient operation, the lead fan on a circuit can be ating point. Fixed set points are also used at low ambient and tran-
equipped with low ambient temperature head pressure control op- sition conditions. If the unit is operated in Service Test mode, the
tion or accessory. The Danfoss VLT controller adjusts fan speed to SCT set point is fixed at 125°F (51.7°C) for adjusting charge.
maintain the calculated head pressure set point. Table 20 lists re- Drive parameters are set by the chiller control each time the unit
quired configurations for Danfoss VLT low ambient head pressure power is cycled with the exception of the drive address. The drive
control option. address is set at the factory, but will have to be reset in case of
drive replacement. Addresses for the drives are shown below:
Table 20 — Danfoss VLT Required Configurations,
Low Ambient Head Pressure Control Option DRIVE ADDRESS
Drive Parameter Ckt A Ckt B Ckt C
POINT DESCRIPTION VALUE 8-31 181 182 183
NAME
VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A 1 The address is set using the display on the drive. See drive manual
VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B 1 for detailed instructions. Once the address is set, the power is cy-
0 (Unit sizes 060-190 and modular cled to reset all other parameters in the drive. Other parameters are
VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C units listed in Tables 22 and 23 for reference. Drive must be in “Auto”
1 (Unit sizes 210-300 only) mode to operate. Push the “Auto” button at the bottom of the
VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 1 drive. The light above it will be on.
RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM 1140 The 208-230v units with 6 condenser fans per circuit require two
FC Factory Country Code 1 drives to operate the fans. See Table 24. They are set up in a mas-
VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Nameplate voltage ter/slave configuration. The master drive is connected to the LEN
(208,380,460,575)* bus as described above. The slave drive is not connected to LEN.
*208/230 v units should be configured for 208 v. All parameters must be set manually if the drive is replaced as
shown in Table 25. The slave drive does not have an address.
High-Efficiency Variable Condenser Fans (HEVCF)
(30RB080-390 with Greenspeed Intelligence) Fan motor troubleshooting should be done at the drive. Disconnect
power from unit. Remove the entire front cover. Remove smaller
This option controls the speed of all fans for improvement in part panel covering terminal block at lower right corner of drive. See
load efficiency and sound levels. All fans on a circuit are con- Fig. 13. Each fan wire is connected to a separate terminal. Termi-
trolled by a VFD and run at the same speed. nals are labeled and color coded to match the fan wires. All termi-
FAN DRIVE OPERATION nals are connected in parallel. All terminals of a certain color, or
label, are the same point electrically. Disconnect each fan cable
The HEVCF option uses Danfoss VLT 102 variable frequency and check resistance of motor. An open or short reading between
drives. Drives are connected to the LEN communication bus. Fan phases or a phase and ground could signify a failed fan motor. Ver-
speed is determined by the chiller controller and communicated to ify reading at motor before replacing. Reconnect wires using color
the drive. Table 21 lists required configurations for the Danfoss coding. Replace terminal block cover, drive cover, and power unit
VLT HEVCF option. to test fan operation.
Table 21 — Danfoss VLT Required Configurations, Drive alarms are shown on the chiller controls as:
HEVCF Option V0-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit A
POINT V1-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit B
DESCRIPTION VALUE
NAME V2-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit C
VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A No. of fans in ckt
The characters “xx” correspond to a specific alarm. Common
VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B No. of fans in ckt alarms are listed in Table 26 with possible causes. For a complete
0 (Unit sizes 060-190 and modular list of alarms and causes, see the drive manual supplied with the
VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C units chiller.
No. of fans in ckt (Unit sizes 210-
300 only) Drives and motors are protected by fuses for short circuit protec-
VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 2 tion. See the Service Test section for details. Fan motor overload
RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM 1140 protection is provided by an overload device internal to the motor.
FC Factory Country Code 1 The motor overload responds to a combination of temperature and
Nameplate voltage current. On overload condition, the device breaks all 3 phases to
VFDV VFD Voltage for USA the motor. It will reset automatically once the motor temperature
(208,380,460,575)*
*208/230 v units should be configured for 208 v.
cools.
NOTE: See Appendix G for Siemens and Schneider low ambient
control information.
26
Table 22 — HEVCF Parameters Reset at Chiller Power Cycle
PARAMETER
No. Fans 1-20 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25
Per Circuit
Motor Power (kW) Motor Volts Motor Frequency (Hz) Motor Amps (A) Motor Speed (RPM)
208 11.9
380 6.5
1 2.6 60 1140
460 5.4
575 4.3
208 23.8
380 13.0
2 5.2 60 1140
460 10.8
575 8.6
208 35.7
380 19.5
3 7.8 60 1140
460 16.2
575 12.9
208 47.6
380 26.0
4 10.4 60 1140
460 21.6
575 17.2
208 71.4
380 39.0
6 15.6 60 1140
460 32.4
575 25.8
Table 23 — HEVCF Parameters Common to All Table 24 — 208-230 v Units with 6-Fan Circuits
Setups
UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION SETTING 160-170 A
0-02 Motor Speed Unit 1 = Hz 190 A, B, C
1-03 Torque Characteristic 1 = Variable Torque 250 C
1-73 Flying Restart 1 = Yes 275 A, B
1-80 Function Stop 0 = Coast 300 A, B, C
1-90 Motor Temp Protection 0 = No
1-91 Motor External Fan 0 = No
1-93 Thermistor SRC 0 = No
3-03 Max Ref 60 Table 25 — HEVCF Parameters for 208-230 v Units
3-15 SRC Ref #1 1 = AI #53 with 6 Fans per Circuit
3-16 SRC Ref #2 0 = No DRIVE
3-41 Ramp Up 5 = 5 Seconds FVDx-1* FVDx-2*
PARAMETER
3-42 Ramp Down 5 = 5 Seconds 8-31 Address† —
4-10 Motor Speed Direction 0 = Clockwise 3-02 — 0 = Min Ref.
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit 5 3-03 — 60 = Max Ref.
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit 61 3-15 — 1 = AI 53
4-16 Torque Limit Mode 225 3-41 — 5 = Ramp up
4-18 Current Limit 110 3-42 — 5 = Ramp Down
4-19 Max Output Freq 61 4-12 — 5 = Motor Min
5-12 DI #27 0 = No Operation 4-14 — 61 = Motor Max
14-01 Switching Frequency 4 4-19 — 61 = Max Freq.
14-03 Overmodulation 1 = Yes 5-02 1 0 = Input
14-40 VT Level Zero Mag Level 66 5-12 — 0 = No Oper.
14-60 Function at Overtemp 1 = Derate 5-31 5 —
8-04 Time-Out 2 = Stop 6-12 — 4 = Low Current
6-13 — 20 = High Current
6-14 — 0 = Low Ref.
6-14 — 60 = High Ref.
6-50 131 = 4-20 —
6-51 0 = Min Scale —
6-52 100 = Max Scale —
8-30 20 0
*x = Circuit A, B, or C.
†See Drive Address table on page 26.
27
Fig. 13 — Fan Terminal Cover and Terminal Block
Table 26 — HEVCF Common Alarms

ALARM* DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE, ACTION
Phase is missing or imbalance is too high on supply side. Check incoming wiring, drive fuses,
Vx-04 Mains phase loss and incoming power to unit. This is also used for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency
converter.
Frequency converter has cut out due to excessive current and temperature over a certain time
Vx-09 Inverter Overload period. Check motors for locked rotor or shorts.
Vx-12 Torque Limit Motor torque limit has been exceeded. Check motor for locked rotor or fan restrictions.
Vx-13 Over Current Inverter peak current limit is exceeded. Check motor for locked rotor or fan restrictions.
Current exists between output phases and ground. Check motors for short to ground. Check
Vx-14 Earth (ground) Fault wiring connections at fan motor terminal block at drive.
Vx-16 Short Circuit There is a short circuit in the motor wiring. Find the short circuit and repair.
Drive is not communicating with chiller. Check LEN bus wiring connections. Assure address is
Vx-17 Control Word Timeout set properly.
Heatsink has exceeded max temperature. Check drive fan operation and blockage of airflow
Vx-29 Heatsink Temp to heatsink fins.
Vx-30 Motor Phase U Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase.
Vx-31 Motor Phase V Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase.
Vx-32 Motor Phase W Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase.
Vx-34 Fieldbus Communication Fault Fieldbus on communication card in drive is not working.
*x = 0, 1, or 2.
28
Cooler Pump Control will be started on odd days. The default for this option is
PM.PS=NO.
COOLER PUMP CONTROL (CONFIGURATIONOPTN
The pump will continue to run for 60 seconds after an off com-
PUMP) mand is issued.
The 30RB units can be configured for cooler pump control. Cool-
er Pumps Sequence is the variable that must be confirmed in the Machine Control Methods
field. Proper configuration of the cooler pump control is required Three variables control how the machine operates. One vari-
to provide reliable chiller operation. The factory default setting for able controls the machine On-Off function. The second con-
Cooler Pumps Sequence is PUMP=0 (no pump output), for units trols the set point operation. The third variable controls the
without the factory-installed hydronic package. For units with the Heat-Cool operation which is always set to cool. Table 27 illus-
hydronic package, the factory default setting for Cooler Pumps trates how the control method and cooling set point select vari-
Sequence is PUMP=1 (1 pump only) for single pump units, or ables direct the operation of the chiller and the set point to
PUMP=2 (2 pumps auto) for dual pump units. For dual pump hy- which it controls. Table 27 also provides the On/Off state of the
dronic option units, three control options exist. If the Cooler machine for the given combinations.
Pumps Sequence (PUMP) is set to 2, the control will start the Machine On/Off control is determined by the configuration of the
pumps and automatically alternate the operation of the pumps to Operating Type Control (Operating ModesSLCT OPER).
even the wear of the pumps. If a flow failure is detected, the other Options to control the machine locally via a switch, on a local
pump will attempt to start. Two manual control options also exist. Time Schedule, or via a Carrier Comfort Network® command are
When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is set to PUMP=3 Cooler offered.
Pump 1 will always operate. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is
set to PUMP=4 Cooler Pump 2 will always operate. SWITCH CONTROL
It is recommended for all chillers that the cooler pump control be In this Operating Type Control, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact
utilized unless the chilled water pump runs continuously or the switch controls the machine locally. All models are factory config-
chilled water system contains a suitable concentration of anti- ured with OPER=0 (Switch Control). With the OPER set to 0,
freeze solution. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is configured, simply switching the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the
the cooler pump output will be energized when the chiller enters Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed) will
an “ON” mode. The cooler pump output is also energized when put the chiller in an occupied state. The unit Occupied Status (Run
certain alarms are generated. The cooler pump output should be StatusVIEWOCC) will change from NO to YES. The Status
used as an override to the external pump control if cooler pump Unit Control Type (Run StatusVIEWCTRL) will change
control is not utilized. The cooler pump output is energized if a from 0 (Local Off) when the switch is Off to 1 (Local On) when in
P.01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection alarm is generated, which the Enable position or Remote Contact position with external con-
provides additional freeze protection if the system is not protected tacts closed.
with a suitable antifreeze solution.
TIME SCHEDULE
For all Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) settings (including 0),
closure of both the chilled water flow switch (CWFS) and the In this Operating Type Control, the machine operates under a local
chilled water pump interlock contact (connected across TB-5 ter- schedule programmed by the user as long as the Enable/Off/Re-
minals 1 and 2) are required. In addition, for Cooler Pumps Se- mote Contact switch is in the Enable or Remote Contact position
quence settings of PUMP = 1, 2, 3, 4, normally open auxiliary (external contacts closed). To operate under this Operating Type
contacts for Pump 1 and Pump 2 (wired in parallel) must be con- Control, Operating ModesSLCT must be set to OPER=1. Two
nected to the violet and pink wires located in the harness from the Internal Time Schedules are available. Time Schedule 1 (Time
MBB-J5C-CH18 connector. The wires in the harness are marked ClockSCH1) is used for single set point On-Off control. Time
“PMP1-13” and “PMP1-14.” See the field wiring diagram in the Schedule 2 (Time ClockSCH2) is used for dual set point On-
30RB Installation Instructions. Off and Occupied-Unoccupied set point control. The control will
Regardless of the cooler pump control option selected, if the use the operating schedules as defined under the Time Clock
chilled water flow switch/interlock does not close within the mode in the scrolling marquee display.
MINUTES OFF TIME (ConfigurationOPTNDELY) peri- CCN Global Time Schedule
od after the unit is enabled and in an ON mode, alarm P.14 will be A CCN Global Schedule can be utilized. The schedule number
generated. can be set anywhere from 65 to 99 for operation under a CCN
Other conditions which will trigger this alarm include: global schedule. The 30RB chillers can be configured to follow a
• Cooler pump interlock is open for at least 30 seconds CCN Global Time Schedule broadcast by another system element.
during chiller operation. The ComfortVIEW™ Network Manager’s Configure and Modify
commands or the Service Tool’s Modify/Names function must be
• Lag chiller in Master/Slave Control pump interlock does used to change the number of the Occupancy Equipment Part Ta-
not close after 1 minute of the pump start command. ble Name (OCC1P01E) to the Global Schedule Number. The
• Cooler pump control is enabled and the chilled water flow Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCC1P65E).
switch/interlock is closed for more than 2 minutes follow- The Occupancy Supervisory Part table name (OCC1P01S) num-
ing a command to shut down the pump. ber must be changed to configure the unit to broadcast a Global
The last alarm criterion can be disabled. If Flow Checked if Pmp Time Schedule. The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99
Off (ConfigurationOPTNP.LOC) is set to NO, the control (OCC1P65S). When OCC1PxxS is set to a value greater than 64,
will ignore the pump interlock input if the cooler pump output is an occupancy flag is broadcast over the CCN every time it transi-
OFF. tions from occupied to unoccupied or vice-versa. By configuring
The ComfortLink controls have the ability to periodically start the their appropriate Time Schedule decisions to the same number,
pumps to maintain the bearing lubrication and seal integrity. If Pe- other devices on the network can follow this same schedule. The
riodic Pump Start (ConfigurationOPTNPM.PS) is set to Enable/Off/Remote Contact must be in the Enable position or Re-
YES, and if the unit is off at 2:00 PM, a pump will be started once mote Contact position with the contacts closed for the unit to oper-
each day for 2 seconds. If the unit has 2 pumps, Pump 1 will be ate. The Status Unit Control Type (Run StatusVIEWSTAT)
started on even days (such as day 2, 4, or 6 of the month); Pump 2 will be 0 (Local Off) when the switch is Off. The Status Unit Con-
trol Type will be 2 (CCN) when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact
switch input is On.
29
Table 27 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points
PARAMETER
ACTIVE
Heat Cool Ice Mode SET
Control Method Setpoint Select Ice Done Dual Setpoint Setpoint Occupied
Select Enable POINT
(OPER) (SP.SE) (ICE.D) Switch (DUAL) (SP.OC)
(HC.SE) (ICE.M)
1 — — — — CSP.1
(Setpoint1) Enable Open Closed — CSP.3
2 — — — — CSP.2
(Setpoint2) Enable Open Closed — CSP.3
3 — — — — 4-20 mA
(4-20mA Setp)
0 0 Open — CSP.1
(Switch Ctrl) (Cool) Open
— Enable Closed — CSP.3
Closed Closed — CSP.2
Open — CSP.1
— —
4 Closed — CSP.2
(Dual Setp Sw) Open Closed — CSP.3
Enabled
Closed Closed — CSP.2
Occupied CSP.1
— — —
1 0 0 Unoccupied CSP.2
(Time Sched) (Cool) (Setpoint Occ) Open — CSP.3
Enable Unoccupied
Closed — CSP.2
— Occupied CSP.1
2 0 — —
— — Unoccupied CSP.2
(CCN) (Cool)
Enable Open — Unoccupied CSP.3
— = No Effect
CCN CONTROL In all cases, there are limits on what values are allowed for each
An external CCN device such as Chillervisor controls the On/Off set point. These values depend on the Cooler Fluid Type (Config-
state of the machine. This CCN device forces the variable urationSERVFLUD) and the Brine Freeze Set point (Con-
CHIL_S_S between Start/Stop to control the chiller. The Status figurationSERVLOSP). See Table 28.
Unit Control Type (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) will be 0 (Local Table 28 — Configuration Set Point Limits
Off) when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is Off. The Sta-
tus Unit Control Type will be 2 (CCN) when the Enable/Off/Re- COOLER FLUID TYPE, FLUD
SET POINT LIMIT
mote Contact switch is in the enable or remote contact position 1 = Water 2 = Medium Brine
with external contacts closed and the CHIL_S_S variable is Stop Minimum* 38°F (3.3°C) 14°F (–10.0°C)
or Start. Maximum 60°F (15.5°C)
UNIT RUN STATUS (RUN STATUSVIEWSTAT) *The minimum set point for Medium Temperature Brine applications is
related to the Brine Freeze Point. The set point is limited to be no less
As the unit transitions from off to on and back to off, the Unit Run than the Brine Freeze Point +5°F (2.8°C).
Status will change based on the unit’s operational status. The vari-
ables are: 0 (Off), 1 (Running), 2 (Stopping), and 3 (Delay). SET POINT 1 (OPERATING MODESSLCTSP.SE=1)
• 0 indicates the unit is Off due to the Enable/Off/Remote When Set Point Select is configured to 1, the unit’s active set point
Contact Switch, a time schedule or CCN command. is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOLCSP.1).
• 1 indicates the unit is operational. SET POINT 2 (OPERATING MODESSLCTSP.SE=2)
• 2 indicates the unit is shutting down due to the command When Set Point Select is configured to 2, the unit’s active set point
to shut down from the Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, is based on Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointCOOLCSP.2).
a time schedule or CCN command.
• 3 indicates the unit has received a command to start from 4 TO 20 MA INPUT (OPERATING MODESSLCT SP.SE=3)
Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, a time schedule or When Set Point Select is configured to 3, the unit’s active set point
CCN command, and is waiting for the start-up timer (Con- is based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy
figurationOPTNDELY) to expire. Management Module (EMM).
Cooling Set Point Selection See Table 27 for Control Methods and Cooling Set Points. The
following equation is used to control the set point. See Fig. 14.
SET POINT SELECTION (OPERATING MODES SLCT Set Point = 10 + 70(mA – 4)/16 (deg F)
SP.SE)
Set Point = –12.2 + 38.9(mA – 4)/16 (deg C)
Several options for controlling the Leaving Chilled Water Set
Point are offered and are configured by the Cooling Set Point Se- DUAL SWITCH (OPERATING MODESSLCTSP.SE=4)
lect variables. In addition to the Cooling Set Point Select, Ice When Set Point Select is configured to 4, the unit’s active set point
Mode Enable (ConfigurationOPTNICE.M), and Heat Cool is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOL  CSP.1)
Select (Operating Modes SLCTHC.SE) variables also have when the Dual Set Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set
a role in determining the set point of the machine. All units are Point 2 (Set PointCOOLCSP.2) when they are closed.
shipped from the factory with the Heat Cool Select variable set to
HC.SE=0 (Cooling). All set points are based on Leaving Water
Control, (ConfigurationSERVEWTO=NO).
30
Ice Mode 5.0°F (2.8°C) when the T is 2°F (1.1°C) and 0°F (0°C) reset
Operation of the machine to make and store ice can be accom- when the T is 10°F. The variable CRT1 should be set to the
plished many ways. The Energy Management Module and an Ice cooler temperature difference (T) where no chilled water tem-
Done Switch are required for operation in the Ice Mode. In this perature reset should occur. The variable CRT2 should be set to
configuration, the machine can operate with up to three cooling set the cooler temperature difference where the maximum chilled
points: Cooling Set Point 1 (Occupied) (Set PointCOOL water temperature reset should occur. The variable DGRC
CSP.1), Cooling Set Point 2 (Unoccupied) (Set PointCOOL should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired. To verify
CSP.2), and Ice Set Point (Set PointCOOLCSP.3). that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run Sta-
tusVIEW, and subtract the active set point (SETP) from the
SET POINT OCCUPANCY (OPERATING MODESSLCT control point (CTPT) to determine the degrees reset. See Fig. 15
SP.SE=0) and Table 29.
When Set point Select is configured to 0, the unit’s active set point Other, indirect means of estimating building load and controlling
is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOLCSP.1) temperatures reset are also available and are discussed below. See
during the occupied period while operating under Time Clock Fig. 16.
SCH1. If the Time Clock SCH2 is in use, the unit’s active set To use Outdoor Air Temperature Reset, four variables must be
point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Point COOL configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type (Configuration
CSP.1) during the occupied period and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set RSETCRST), OAT No Reset Temp (Setpoints COOL
Point COOLCSP.2) during the unoccupied period. CRO1), OAT Full Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRO2) and
Temperature Reset Degrees Cool Reset (SetpointsCOOLDGRC). In the follow-
ing example, the outdoor air temperature reset example provides
Temperature reset is a value added to the basic leaving fluid tem- 0°F (0°C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0°F (29.4°C) outdoor-
perature set point. The sum of these values is the control point. air temperature and 10.0°F (5.5°C) reset at 55.0°F (12.8°C) out-
When a non-zero temperature reset is applied, the chiller controls door-air temperature. See Fig. 17 and Table 30.
to the control point, not the set point. The control system is capa-
ble of handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on cooler To use Space Temperature Reset in addition to the energy man-
fluid temperature difference. Because the change in temperature agement module, four variables must be configured. They are:
through the cooler is a measure of the building load, the tempera- Cooling Reset Type (ConfigurationRSETCRST), Space T
No Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRS1), Space T Full Reset
ture difference reset is in effect an average building load reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRS2) and Degrees Cool Reset (Set-
method. The control system is also capable of temperature reset pointsCOOLDGRC). In the following space temperature re-
based on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature set example, 0°F (0°C) chilled water set point reset at 72.0°F
(SPT), or from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. An ac- (22.2°C) space temperature and 6.0°F (3.3°C) reset at 68.0°F
cessory sensor must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The (20.0°C) space temperature. See Fig. 18 and Table 31.
energy management module (EMM) is required for temperature
reset using space temperature or a 4 to 20 mA signal. To use 4-20 mA Temperature Reset in addition to the energy man-
agement module, four variables must be configured. They are:
Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant leav- Cooling Reset Type (ConfigurationRSET CRST), Current
ing fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled fluid set No Reset Val (SetpointsCOOLCRV1), Current Full Reset
point. As the cooler load varies, the cooler fluid temperature dif- Val (SetpointsCOOLCRV2) and Degrees Cool Reset (Set-
ference will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 15. pointsCOOLDGRC). In the following example, at 4 mA no
Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point are reset takes place. At 20 mA, 5°F (2.8°C) chilled water set point re-
selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the fluid tem- set is required. See Fig. 19 and Table 32.
perature set point may be lower than required. If the leaving fluid
temperature were allowed to increase at part load, the efficiency of
the machine would increase. CAUTION
Temperature difference reset allows for the leaving temperature Care should be taken when interfacing with other control sys-
set point to be reset upward as a function of the fluid temperature tems due to possible power supply differences such as a full
difference or, in effect, the building load. wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connection of
To use Water Temperature Difference Reset, four variables must control devices with different power supplies may result in
be configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type (Configura- permanent damage. ComfortLink controls incorporate power
tionRSETCRST), Delta T No Reset Temp (Set- supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device
pointsCOOLCRT1), Delta T Full Reset Temp (Setpoints should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full
COOLCRT2) and Degrees Cool Reset (SetpointsCOOL wave bridge rectifier.
DGRC). In the following example using Water Temperature Dif-
ference Reset, the chilled water temperature will be reset by
31
90 (32.2)
80 (26.7)
70 (21.1)
SET POINT IN DEG F (deg C)
MAXIMUM SET POINT

60 (15.6)
50 (10.0) Equation
Medium Temperature Brine
40 (4.4) Fresh W ater
MINIMUM SET POINT (FLUD=1) Maximum Temperature
30 (-1.1)
20 (-6.7)
MINIMUM SET POINT (FLUD=2)

10 (-12.2)
0
0 5 10 15 20
mA SIGNAL
Fig. 14 — 4 to 20 mA Set Point Control
5
DEGREES RESET (deg F)
(EXAMPLE)
2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
COOLER FLUID TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (deg F)
Fig. 15 — Water Temperature Difference Reset
32
56
54
52
FLUID TEMPERATURE (deg F)
EWT
50 DESIGN
RISE
(TYPICAL)
48
46
LWT
44
42
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
LOADING (%)
LEGEND
EWT — Entering Water Temperature
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature
Fig. 16 — Chilled Water Temperature Control
16
14
12
RESET AMOUNT (deg F)
(EXAMPLE)
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE (F)
Fig. 17 — Outdoor Air Temperature Reset
33
Table 29 — Water Temperature Difference Reset Configuration
CONFIGURATION ENTER DISP
UNIT
SERV
OPTN
ENTER 0 No Reset
ENTER 0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password
/ 2 Delta T Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 2.
ESCAPE CRST
ESCAPE At mode level

SETPOINTS / Change to Setpoints Mode
ENTER COOL Cooling Setpoints
ENTER CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1
x4 CRV.2
CRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp Cooler Temperature difference where no temperature
reset is required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRT1
ENTER 0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode
10.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 10 from the example.
ENTER 10.0 Accepts the change.
ESCAPE CRT1
CRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp Cooler Temperature difference where full temperature
reset, DGRC is required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRT2.
2.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 2 from the example.
ESCAPE CRT2
x4 CRS2
DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.
ENTER 0 Value of DGRC

5.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 5 from the example.
ESCAPE DGRC
34
Table 30 — OAT Reset Configuration
UNIT
SERV
OPTN
ENTER 0 No Reset
/ 1 Out Air Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 1.
ESCAPE CRST

x6 CRT.2
CRO1 OAT No Reset Temp Outdoor Temperature where no temperature reset is
required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRO1
ESCAPE CRO1
CRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp Outdoor Temperature where full temperature reset,
DGRC is required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRO2.
ESCAPE CRO2
CRS1
CRS2

10.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 10 from the
example.
ESCAPE DGRC
35
7
(EXAMPLE)
6
5
0
60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80
SPACE TEMPERATURE (F)
Fig. 18 — Space Temperature Reset
5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
mA SIGNAL
Fig. 19 — 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset
36
Table 31 — Space Temperature Reset Configuration
UNIT
SERV
OPTN
ENTER 0 No Reset
/ 4 Space Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 4.
ESCAPE CRST

x8 CRO2
CRS1 Space T No Reset Temp Space Temperature where no temperature reset is
required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRS1
ESCAPE CRS1
CRS2 Space T Full Reset Temp Space Temperature where full temperature reset, DGRC
is required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRS2.
ESCAPE CRS2

example.
ESCAPE DGRC
37
Table 32 — 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset Configuration
UNIT
SERV
OPTN
ENTER 0 No Reset
/ 3 4-20 mA Input Use up or down arrows to change value to 3.
ESCAPE CRST

x2 CSP.3 Cooling Setpoint 3

CRV1 Current No Reset Val Outdoor Temperature where no temperature reset is
required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRV1
ESCAPE CRV1
CRV2 Current Full Reset Val Current value where full temperature reset, DGRC is
required.
ENTER 0 Value of CRV2.
ESCAPE CRV2
x6 CRS2

example.
ESCAPE DGRC
38
Demand Limit SWITCH CONTROLLED
Demand limit is a feature that allows the unit capacity to be limit- Single-Step Switch Control Demand Limit is standard on all
ed during periods of peak energy usage. Once a Demand Limit 30RB units. To utilize Two or Three-Step Switch Control Demand
command has been initiated, the unit capacity will be limited to Limit, the Energy Management Module is required. The three
the commanded value and will not exceed that value. steps are achieved through two sets of dry contacts. The contacts
Three types of demand limiting are available on the 30RB units. for Demand Limit Switch 1 must be connected to TB5-5, 14. The
The first type is through switch control, which will reduce the contacts for Demand Limit Switch 2 must be connected to TB6-
maximum capacity by up to three user-configurable percentages. 14,15. See Fig. 20.
Single-Step Switch Control Demand Limit is standard on all Several parameters must be configured for switch controlled de-
30RB units. To utilize Two and Three-Step Switch Control De- mand limit:
mand Limit, the Energy Management Module is required. The • Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC)
second type of demand limiting is by 4 to 20 mA signal input,
which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly from 100% at a • Switch Limit Setpoint 1 (SetpointsMISCDLS1)
4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable • Switch Limit Setpoint 2 (SetpointsMISCDLS2), if
level at a 20 mA input signal. To utilize 4 to 20 mA Demand Lim- Two-Step Switch Control is desired
it, the Energy Management Module is required. The third type of • Switch Limit Setpoint 3 (SetpointsMISCDLS3), if
demand limiting requires a programmable controller (Open or Three-Step Switch Control is desired
CCN) or UPC, and writes a demand limit directly to the control. The position of the Demand Limit Switch contacts shown in
Using the scrolling marquee, the Active Demand Limit Val (Run Fig. 20 will allow for up to three steps of demand limit according
Status VIEWLIM) will display the current demand limit to Table 33.
value. A value of 100 will allow the machine to run fully loaded
if required. Any value less than 200 will limit the capacity of the The actual positions of Demand Limit Switches 1 and 2 seen by
machine. the control can be viewed using the scrolling marquee or Naviga-
tor™ display by accessing the items Inputs GEN.1DLS1 or
To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to use. InputsGEN.1DLS2.
Then configure the demand limit set points based on the type
selected. Follow the example in Table 34 to enable the function and config-
ure the step demand limit for 80%, 60%, and 25% capacity limit
based on the switch position described above.
MAIN
BASE
BOARD
EMM
BOARD
J4
J4
a30-5710
Fig. 20 — Switch Controlled Demand Limit Wiring
Table 33 — Demand Limit Switch Status Response

SWITCH STATUS
DEMAND LIMIT VALUE
Demand Limit Demand Limit SCROLLING MARQUEE/NAVIGATOR DISPLAY ITEM
Switch 1 Switch 2
Open Open None
Closed Open SetpointsMISCDLS1
Open Closed SetpointsMISCDLS2
Closed Closed SetpointsMISCDLS3
Table 34 — Switch Controlled Demand Limit (Scrolling Marquee and Navigator™ Display)
SCROLLING MARQUEE NAVIGATOR
ITEM EXPANSION PATH
Value Expansion DISPLAY
DMDC Demand Limit Select ConfigurationRSET 1 Switch Switch
DLS1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 SetpointsMISC 80 — 80
39
In the example in Table 34, when Demand Limit Switch 1 is The input signal seen by the control can be viewed using the
closed and Demand Limit Switch 2 is open, the maximum chiller scrolling marquee or Navigator display by accessing the item In-
capacity will be reduced to 80%. When Demand Limit Switch 1 is putsGEN.1DMND.
open and Demand Limit Switch 2 is closed, the maximum chiller To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control, three parame-
capacity will be reduced to 60%. Similarly, when both Demand ters must be configured:
Limit Switches are closed, the maximum chiller capacity will be
reduced to 25%. • Demand Limit Select
(ConfigurationRSETDMDC)
EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 TO 20 MA CONTROLLED) • mA for 100% Demand Limit
The Energy Management Module is required for 4 to 20 mA de- (ConfigurationRSETDMMX)
mand limit control. The 4 to 20 mA positive signal is connected to • mA for 0% Demand Limit
TB6-1 and the negative to TB6-2. Additionally, a field-supplied (ConfigurationRSETDMZE).
250-ohm, 1/2-watt resistor must be installed across TB6-1 and
TB6-2. See Fig. 21. The Energy Management Module accepts a 0
to 5 vdc input. The resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA signal to a 0 to CAUTION
5 vdc input.
Care should be taken when interfacing with other control sys-
tems due to possible power supply differences such as a full
EMM
BOARD
wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connection of
control devices with different power supplies may result in
J7B permanent damage. ComfortLink controls incorporate power
supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device
should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full
wave bridge rectifier.
Fig. 21 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Wiring In the following example, a 4 mA signal is Demand Limit 100%
and a 20 mA Demand Limit signal is 0%. The demand limit is a
linear interpolation between the two values entered. See Table 35
and Fig. 22. In Fig. 22, if the machine receives a 12 mA signal, the
machine controls will limit the capacity to 50%.
Table 35 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit (Scrolling Marquee and Navigator Display)

SCROLLING MARQUEE NAVIGATOR
ITEM EXPANSION PATH
Value Expansion DISPLAY
DMDC Demand Limit Switch ConfigurationRSET 2 4-20 mA Input 4-20 mA Input
DMMX mA for 100% Demand Lim ConfigurationRSET 4 — 4
DMZE mA for 0% Demand Lim ConfigurationRSET 20 — 20
100
90
80
DEMAND LIMIT (%)
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL (mA)
Fig. 22 — Demand Limit Response to mA Signal
40
CCN CONTROLLED Alarm Control
To configure demand limit for CCN control, the unit Operating ALARM ROUTING CONTROL
Type Control must be in CCN control (Operating Modes
SLCTOPER=2), and must be controlled by a programmable Alarms recorded on the chiller can be routed through the CCN. To
controller (Open or CCN) or UPC. By writing to the CCN point configure this option, the ComfortLink control must be configured
DEM_LIM (Status Display Table GENUNIT), the unit capacity to determine which CCN elements will receive and process
can be controlled. alarms. Input for the decision consists of eight digits, each of
which can be set to either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that
Remote Alarm and Alert Relays alarms will be sent to the system element that corresponds to that
The 30RB chiller can be equipped with a remote alert and remote digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory
alarm annunciator contacts. Both relays connected to these con- default is 00000000. See Fig. 23. The default setting is based on
tacts must be rated for a maximum power draw of 10 va sealed, 25 the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a network. If
va inrush at 24 volts. The alarm relay, indicating that the complete the network does not contain a ComfortVIEW, Comfort-
unit has been shut down, can be connected to TB5-12 and TB5- WORKS®, TeLink, DataLINK™, or BAClink module, enabling
13. For an alert relay, indicating that at least 1 circuit was off due this feature will only add unnecessary activity to the CCN com-
to the alert, a field-supplied and installed relay must be connected munication bus.
between MBB-J3-CH25-3 and TB5-13. This option can be modified with Network Service Tool. It cannot
be modified with the scrolling marquee display.
Broadcast Configuration
Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is 11010000.
The 30RB chiller is capable of broadcasting time, date, and holi- This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to ComfortVIEW
day status to all elements in the CCN system. In the stand-alone software, TeLink, BAClink, and DataLINK.
mode, broadcast must be activated to utilize holiday schedules and
adjust for daylight saving time. If the chiller is to be connected to a ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY
CCN system, determine which system element is to be the net- The ComfortVIEW software uses the equipment priority value
work broadcaster to all other system elements. Broadcast is acti- when sorting alarms by level. The purpose of the equipment prior-
vated and deactivated in the BRODEFS Table. It is accessible ity value is to determine the order in which to sort alarms that have
through Network Service Tool. It is not accessible through the the same level. A priority of 0 is the highest and would appear first
scrolling marquee display. when sorted. A priority of 7 would appear last when sorted. For
Only one element should be configured as a broadcaster. If a example, if two chillers send out identical alarms, the chiller with
broadcast is activated by a device that has been designated as a the higher priority would be listed first. The default is 4. This vari-
network broadcaster, then broadcast time, date, and holiday status able can only be changed when using ComfortVIEW software or
will be updated over the CCN system. If broadcast is enabled, a Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the
broadcast acknowledger must also be enabled. The acknowledger scrolling marquee display.
cannot be the same machine as the broadcasting machine.
COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME
ACTIVATE This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed
The Activate variable enables the broadcast function of the Com- to elapse between alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is
fortLink controls. If this variable is set to 0, this function is not not acknowledged by a network alarm acknowledger, which
used and holiday schedules and daylight savings compensation are may be either a ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If acknowl-
not possible. Setting this variable to 1 allows the machine to edgment is not received, the alarm will be re-transmitted after
broadcast and receive broadcasts on the network. The following the number of minutes specified in this decision. This variable
information is broadcast: the time with compensation for daylight can only be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network
savings, date, and holiday flag. Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scroll-
Set this variable to 2 for stand-alone units that are not connected to ing marquee display.
a CCN. With this configuration, daylight saving time and holiday RE-ALARM TIME
determination will be done without broadcasting through the bus.
This variable can only be changed when using ComfortVIEW™ This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to
software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be elapse between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the conditions
changed with the scrolling marquee display. that caused the initial alarm continue to persist for the number of
minutes specified in this decision. Re-alarming will continue to
BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER occur at the specified interval until the condition causing the
This configuration defines if the chiller will be used to acknowl- alarm is corrected. This variable can only be changed with Com-
edge broadcast messages on the CCN bus. One broadcast ac- fortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot
knowledger is required per bus, including secondary buses created be changed with the scrolling marquee display.
by the use of a bridge. This variable can only be changed with ALARM SYSTEM NAME
ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable
cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display. This variable specifies the system element name that will ap-
pear in the alarms generated by the unit control. The name can
be up to 8 alphanumeric characters in length. This variable can
only be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Ser-
vice Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling
marquee display.
41
DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT
Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT
ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS™
TeLink
Unused
BACLink or DataLINK™
Unused
Fig. 23 — Alarm Routing Control
PRE-START-UP removed unless the crankcase heater has been energized for at
least 24 hours. See Oil Charge section for Carrier-approved
Important: Complete the Start-Up Checklist for 30RB Liq- oils.
uid Chillers at the end of this publication. 7. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.
The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides 8. Crankcase heaters must be firmly seated under compressor,
a record of unit condition, application requirements, system and must be energized for 24 hours prior to start-up.
information, and operation at initial start-up. 9. Verify power supply phase sequence. Check reverse rotation
board. If lower (red) LED is blinking, the phase sequence is
incorrect. Reverse two of the power wires at the main termi-
Do not attempt to start the chiller until the following checks have
been completed. nal block. Units with dual power point connection utilize two
reverse rotation boards. Check both for proper phase
System Check sequence.
1. Check auxiliary components, such as the chilled fluid circu- 10. Check compressors and compressor mounting sled. Com-
lating pump, air-handling equipment, or other equipment to pressor shipping braces and shipping bolts must be removed.
which the chiller supplies liquid are operational. Consult
manufacturer’s instructions. If the unit has field-installed START-UP
accessories, be sure all are properly installed and wired cor-
rectly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams. CAUTION
2. Open compressor suction (if equipped) and discharge shutoff
valves. Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the
3. Open liquid line shutoff valves. machine may result.
4. Fill the chiller fluid circuit with clean water (with recom-
mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to be
Actual Start-Up
cooled. Bleed all air out of high points of system. An air vent Actual start-up should be done only under supervision of a quali-
pipe plug is included with the cooler. If outdoor temperatures fied refrigeration technician.
are expected to be below 32°F (0°C), sufficient inhibited pro- 1. Be sure all shut off valves are open. Units are shipped from
pylene glycol or other suitable corrosion inhibited antifreeze factory with suction valves (if equipped) open. Discharge and
should be added to the chiller water circuit to prevent possible liquid line shut off valves are closed.
freeze-up. 2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set
The chilled water loop must be cleaned before the unit is point (SetpointsCOOLCSP.1). No cooling range adjust-
connected. Units supplied with the accessory hydronic ment is necessary.
package include a run in screen. If the run-in screen is left 3. If optional control functions or accessories are being used, the
in the suction guide/strainer, it is recommended that the unit must be properly configured. Refer to Configuration
Service Maintenance be set to alert the operator within 24 Options section for details.
hours of start-up to be sure that the run-in screen in the 4. Start chilled fluid pump, if unit is not configured for pump
suction guide/strainer is removed. To set the time for the control, (ConfigurationOPTNPUMP= 0).
parameter, go to Time ClockMCFG W.FIL. Values 5. Complete the Start-Up Checklist to verify all components are
for this item are counted as days. Refer to the hydronic operating properly.
pump package literature if unit is equipped with the 6. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to
optional hydronic pump package. ENABLE position.
5. Check tightness of all electrical connections. 7. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is function-
6. Oil should be visible in the compressor sight glass. An ing properly. Check to see that leaving fluid temperature
acceptable oil level in the compressor is from 3/4 to 7/8 full agrees with leaving set point Control Point (Run Status
sight glass. Adjust the oil level as required. No oil should be VIEWCTPT).
42
Operating Limitations
% Voltage max voltage deviation from average voltage
TEMPERATURES Imbalance = 100 x
average voltage
Unit operating temperature limits are listed in Table 36. Example: Supply voltage is 230-3-60
Table 36 — Temperature Limits for Standard Units A B C AB = 243 v
TEMPERATURE F C BC = 236 v
Maximum Ambient Temperature 125 52 MOTOR
AC = 238 v
Minimum Ambient Temperature 32 0
Maximum Cooler EWT* 95 35 (243 + 236 + 238) 717
Average Voltage = = = 239
Maximum Cooler LWT 60 15 3 3
Minimum Cooler LWT† 40 4.4 Determine maximum deviation from average voltage.
(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v
LEGEND (BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v
EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature (AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v
LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature Maximum deviation is 4 v.
Determine percent of voltage imbalance.
*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85°F (29.4°C).
†Unit requires brine modification for operation below this temperature. 4
Low Ambient Operation % Voltage Imbalance = 100x
239
= 1.7%
If unit operating temperatures below 32°F (0°C) are expected, re- This amount of phase imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maxi-
fer to separate unit installation instructions for low ambient tem- mum allowable 2%.
perature operation using accessory low ambient temperature head
pressure control, if not equipped. Contact a Carrier representative IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than 2%,
for details. contact your local electric utility company immediately. Do not operate
until imbalance condition is corrected.
NOTE: Wind baffles and brackets must be field-fabricated and in-
stalled for all units using accessory low ambient head pressure
control to ensure proper cooling cycle operation at low-ambient
temperatures. See the 30RB Installation Instructions or the low MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME
ambient temperature head pressure control accessory installation To obtain proper temperature control, loop fluid volume must be
instructions for more information. at least 3 gallons per ton (3.25 L per kW) of chiller nominal capac-
ity for air conditioning and at least 6 gallons per ton (6.5 L per
CAUTION kW) for process applications or systems that must operate at low
ambient temperatures (below 32°F [0°C]). Refer to application in-
Brine duty application (below 40°F [4.4°C] leaving chilled formation in Product Data literature for details.
water temperature) for chiller normally requires factory FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS
modification. Contact your Carrier representative for
details regarding specific applications. Operation below Standard chillers should be applied with nominal flow rates within
40°F (4.4°C) leaving chilled water temperature without those listed in the Minimum and Maximum Cooler Flow Rates ta-
modification can result in compressor failure. ble. Higher or lower flow rates are permissible to obtain lower or
higher temperature rises. Minimum flow rates must be exceeded
VOLTAGE to assure turbulent flow and proper heat transfer in the cooler. See
Table 37.
Main Power Supply
Minimum and maximum acceptable supply voltages are listed in
the Installation Instructions. CAUTION
Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage Operation below minimum flow rate could subject tubes to frost
Never operate a motor where a phase imbalance between phases is pinching in the tube sheet, resulting in failure of the cooler.
greater than 2%.
Consult application data section in the Product Data literature and
The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference between a job design requirements to determine flow rate requirements for a
voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average across all 3 legs. particular installation.
Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.
43
Table 37 — Minimum and Maximum Cooler Flow Rates
SIZES 060-300
MINIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM

MAXIMUM MINIMUM COOLER
30RB COOLER LOOP COOLER LOOP
FLOW RATE FLOW RATE
SIZE FLOW RATE VOLUME FLOW RATE VOLUME
(gpm) (l/s)
(gpm) (gal.) (l/s) (liters)
060 72 288 180 5 18 681
070 84 336 210 5 21 795
080 96 384 240 6 24 908
090 108 432 270 7 27 1022
100 120 480 300 8 30 1136
110 132 528 330 8 33 1249
120 144 576 360 9 36 1363
130 156 624 390 10 39 1476
150 180 720 450 11 45 1703
160 192 768 480 12 48 1817
170 204 816 510 13 51 1931
190 228 912 570 14 58 2158
210 252 950 630 16 60 2385
225 270 950 675 17 60 2555
250 300 950 750 19 60 2839
275 330 950 825 21 60 3123
300 360 950 900 23 60 3407
SIZES 315-390
MINIMUM COOLER MAXIMUM COOLER MIN MINIMUM COOLER MAXIMUM COOLER MIN
30RB FLOW RATE FLOW RATE LOOP FLOW RATE FLOW RATE LOOP
SIZE (gpm) (gpm) VOLUME (l/s) (l/s) VOLUME
Module A Module B Module A Module B (gal.) Module A Module B Module A Module B (liters)
315 192 192 768 768 945 12 12 48 48 3577
330 204 192 816 768 990 12 12 51 48 3748
345 204 204 816 816 1035 13 13 51 51 3918
360 228 204 912 816 1080 14 13 58 51 4088
390 228 228 912 912 1170 14 14 58 58 4429
OPERATION be maintained off if Configuration RSETLAGP=0. The

internal algorithm of lead chiller will control capacity of the
Sequence of Operation lead chiller.
With a command to start the chiller, the cooler pump will start. Af- If Lead Pulldown Time (Configuration RSETLPUL) has
ter verifying water flow, the control will monitor the entering and been configured, the lead chiller will continue to operate alone
leaving water temperature. At any time that a compressor is not for that specified time. After the Lead Pulldown Time timer
operating, its crankcase heater is active. If the need for mechanical has elapsed, if the lead chiller is fully loaded and either all
cooling is determined, the control decides which circuit and com- available compression is on or at the master demand limit val-
pressor to start. The compressor will deenergize the crankcase ue, then the lag start timer (ConfigurationRSETLLDY) is
heater as it starts. Compressors will be staged with minimum load initiated. When the pulldown timer and lag start timer have
control (if equipped and configured) to maintain LWT set point. elapsed and the Combined Leaving Chilled Water Temperature is
Shutdown of each circuit under normal conditions occurs in incre- more than 3°F (1.7°C) above the set point, then the lag chiller is
ments, starting with the minimum load control (if equipped) and started.
finishing with the last running compressor. Once minimum load If the lag chiller’s water pump was not started when the ma-
control is disabled, one compressor is shut down. Eight seconds chines went into occupied mode, then the lag chiller water pump
later the next compressor will shut down. The process will contin- will be started. The lag chiller will start when the master chiller
ue until all of the compressors are shut down. The EXV will close forcing the lag chiller demand limit value (LAG_LIM) to the
completely, 1 minute after the last compressor has shut down. master’s demand limit value. If lead/lag capacity balance is se-
There are several abnormal conditions that, if detected, will shut lected, once the lag chiller has started, the master chiller will try
down the circuit immediately. In this case, minimum load control to keep the difference in capacity between lead and lag to less
and all compressors are turned off without an 8-second interval be- than 20%. The master chiller will then be responsible for water
tween them. The cooler pump will remain ON for 20 seconds after loop capacity calculation, and will determine which chiller, the
the last compressor has been turned OFF. lead or lag, will increase or decrease capacity. When the load re-
Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation duces, the lag chiller will unload first. To accomplish this, the
lead chiller set point is decreased by 4°F (–2.2°C) until the lag
With a command to start the chiller, the master chiller deter- chiller unloads.
mines which chiller will become the lead chiller based on Con-
figurationRSETLLBL and ConfigurationRSET To configure the two chillers for dual chiller operation, the master
LLBD. The lead chiller is always started first and the lag chiller must have the Control Method variable (Operating
chiller is held at zero percent capacity by the master chiller Mode SLCTOPER) set to meet the job requirements. The
slave chiller must be set to Control Method variable (Operating
forcing the lag demand limit value to 0%. The lead chiller’s Mode SLCTOPER) = 2 (CCN Control) and the remote-off-
water pump will be started. The lag chiller’s water pump shall enable switch must be in the enable position. The master chiller
44
and the slave chiller CCN addresses (Configuration MODE 4 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD04):
OPTNCCNA) must be configured. The master and slave DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE
chillers can be addressed from 1 to 239. Each device connected to Criteria for Mode
the network must have its own unique address.
Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Demand
Both chillers must have the same CCN Bus Number (Configura- Limit (ConfigurationRSET DMDC) is enabled either by
tionOPTNCCNB). Lead/Lag Chiller Enable must be set for DMDC=1 (Switch), DMDC=2 (4-20 mA Input) or the Night
both chillers by configuring Master/Slave Select (Configura- Time Low Sound Capacity Limit (ConfigurationOPTN
tionRSET MSSL) to 1 (Master) for the master chiller. The LS.LT).
slave chiller Master/Slave Select must be set to 2 (Slave). The
master chiller can be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance (Con- Action Taken
figurationRSETLLBL) to rotate the lead and lag chillers af- The Active Demand Limit Value (Run StatusVIEWLIM)
ter a configured number of hours of operation. The Lag Start De- will display the current demand limit according to the pro-
lay (Configuration RSETLLBD) can be configured. This grammed information and the unit’s capacity will be reduced to
prevents the Lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller is fully the amount shown or lower.
loaded and the delay has elapsed. Termination
Operating Modes This mode will terminate when the Demand Limit command has
been removed.
MODE 1 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD01):
STARTUP DELAY IN EFFECT Possible Causes
Criteria for Mode This mode is in effect when capacity is being limited by the de-
mand limit function.
Tested when the unit is started. This mode is active when the Min-
utes Off Time (ConfigurationOPTNDELY) timer is active. MODE 5 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD05): RAMP
Action Taken LOADING ACTIVE
The unit will not start until the timer has expired. Criteria for Mode
Termination Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Ramp
Loading (ConfigurationOPTNRL.S) is enabled and the fol-
The mode will terminate when the timer expires. lowing conditions are met:
Possible Causes 1. The leaving water temperature is more than 4°F (2.2°C) from
This mode is in effect only due to the Minutes Off Time timer. the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT), and
MODE 2 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD02): 2. The rate of change of the leaving water temperature is greater
SECOND SETPOINT IN USE than the Cool Ramp Loading (Set PointsCOOLCRMP).
Criteria for Mode Action Taken
Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Cooling The control will limit the capacity step increase until one of the
Setpoint 2 (SetpointsCOOL CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (Set- two conditions in Mode 5 is no longer true.
pointsCOOLCSP.3) is in use. While in this mode, the Active Termination
Setpoint (Run StatusVIEWSETP) will show the CSP.2 or This mode will terminate once both conditions in Mode 5 are no
CSP.3 value. longer true.
Action Taken Possible Causes
The unit will operate to the Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) or Ice Set- This mode is in effect only when capacity is being limited by the
point (CSP.3). ramp loading function.
Termination
MODE 6 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD06):
This mode will terminate when the Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) or COOLER HEATER ACTIVE
Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) is no longer in use.
Criteria for Mode
Possible Causes
Tested when unit is ON or OFF. This mode is active when the
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. cooler heater is energized, if the Outdoor Air Temperature (Tem-
MODE 3 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD03): RESET peratureUNITOAT) is less than the calculated value (Freeze
IN EFFECT Setpoint + Cooler Heater Delta T Setpoint [Configura-
tionSERVHTR] default – 2°F [1.1°C]), and either the Leav-
Criteria for Mode ing Water Temperature (TemperatureUNITLWT) or the En-
Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Tempera- tering Water Temperature (TemperatureUNITEWT) are less
ture Reset (ConfigurationRSETCRST) is enabled either by than or equal to the Freeze Setpoint + Cooler Heater Delta T Set-
CRST=1 (Outside Air Temperature), CRST=2 (Return Water), point (HTR).
CRST=3 (4-20 mA Input), or CRST=4 (Space Temperature) and The Freeze Setpoint is 34°F (1.1°C) for fresh water systems (Con-
is active. figurationSERVFLUD=1). The Freeze Setpoint is the Brine
Action Taken Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) for Medium
The Active Setpoint (Run StatusVIEW SETP) will be modi- Temperature Brine systems (ConfigurationSERV
fied according to the programmed information and will be dis- FLUD=2).
played as the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT). Action Taken
Termination The cooler heater will be energized.
This mode will terminate when the Temperature Reset is not mod- Termination
ifying the active leaving water set point, so SETP is the same as The cooler heater will be deenergized when both the Entering Wa-
CTPT. ter Temperature (EWT) and Leaving Water Temperature (LWT)
Possible Causes are above the Freeze Setpoint + Cooler Heater Delta T Setpoint
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. (HTR).
45
Possible Causes MODE 10 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD10): SYS-
This mode will be enabled for freeze protection. If the tempera- TEM MANAGER ACTIVE
tures are not as described above, check the accuracy of the outside Criteria for Mode
air, entering and leaving water thermistors.
Tested when the unit is ON or OFF. This mode is active if a Sys-
MODE 7 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD07): WATER tem Manager such as Building Supervisor, Chillervisor System
PUMP ROTATION Manager, or another CCN device is controlling the machine.
Tested when the unit is ON or OFF. This mode is active when the The machine will respond to the specific command received from
Cooler Pump Sequence (ConfigurationOPTNPUMP) =2 (2 the System Manager.
Pumps Automatic Changeover) and the Pump Rotation Delta Termination
Timer (ConfigurationOPTN ROT.P) has expired. The mode will be terminated if the System Manager control is re-
Action Taken leased.
The control will switch the operation of the pumps. The lead Possible Causes
pump will be operating normally. The lag pump will be started, This mode is in effect only due to programming options.
becoming the lead, and then the original lead pump will be shut
down. MODE 11 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD11): MAST
Termination SLAVE CTRL ACTIVE
This mode will terminate when the pump operation has been com- Criteria for Mode
pleted. Tested if the machine is ON. This mode is active if the Master
Possible Causes Slave Control has been enabled. and 2 machines are programmed,
one as the master (Configuration RSETMSSL=1 [Master])
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. and the other as a slave (ConfigurationRSETMSSL=2
MODE 8 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD08): PUMP [Slave]).
PERIODIC START Action Taken
Criteria for Mode Both the master and slave machine will respond to the capacity
This mode is active when the cooler pump is started for the Peri- control commands issued by the master controller. This may in-
odic Pump Start configuration (Configuration clude control point changes and demand limit commands.
OPTNPM.PS=YES). Termination
Action Taken This mode will terminate when the Master Slave Control has been
If the pump has not run that day, a pump will be started and will disabled.
run for 2 seconds at 2:00 PM. If the machine is equipped with dual Possible Causes
pumps, Pump no. 1 will run on even days (such as day 2, 4, 6 of This mode is in effect only due to programming options.
the month). Pump no. 2 will run on odd days (such as day 1, 3, 5
of the month). MODE 12 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD12): AUTO
Termination CHANGEOVER ACTIVE
This mode will terminate when the pump shuts down. Criteria for Mode
Possible Causes This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units.
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. Action Taken
None.
MODE 9 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD09): NIGHT
LOW NOISE ACTIVE Termination
Criteria for Mode None.
This mode is active when the Night Time Low Noise Option has Possible Causes
been configured and the time is within the configured time. Pro- This mode is in effect only due to programming options.
gramming a Night Low Noise Start Time (Configura-
tionOPTNLS.ST) and a Night Low Noise End Time (Con- MODE 13 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD13): FREE
figurationOPTNLS.ND) configures the option. COOLING ACTIVE
Action Taken Criteria for Mode
The control will raise the head pressure set point to reduce the This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units.
number of condenser fans on, thereby reducing the sound of the Action Taken
machine. Additionally, if the Night Time Low Sound Capacity None.
Limit (ConfigurationOPTN LS.LT) has been configured,
the units capacity will be limited to the programmed level. Termination
Termination None.
This mode will terminate once the Night Low Noise End Time Possible Causes
(LS.ND) has been reached. This mode is in effect only due to programming options.
Possible Causes MODE 14 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD14):
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. RECLAIM ACTIVE
Criteria for Mode
This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units.
Action Taken
None.
46
Termination Action Taken
None. None.
Possible Causes Termination
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. None.
MODE 15 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD15): ELEC- Possible Causes
TRIC HEAT ACTIVE This mode is in effect only due to programming options.
Criteria for Mode MODE 21 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD21): LOW
This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. SUCTION CIRCUIT A
Action Taken MODE 22 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD22): LOW
None. SUCTION CIRCUIT B
Termination MODE 23 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD23): LOW
None. SUCTION CIRCUIT C
Possible Causes Criteria for Mode
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. The criteria are tested when the circuit is ON. The appropriate cir-
MODE 16 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD16): HEAT- cuit mode will be active if one of the following conditions is true:
ING LOW EWT LOCKOUT 1. If the circuit’s Saturated Suction Temperature (SST) is more
Criteria for Mode than 6°F (3.3°C) less than the freeze point and both the cooler
This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. approach (Leaving Water Temperature—SST) and superheat
(Suction Gas Temperature—SST) are greater than 15°F
Action Taken (8.3°C).
None. 2. If there is more than one compressor ON in the circuit and the
Termination circuit’s SST is greater than 18°F (10.0°C) below the freeze
None. point for more than 90 seconds.
Possible Causes 3. If there is more than one compressor ON in the circuit and the
circuit’s SST is greater than –4°F (–20.0°C) and the SST 30
This mode is in effect only due to programming options.
seconds ago was 18°F (10.0°C) below the freeze point.
MODE 17 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD17): 4. If the circuit’s saturated suction temperature is greater than
BOILER ACTIVE 6°F (3.3°C) below the freeze point for more than 3 minutes.
Criteria for Mode For a fresh water system (ConfigurationSERVFLUD =1),
This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. the freeze point is 34°F (1.1°C). For medium temperature brine
systems, (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2), the freeze point is
Action Taken Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP).
None. Action Taken
Termination For criterion 1, no additional stages will be added. For criteria 2, 3
None. and 4, one stage of capacity will be removed.
Possible Causes Termination
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. The mode will terminate when the circuit’s Saturated Suction
Temperature is greater than the freeze point minus 6°F (3.3°C) or
MODE 18 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD18): ICE the circuit has alarmed.
MODE IN EFFECT
Possible Causes
Criteria for Mode
If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarms
Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Ice Setpoint P.05, P.06, and P.07 on page 72.
(SetpointsCOOLCSP.3) is in use. While in this mode, the
Active Setpoint (Run Status VIEWSETP) will show the MODE 24 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD24): HIGH
CSP.3 value. DGT CIRCUIT A
Action Taken MODE 25 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD25): HIGH
The unit will operate to the Ice Setpoint (CSP.3). DGT CIRCUIT B
Termination
MODE 26 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD26): HIGH
This mode will terminate when the Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) is no lon- DGT CIRCUIT C
ger in use.
Criteria for Mode
Possible Causes
This mode is tested for when any circuit is running. The circuit
This mode is in effect only due to programming options. saturated condensing and suction temperatures are monitored to
MODE 19 OPERATING MODEMODEMD19): ensure that the compressors always operate withing their allowed
DEFROST ACTIVE ON CIR A “map.” Operation at conditions at or outside the “map” boundaries
will cause this mode to be in effect. Operation at extremely low
MODE 20 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD20): suction pressures and high condensing temperatures will cause the
DEFROST ACTIVE ON CIR B mode to be generated.
This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. The circuit will not be allowed to increase capacity and may be au-
tomatically unloaded or stopped.
47
Termination Possible Causes
This mode will terminate when or if the circuit refrigerant condi- If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarms
tions return to within the compressor “map.” P.08, P.09, P.10, P.11, P.12 and P.13 on page 73.
Possible Causes Optional Heat Reclaim Module
This mode could be in effect due to a low fluid flow rate, over- The heat reclaim option adds a water-cooled condenser in parallel
charge of oil in a circuit, dirty condenser coils, refrigerant over- with the standard air-cooled condenser for the purpose of simulta-
charge, or excessive brine concentration. neously producing tempered hot water while satisfying the chilled
MODE 27 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD27): HIGH water requirement.
PRES OVERRIDE CIR A For chillers with the heat reclaim option, Configuration→
UNIT→RECL should be set to YES.
MODE 28 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD28): HIGH
PRES OVERRIDE CIR B This option requires installation of an additional board (EMM-HR).
This board allows control of the components shown in Table 11.
MODE 29 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD29): HIGH Table 38 lists EMM-HR outputs for the solenoid valves. Item
PRES OVERRIDE CIR C numbers in Table 38 refer to Fig. 24 of this document.
Criteria for Mode For more control details, refer to the unit low voltage control sche-
Tested when the circuit is ON. The appropriate circuit mode will matic (Fig. 25).
be active if the discharge pressure for the circuit, Discharge Pres- The heat reclaim mode can be selected by either the Heat Recov-
sure Circuit A (Pressure PRC.ADP.A), Discharge Pressure ery Enable Switch or by CCN control.
Circuit B (PressurePRC.BDP.B), or Discharge Pressure
Circuit C (PressurePRC.CDP.C) is greater than the High SWITCH CONTROLLED
Pressure Threshold (ConfigurationSERVHP.TH). To configure Heat Reclaim for SWITCH control, the unit Operat-
Action Taken ing Type Control can be configured to 0, 1 or 2 (Operating
Modes→SLCT→OPER). The Reclaim Select configuration must
The capacity of the affected circuit will be reduced. If the unit is be set to “Switch Control” (Operating Modes→SLCT→
equipped with Minimum Load Control and has been configured RL.SE=2). Switch input connection should be field wired to ter-
for High Ambient (Configuration UNITHGBP=3), the min- minals 14 and 15 on TB7, cooling mode (open) or heat reclaim
imum load control valve will be energized. Two minutes follow- mode (closed). Switch status can be accessed through In-
ing the capacity reduction, the circuit’s saturated condensing tem- put→GEN.I→RECL.
perature (SCT) is calculated and stored. The affected circuit will
not be allowed to add capacity for at least 5 minutes following the CCN CONTROL
capacity reduction. If after 5 minutes, the circuit’s saturated con- To configure Heat Reclaim for CCN control, the unit Operating
densing temperature is less than SCT – 3°F (1.7°C), if required, Type Control must be set to CCN control (Operating
another stage of capacity will be added. mode→SLCT→OPER=2). The Reclaim Select configuration
If additional steps of capacity are required, the control will look must be set to “Yes” (Operating Modes→SLCT→RL.SE=1).
for other circuits to add capacity. Heat reclaim mode is selected by forcing CCN point RECL_SEL
Termination (Status Display→GENUNIT→RECL_SEL) to “NO” for cooling
mode or “YES” for Heat Reclaim mode.
This mode will terminate once the circuit’s saturated condensing
temperature is less than SCT –3°F (1.7°C). The heat reclaim function is active when the heat reclaim entering
water temperature is lower than the heat reclaim set point (Set-
Possible Causes points→MISC→RSP), default 122°F (50°C), minus half or quar-
If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarm ter of the heat reclaim deadband, depending on the number of re-
A1.03. on page 68. frigerant circuits in reclaim mode (Setpoints→MISC→RDB).
MODE 30 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD30): LOW The default heat reclaim deadband is 9°F (5.0°C) and the recom-
mended deadband range is 5 to 18°F (2.8 to 10°C).
SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT A
The difference between the reclaim entering water temperature
MODE 31 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD31): LOW and reclaim set point will determine if one or two circuits are re-
SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT B quired to provide heat reclaim capacity. See Table 39 for details.
MODE 32 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD32): LOW Heat Reclaim Active status is indicated by MODE_14=ON (Op-
erating Modes→MODE→MD14) from the scrolling marquee
SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT C display or Mode_14=1 accessed through CCN.
Criteria for Mode The following is the changeover procedure from cooling mode to
Tested when the circuit is ON with at least 1 compressor ON. The heat reclaim mode.
appropriate circuit mode will be active is the circuit’s superheat is 1. Verify that the circuit has run for more than 2 minutes in
less than 5°F (2.8°C) or greater than 45°F (25°C). cooling.
Action Taken 2. Start the reclaim pump.
No additional stages of circuit capacity will be added until the cir- 3. Verify the reclaim condenser flow switch is closed. If this
cuit’s superheat is greater than 5°F (2.8°C) and less than 45°F remains open after one minute of condenser pump operation,
(25°C). the circuit remains in cooling mode and P.15 alarm will be
The control will look for other circuits to add capacity if additional activated.
steps of capacity are required. Once water flow is established the following conditions must be
Termination true:
This mode will terminate once the affected circuit’s superheat is • saturated condensing temperature is greater than saturated
greater than 5°F (2.8°C) and less than 45°F (25°C). suction temperature plus 18°F (10°C)
48
• if reclaim water entering requires the circuit to go to a heat During the air-cooled operation, leaving heat reclaim condenser
reclaim session and the number of air cooled to reclaim solenoids may activate for 3 seconds every 20 seconds to recover
changeovers is not greater than 4 per hour more charge into air-cooled operation, based on the system sub-
• the last changeover occurred more than 7 minutes ago cooling level. Leaving air-cooled condenser solenoids should re-
main closed.
When all of these conditions are true, the heat reclaim pumpdown
sequence is activated. During heat reclaim pumpdown, the control Heat reclaim entering water temperature (HEWT), leaving water
will open the entering heat reclaim condenser solenoid valve and temperature (HLWT), heat reclaim pump hours (HR.CD), refrig-
close the entering air-cooled condenser solenoid valves 3 seconds erant sub-cooling (HRS.x) can be accessed from the scrolling
later. After one minute or when the subcooling value is above marquee display through the following paths:
13.2°F (–10.4°C), the heat reclaim operation is effective. Temperatures→UNIT→HEWT
During the heat reclaim operation, if the sub-cooling value is less Temperature→UNIT→HLWT
than 13.2°F (–10.4°C) leaving air-cooled condenser solenoids Run Status→RUN→HR.CD
may activate for 3 seconds every 20 seconds to recover more Temperatures→Cir.A→HRS.A
charge. If sub-cooling is greater than 16° F (9.0° C) the entering Temperatures→Cir.B→HRS.B
air cooled condenser solenoids may activate for 3 seconds every To view circuit status through CCN, two points are available: Re-
20 seconds to transfer charge back into the air-cooled condenser to claim Status Circuit A and Reclaim Status Circuit B. Each will
prevent excessive condensing temperature. The leaving heat re- show a single-digit number as defined in Table 40.
claim condenser solenoid should remain closed.
Once the heat reclaim set point (RSP) is satisfied, the system will RECLAIM CONDENSER WATER VALVE OUTPUT
transition back to normal air-cooled mode. The air-cooled pump- This output (0 to 10 vdc) controls the heat reclaim condenser 3-
down sequence is activated. During air-cooled pumpdown, the way water valve position through a variable speed device. A 10
control will open the entering air-cooled condenser solenoids and vdc signal corresponds to 100% open.
close the entering heat reclaim condenser valves 3 seconds later.
Table 38 — Heat Reclaim Circuits
SOLENOID OPERATION
OUTPUT ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION CONNECTION RELAY TYPE COOLING RECLAIM
HR1.A 4 Ckt. A Ent A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J3-CH24 ECA-A N/O OPEN CLOSED
HR2.A 6 Ckt. A Lvg A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH18 LCA-A N/C CLOSED CYCLING
HR3.A 2 Ckt. A Ent W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH20 ECW-A N/C CLOSED OPEN
HR4.A 9 Ckt. A Lvg W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH22 LCW-A N/C CYCLING CLOSED
HR1.B 5 Ckt. B Ent A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J3-CH25 ECA-B N/O OPEN CLOSED
HR2.B 7 Ckt. B Lvg A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH19 LCA-B N/C CLOSED CYCLING
HR3.B 3 Ckt. B Ent W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH21 ECW-B N/C CLOSED OPEN
HR4.B 10 Ckt. B Lvg W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH23 LCW-B N/C CYCLING CLOSED
Table 39 — Heat Reclaim Staging

NUMBER OF CIRCUITS NUMBER OF CIRCUITS IN
HEAT RECLAIM ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE RECLAIM SELECT IN RECLAIM RECLAIM STATUS CHANGE
– No 0 -2
hr_ew < rsp - hr_deadb/2 Yes – +2
rsp - hr_deadb/2 < hr_ewt < rsp - hr_deadb/4 Yes 0 +1
rsp - hr_deadb/2 < hr_ewt < rsp - hr_deadb/4 Yes 1 Unchanged
rsp - hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/4 Yes – Unchanged
rsp + hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes 1 Unchanged
rsp + hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes 2 -1
hr_ewt > rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes – -2
49
Table 40 — CCN Table Reclaim Status Display to allow a maximum re-circulating of the warm water between the
3-way water valve and heat reclaim condenser.
RECLAIM STATUS When the entering water temperature is above 104°F (40°C), the
DESCRIPTION
(hrstat_x)*
water valve will remain fully open, allowing no recirculation of
0 Air cooled mode
the warm water. When the entering water temperature is between
1 Reclaim mode request 68°F and 104°F (20 and 40°C), the water valve will be adjusted
2 Reclaim pumpdown sequence between 20% and 100% position in linear proportion to the value
3 Reclaim operation mode of the entering water temperature.
4 Air cooled mode request
RECLAIM CONDENSER HEATER OPERATION
*x = a or b.
The 3-way valve should be installed to facilitate the cold water For freeze protection the heat reclaim condenser is equipped with
start-up below 59°F (15°C) and maintain a stable head pressure an electric heater. The heater is energized when entering or leaving
control during heat reclaim operation. The minimum position of heat reclaim fluid temperature is lower than 37.4°F (3.0°C). The
the water valve should be set at 20% and maximum position heater is de-energized when both temperatures are above 40.0°F
should be set at 100%. When the entering water temperature is be- (4.4°C).
low 68°F (20°C), the water valve should remain at 20% position
2 4 5 3 1
1
6 7
8 8
8 8
9 10
11 11
12 13
14 15
16 17
18
19 18
19
LEGEND
EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve
ITEM NUMBERS
1 — Air condenser (coils)
2 — Solenoid valve: Heat reclaim mode ckt A (entering heat reclaim condenser)
3 — Solenoid valve: Heat reclaim mode ckt B (entering heat reclaim condenser)
4 — Solenoid valve: Cooling mode ckt A (entering air-cooled condenser)
5 — Solenoid valve: Cooling mode ckt B (entering air-cooled condenser)
6 — Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in heat reclaim mode ckt A (leaving air-cooled condenser)
7 — Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in heat reclaim mode ckt B (leaving air-cooled condenser)
8 — Check valve
9 — Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in cooling mode ckt A (leaving heat reclaim condenser)
10 — Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in cooling mode ckt B (leaving heat reclaim condenser)
11 — Compressor
12 — Hot Gas Bypass ckt A
13 — Hot Gas Bypass ckt B
14 — Pumpdown pressure transducer ckt A
15 — Pumpdoiwn pressure transducer ckt B
16 — Subcooled condenser gas temperature ckt A
17 — Subcooled condenser gas temperature ckt B
18 — Expansion Device (EXV)
19 — Filter Drier (FD)
Fig. 24 — Solenoid Valve Location in Chiller System — 30RB with Heat Reclaim
50
CONDENSER FLOW SWITCH
Fig. 25 — Heat Reclaim Low Voltage Control Schematic
51
SERVICE The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction temperature
to 50°F (10°C). This makes it possible for the chiller to start at
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compres-
See Fig. 26 for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid sor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maximum operating
refrigerant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes pressure).
through the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2- If it appears that the EXV module is not properly controlling cir-
phase condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion cuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a number of
valve operates through an electronically controlled activation of a checks that can be made using test functions and initialization fea-
stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless power tures built into the microprocessor control. See the EXV Trouble-
pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for ro- shooting Procedure section to test EXVs.
tation in either direction. The direction depends on the phase rela-
tionship of the power pulses. EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Follow the steps below to diagnose and correct EXV problems.
Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/Remote
(EOR) Contact switch to the Off position. Press ESCAPE on the
scrolling marquee until the highest operating level is displayed.
Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test mode and press
ENTER . The display will be TEST. Use the arrow keys until
display shows QUIC. Press ENTER (password entry may be re-
quired) and use or to change OFF to ON.
The Quick Test sub-mode is now enabled. Move the arrow down
to the appropriate circuit EXV, Circuit A EXV % Open (Service
Test ModeQUICEXV.A), Circuit B EXV % Open (Service
Test ModeQUICEXV.B), or Circuit C EXV % Open (Service
Test ModeQUIC EXV.C), and press ENTER . The current
value of 0 will be displayed.
CAUTION
1. Cable
2. Glass Seal Do not remove EXV cables from the EXV board with the
3. Motor Housing power applied to the board. Damage to the board may occur.
4. Stepper Motor
Press ENTER and the value will be flashing. Using the in-
5. Bearing
6. Lead Screw
7.
8.
Insert
Valve Piston
crease the EXV position to select 100% valve position (hold
9.
10.
Valve Seat
Valve Port
for quick movement) and press ENTER . The actuator should be
felt moving through the EXV. Press ENTER again twice if nec-
Fig. 26 — Cutaway View of the Electronic Expansion essary to confirm this has occurred. This will attempt to force the
Valve
EXV to 100% again. To close the valve, press ENTER , select
The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating move-
ments that are transformed into linear motion by the transmission 0% with and press ENTER .
in the cage assembly. The valve cone is a V-port type which in- The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its
cludes a positive shut-off when closed. stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not working properly, con-
There are two different EXVs. For circuits with 1 or 2 compres- tinue with the following test procedure:
sors, the total number of steps is 2785. For circuits with 3 or 4 Check the 8-position DIP switch on the board for the proper ad-
compressors, the total number of steps is 3690. The EXV motor dress. Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on
moves at 150 steps per second. Commanding the valve to either the EXV module. Connect positive test lead to EXV-J2A terminal
0% or 100% will add extra 160 steps to the move, to ensure the 5 for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2A terminal 5 for sizes 210-300 for
value is open or closed completely. Circuit A. Connect lead to EXV-J2B terminal 5 for sizes 060-190
The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a thermistor or EXV1-J2B terminal 5 for sizes 210-300 for Circuit B. Connect
located in a well in the suction manifold before the compressor. lead to EXV2-J2A terminal 5 for sizes 210-300 for Circuit C. Set
Suction pressure as measured by the suction pressure transducer is meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the Service Test procedure
converted to a saturated suction temperature. The thermistor mea- above, move the valve output under test to 100%. DO NOT short
sures the temperature of the superheated gas entering the compres- meter leads together or pin 5 to any other pin, as board damage
sor and the pressure transducer determines the saturated tempera- will occur. During the next several seconds, carefully connect the
ture of suction gas. The difference between the temperature of the negative test lead to pins 1,2,3 and 4 in succession. Digital voltme-
superheated gas and the saturated suction temperature is the super- ters will average this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If
heat. The EXV board controls the position of the electronic expan- the output remains at a constant voltage other than 6 vdc or shows
sion valve stepper motor to maintain superheat set point. 0 volts, remove the connector to the valve and recheck.
The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approximately Press ENTER and select 0% to close the valve. If a problem still
9.0°F (5.0°C). Because EXV status is communicated to the main exists, replace the EXV board. If the reading is correct, the expan-
base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV boards, it is pos- sion valve and EXV wiring should be checked. Check the EXV
sible to track the valve position. The unit is then protected against connector and interconnecting wiring.
loss of charge and a faulty valve. During initial start-up, the EXV
is fully closed. After initialization period, valve position is tracked 1. Check color-coding and wire connections. Make sure they
by the EXV board by constantly monitoring the amount of valve are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV board and
movement. EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.
52
2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin terminals. closer to the motor. Motor actuator movement should be
Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Remove the smooth and uniform from fully closed to fully open posi-
EXV module plug. Module plug is labeled EXV-J2A on sizes tion. Press ENTER twice, use to select 0% and press
060-190 or EXV1-J2A on sizes 210-300 for Circuit A, EXV-J2B
for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2B for sizes 210-300 for Circuit B, ENTER again to check open to closed operation. If the
or EXV2-J2A on sizes 210-300 for Circuit C. Check the resis- valve is properly connected to the processor and receiving
tance of the two windings between pins 1 and 3 for one winding correct signals, yet does not operate as described above, the
and pins 2 and 4 for the other winding. The resistance should be sealed motor portion of the valve should be replaced.
52 ohms (± 5.2 ohms). Check resistance of pins 1, 2, 3, and 4 to
ground. The resistance should be infinity. Installing EXV Motor
Inspecting/Opening Electronic Expansion Valves IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gasket before opening
EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.
IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gaskets before opening
EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.
If re-installing the motor, be sure to use a new gasket in the assem-
bly. See Fig. 27. It is easier to install the motor assembly with the
To check the physical operation of an EXV, the following steps lead screw in the fully closed position. Using the steps outlined
must be performed. above, move the EXV position to 0. Insert the motor into the body
1. Close the liquid line shut off valve of the circuit to be of the EXV. Tighten the motor to the body to 36 ft-lb (50 N-m)
checked. Put the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch in the and then tighten the valve another 30 degrees.
Off position. Using the scrolling marquee, enter the Service Moisture Liquid Indicator
Test mode and change Service TestTEST T.REQ from Clear flow of liquid refrigerant indicates sufficient charge in sys-
OFF to ON. A password may be required. Switch the EOR tem. Bubbles in the sight glass indicate undercharged system or
switch to the Enable position. Under the COMP sub-mode, presence of noncondensables. Moisture in system measured in
enable the one of the compressors (Service TestTEST parts per million (ppm), changes color of indicator. See Table 41.
CP.xn) for the circuit. Let compressor run until gage on suc- Change filter drier at first sign of moisture in system.
tion pressure port reads 10 psig. Press ENTER , and Table 41 — Moisture Liquid Indicator
ENTER to turn the compressor off. The compressor will AT 75°F (24°C) AT 125°F (52°C)
REFRIGERANT R-410A
turn off. Immediately after the compressor shuts off, close the (ppm) (ppm)
discharge valve. Green — Dry <20 <60
2. Remove any remaining refrigerant from the system low side Yellow-green — Caution 20 to 165 60 to 500
using proper reclaiming techniques. Turn off the line voltage Yellow — Wet >165 >500
power supply to the compressors.
3. The expansion valve motor is hermetically sealed inside the IMPORTANT: Unit must be in operation at least 12 hours be-
top portion of the valve. See Fig. 26. Carefully unscrew the fore moisture indicator can give an accurate reading.
11/16 in. (27 mm) retaining nut securing the motor portion to With unit running, indicating element must be in contact with
the body of the valve making sure the EXV plug is still con- liquid refrigerant to give true reading.
nected. The EXV operator will come out with the motor por-
tion of the device. Filter Drier
4. Enter the appropriate EXV test step under the (Service Whenever moisture-liquid indicator shows presence of moisture,
TestQUIC) sub-mode in the Service Test mode. Locate replace filter drier(s). There is one filter drier on each circuit. Refer
the desired item Service TestQUICEXV.A, Service to Carrier Standard Service Techniques Manual, Chapter 1, Re-
Test QUICEXV.B, or Service TestQUIC EXV.C. frigerants, for details on servicing filter driers.
Press ENTER twice to make the valve position of 0% Liquid Line Service Valve
flash. Press and hold until 100% is displayed and press This valve is located immediately ahead of filter drier, and has a
1/4-in. Schrader connection for field charging. In combination
ENTER . Observe the operation of the lead screw. See with compressor discharge service valve, each circuit can be
Fig. 26. The motor should be turning, raising the operator pumped down into the high side for servicing except on units
equipped with MCHX condenser coils.
53
DISASSEMBLY
CLOSED
ADAPTER
27mm / 11/16''
OPEN
NOTE: Open valve in OPEN

Quick VALVE
Test sub-mode before
IN QUICK TEST disassembling.
SUB-MODE BEFORE DISASSEMBLING
ASSEMBLY
CLOSED
50Nm (36 ft-lb)+ 30° 27mm / 11/16''
OPEN
GASKET
EF05BD271 NV 32.5mm
EF05BD331 NV 36mm
NOTES:
1. Push down on valve piston to close valve before assembling.
2. After valve is assembled close valve in Quick Test sub-mode or cycle power before opening service valve.
Fig. 27 — Disassembly and Assembly of EXV Motor
54
Cooler Table 43 — Plug Component Dimensions
FREEZE PROTECTION SIZE
PLUG COMPONENT
Coolers can be ordered with heaters installed in the factory. If in. mm
equipped, the main base board based on the outdoor-air tempera- Tube sheet hole diameter 0.377-0.382 9.58-9.70
ture and the entering and leaving water thermistors controls the Tube OD 0.373-0.377 9.47-9.58
cooler heaters. The Heater Set Point is the sum of the freeze point Tube ID after rolling (Includes 0.328 8.33
and Cooler Heater DT Setp (ConfigurationSERVHTR). expansion due to clearance.)
If the entering or leaving water temperature is less than the Heater NOTE: Tubes next to gasket webs must be flush with tube sheet (both
Set Point and the outdoor-air temperature is less than the Heater ends).
Set Point – 2°F (1.1°C), then the heater will be turned on. For the 30RB150-390 coolers, the pass partition has a perforated
If the Entering or Leaving Water Temperature is less than the distribution plate in the inlet pass to more uniformly distribute the
Brine Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) + 1.0°F refrigerant as it enters the first pass tubes of the cooler. The perfo-
(0.5°C), then the heater will be turned on along with the pump. rated distribution plate is on the tubesheet side of the pass parti-
tion. A tube plug in a first pass tube will interfere with the installa-
Entire cooler is covered with closed-cell insulation applied over tion of pass partition. The tube plug must be flush with the tube
the heater. Heater plus insulation protect cooler against low ambi- sheet to prevent this interference. The pass partition is symmetri-
ent temperature freeze-up to –20°F (–28°C). cal, meaning the partition plate can be rotated 180 degrees, how-
IMPORTANT: If unit is installed in an area where ambient ever, the performance of the machine will be affected if the pass
temperatures fall below 32°F (0°C), it is recommended that a partition is installed incorrectly.
suitable corrosion-inhibited antifreeze solution be used in RETUBING
chilled water circuit.
When retubing is required, obtain service of qualified personnel
experienced in boiler maintenance and repair. Most standard pro-
LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE cedures can be followed when retubing the coolers. An 8% crush
Main base board is programmed to shut chiller down if leaving is recommended when rolling replacement tubes into the
fluid temperature drops below 34°F (1.1°C) for water or below tubesheet.
Brine Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) for brine The following Elliott Co. tube rolling tools are required:
units. The unit will shut down without a pumpout. When fluid
temperature rises to 6°F (3.3°C) above the leaving fluid set point, • Expander Assembly
safety resets and chiller restarts. Reset is automatic as long as this • Cage
is the first occurrence. • Mandrel
LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION • Rolls
All 30RB machines include an integral flow switch that protects Place one drop of Loctite No. 609 or equivalent on top of tube pri-
the chiller against loss of cooler flow. or to rolling. This material is intended to “wick” into the area of
the tube that is not rolled into the tube sheet, and prevent fluid
TUBE PLUGGING from accumulating between the tube and the tube sheet.
A leaky tube can be plugged until retubing can be done. The num-
ber of tubes plugged determines how soon the cooler must be re-
tubed. If several tubes require plugging, check with a local Carrier
representative to find out how the number and location of tubes
can affect unit capacity. Up to 10% of the tubes per refrigerant
pass can be plugged. Fig. 28 shows an Elliott tube plug and a
cross-sectional view of a plug in place. See Tables 42 and 43 for
plug components. Fig. 28 — Elliott Tube Plug
TIGHTENING COOLER HEAD BOLTS (FIG. 29-33)
CAUTION Gasket Preparation
Use extreme care when installing plugs to prevent damage to When reassembling cooler heads, always use new gaskets. Gas-
the tube sheet section between the holes. kets are neoprene-based and are brushed with a light film of com-
pressor oil. Do not soak gasket or gasket deterioration will result.
Use new gaskets within 30 minutes to prevent deterioration. Reas-
Table 42 — Plug Component Part Numbers semble cooler nozzle end or plain end cover of the cooler with the
gaskets. Torque all cooler bolts to the following specification and
COMPONENTS FOR PLUGGING PART NUMBER sequence:
For Tubes • 5/8-in. Diameter Perimeter Bolts (Grade 5): 150 to 170 ft-lb
Brass Pin 853103-312* (201 to 228 N-m)
Brass Ring 853002-322* • 1/2-in. Diameter Flange Bolts (Grade 5): 70 to 90 ft-lb
For Holes without tubes (94 to 121 N-m)
Brass Pin 853103-375
• 1/2-in. Diameter Center Stud (Grade 5): 70 to 90 ft-lb
Brass Ring 853002-377 (94 to 121 N-m)
Loctite No. 675 †
1. Install all bolts finger tight, except for the suction flange bolts.
Locquic “N” †
Installing these flanges will interfere with tightening the cen-
*Order directly from Elliot Tube Company, Dayton, OH or RCD. ter stud nuts.
†Can be obtained locally.
2. Bolt tightening sequence is outlined in Fig. 29-33. Follow the
numbering or lettering sequence so that pressure is evenly
applied to gasket.
55
3. Apply torque in one-third steps until required torque is RTPF (Round Tube Plate Fin) Condenser Coil
reached. Load all bolts to each one-third step before proceed- Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations
ing to next one-third step. Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper
4. No less than one hour later, retighten all bolts to required operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of
torque values. harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and ex-
5. After refrigerant is restored to system, check for refrigerant tend the life of the unit. The following maintenance and cleaning
leaks using recommended industry practices. procedures are recommended as part of the routine maintenance
6. Replace cooler insulation. activities to extend the life of the coil.
CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH REMOVE SURFACE LOADED FIBERS
A factory-installed flow switch is installed in the cooler nozzle for Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum
all machines. This is a thermal-dispersion flow switch with no cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic
field adjustments. The switch is set for approximately 0.5 ft/sec bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be ap-
flow. See Table 44 for unit flow rate information. plied in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily dam-
aged (fin edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating
Table 44 — Unit Flow Rates of a protected coil) if the tool is applied across the fins.
COOLER MINIMUM MINIMUM NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, against a sur-
UNIT SIZE face loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil. This will
CONNECTION FLOW - WATER FLOW - 40% EG
30RB SIZE (in.) (GPM) (GPM) make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded fibers must be
060-100 4 20 53 completely removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse.
110-300 6 44 117 PERIODIC CLEAN WATER RINSE
315-390 6 44 (per module) 117 (per module) A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are ap-
plied in coastal or industrial environments. However, it is very im-
portant that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water
The sensor tip houses two thermistors and a heater element. One stream to avoid damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning is rec-
thermistor is located in the sensor tip, closest to the flowing fluid. ommended.
This thermistor is used to detect changes in the flow velocity of
the liquid. The second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall ROUTINE CLEANING OF COIL SURFACES
and is affected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. Routine cleaning with Totaline® environmentally balanced coil
The thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. This cleaner is avail-
of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated able from Carrier Replacement parts division as part number
from each other within the confines of the probe. P902-0301 for a one-gallon container, and part number P902-0305
In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the thermistors for a 5-gallon container. It is recommended that all coils, including
in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the probe is heated. the standard copper tube aluminum fin, pre-coated fin, copper fin,
As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried away from the sen- or e-coated coils be cleaned with the Totaline environmentally bal-
sor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a function of how fast heat anced coil cleaner as described below. Coil cleaning should be
is conducted away by the flowing liquid. The difference in tem- part of the unit’s regularly scheduled maintenance procedures to
perature between the two thermistors provides a measurement of ensure long life of the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in
fluid velocity past the sensor probe. When fluid velocity is high, reduced durability in the environment.
more heat will be carried away from the heated thermistor and the Avoid the use of:
temperature differential will be small. As fluid velocity decreases,
less heat will be taken from the heated thermistor and there will be • coil brighteners
an increase in temperature differential. • acid cleaning prior to painting
When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then the out- • high pressure washers
put is switched on, sending 24 vac through a 560-ohm dropping • poor quality water for cleaning
resistor. This provides 12 vac to the MBB to prove flow has been
established. Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner is non-flammable,
hypoallergenic, nonbacterial, and a USDA accepted biodegrad-
For recommended maintenance, check the sensor tip for build-up able agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding components
every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If necessary, build- such as electrical wiring, painted metal surfaces, or insulation. Use
up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common vinegar cleansing of non-recommended coil cleaners is strongly discouraged since
agent. coil and unit durability could be affected.
4 4 8
6 8 6
10 12 10 12
14 16 14 16
18 2 20 18 2 20
22 24 22
24
26 1 27 26 1 27
25 23 25 23
3 19 21 3 19
21
15 17 15
17
13 11 13 11
9 5 7 9 5 7
Fig. 29 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB060,070
56
6 6
8 10 8 10
15 13 15 13
4 19 4
19 17 17
23 23 2 21
2 21
27 25 27 25
1
29 1 28 29 28
26 24 26 3 24
3
22 20 22 20
5
18 5 16 18 16
14 12 14 12
11 7 9 11 7 9
Fig. 30 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB080-100
6 8 6
15 8 10
13 15
10
13
19 4 19
17 4 17
23 23
2 21 21
27 25 27 2 25
29 1 28 29 28
1
26 24 26 3 24
3
22 20 22 20
18 18 5
5 16 16
14 12 14 12
11 7 9 11 7 9
13 9 6 11 13 9 6 11
17 15 17 15
21 4 19 21 19
23 4 23
25 25
2
29 27 29 2 27
1
31 1 30 31 30
28 26 28 3 26
3
24 22 24 22
5
20 5 18 20 18
16 14 16 14
12 7 8 10 12 7 8 10
Fig. 32 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB150-190, 315A/B, 345A/B, 360A/B, 390A/B
18 11 13 16 18 11 13 16
22 9 7 20 22 9 7 20
26 24 26 24
30 3 5 28 30 3 5 28
34 34 32
32
38 36 38 36
40 1 2 39 40 1 2 39
37 35 37 35
33 31 33 31
6 4 29 6 4
29 27 27
25 23 25 10 23
21 8 10 19 21 8 19
17 14 12 15 17 14 12 15
57
Totaline Environmentally Balanced Coil Cleaner Application
Equipment CAUTION
• 21/2 gallon garden sprayer
Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser
• water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage the
coil.
CAUTION 1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coil face
Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic cleaners or trapped within the mounting frame and brackets.
should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any kind. 2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety glasses
These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and gloves. It is rec-
can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface where dissim- ommended to use full coverage clothing.
ilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt below the surface of 3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or
the coil, use the Totaline® environmentally balanced coil clean- industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condenser
er as described on page 56. coils. Only clean potable water is authorized for cleaning
condenser coils.
CAUTION 4. Clean condenser face by spraying the coil steady and uni-
formly from top to bottom while directing the spray straight
High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or toward the coil. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 degree angle.
compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The force The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the coil face. Reduce
of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase air- pressure and use caution to prevent damage to air centers.
side pressure drop. Reduced unit performance or nuisance unit
shutdown may occur.
CAUTION
Totaline Environmentally Balanced Coil Cleaner Application
Instructions Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between air
centers and refrigerant tubes.
1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coil face
or trapped within the mounting frame or brackets. As part of normal maintenance, check the coil for leaks and
2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety glasses corrosion. The condenser coil is connected to the refrigerant
and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and gloves. It is rec- circuit with a fitting that forms a dielectric coupling. The cou-
ommended to use full coverage clothing. pling is held in place with two nuts and studs. The nuts should
3. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum be tightened to 10 lb-ft (13.6 N-m).
cleaner as described above. Condenser Fans
4. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low A formed metal mount bolted to the fan deck supports each fan
velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins. and motor assembly. A shroud and a wire guard provide protec-
5. Mix Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner in a tion from the rotating fan. The exposed end of fan motor shaft is
21/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instructions protected from weather by grease. If fan motor must be removed
included with the cleaner. The optimum solution temperature for service or replacement, be sure to regrease fan shaft and rein-
is 100°F. stall fan guard. The fan motor has a step in the motor shaft. For
NOTE: Do NOT USE water in excess of 130°F, as the enzymatic proper performance, fan should be positioned such that it is se-
activity will be destroyed. curely seated on this step. Tighten the bolt to 12 to 15 ft-lb (16 to
20 N-m).
1. Thoroughly apply Totaline environmentally balanced coil
cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned area, tube IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counterclock-
sheets and coil headers. wise viewed from above). If necessary, switch any 2 power
2. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and apply leads to reverse fan rotation.
cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion. Avoid spraying
in horizontal pattern to minimize potential for fin damage. Refrigerant Circuit
3. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned
areas. LEAK TESTING
4. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly cleaned. Units are shipped with complete operating charge of refrigerant R-
5. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution for 410A (see Physical Data tables supplied in the 30RB Installation
10 minutes. Instructions) and should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a
6. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing. Reap- leak test. If there is no pressure in the system, introduce enough ni-
trogen to search for the leak. Repair the leak using good refrigera-
plying cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute saturation is tion practices. After leaks are repaired, system must be evacuated
achieved. and dehydrated.
7. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean water
using downward rinsing motion of water spray nozzle. Pro- REFRIGERANT CHARGE
tect fins from damage from the spray nozzle. Refer to Physical Data tables supplied in the 30RB Installation
Instructions. Immediately ahead of filter drier in each circuit is a
MCHX Condenser Coil Maintenance and factory-installed liquid line service valve. Each filter drier has a
Cleaning Recommendations 1/4-in. Schrader connection for charging liquid refrigerant.
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper Charging with Unit Off and Evacuated
operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of
harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and ex- Close liquid line service valve before charging. Weigh in charge
tend the life of the unit. The following steps should be taken to shown on unit nameplate. Open liquid line service valve; start unit
clean MCHX condenser coils: and allow it to run several minutes fully loaded. Check for a clear
sight glass. Be sure clear condition is liquid and not vapor.
58
Charging with Unit Running Compressors
If charge is to be added while unit is operating, all condenser fans
and compressors must be operating. It may be necessary to block WARNING
condenser coils at low ambient temperatures to raise condensing
pressure to approximately 450 psig (3102 kPa) to turn all condens- Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover removed.
er fans on. Do not totally block a coil to do this. Partially block all Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire resulting in per-
coils in uniform pattern. Charge each circuit until sight glass sonal injury or death.
shows clear liquid, and has a liquid line temperature of 103°F
(39°C). If unit has the HEVCF option, run unit in Service Test
with all compressors on. Fans will adjust high side pressure to the WARNING
correct value, 125°F SCT (saturated condensing temperature), Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor currents
450 psig. when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the problems
described below before installing and running a replacement
IMPORTANT: When adjusting refrigerant charge, circulate compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves when handling re-
fluid through cooler continuously to prevent freezing and pos- frigerants. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, re-
sible damage to the cooler. Do not overcharge, and never sulting personal injury or death.
charge liquid into the low-pressure side of system.
CAUTION
Safety Devices
Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the
Chillers contain many safety devices and protection logic built machine may result.
into electronic control. Following is a brief summary of major
safeties. COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
COMPRESSOR PROTECTION To change out a faulty compressor, refer to the compressor re-
Circuit Breaker placement procedure included with the new compressor.
Each compressor is equipped with one molded case circuit breaker Compressor oil equalization line fittings use Roto-lok fittings. If a
to provide short circuit protection. Do not bypass or increase size leak is detected at these fittings, tighten fitting to 110 lb-ft (149 N-
of a breaker to correct problems. Determine cause for trouble and m). If leak persists, open system and inspect gasket surface for for-
correct before resetting breaker. Circuit breaker current rating is eign material or damage. If debris is found, clean the surface and
listed on individual circuit breakers. install a new gasket. If the gasket surface is damaged, replace the
compressor. Do not reuse gaskets.
A high-pressure switch with a trip pressure of 641 psig (4419 kPa)
is mounted on the discharge line of each circuit. Switch is wired in OIL CHARGE
series with the SPM modules of all compressors in the circuit. If All units are factory charged with polyol ester (POE) oil to 7/8
switch opens, the SPM opens all compressor contactors in the cir- sight glass. Acceptable oil level for each compressor is 3/4 to 7/8
cuit and all compressors are locked off. See the table below for full in the sight glass. Refer to installation instructions for oil
high pressure switch protection. quantity.
DEVICE CUT-OUT CUT-IN
High Pressure 641 ± 10 psi 493 ± 29 psi CAUTION
Switch (4420 ± 70 kPa) (3400 ± 200 kPa)
The compressor in a Puron® system uses a polyol ester (POE)
CRANKCASE HEATERS oil. This oil is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs wa-
ter readily. POE oils can absorb 15 times as much water as oth-
Each compressor has a 56-w crankcase heater to prevent absorp- er oils designed for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Take all nec-
tion of liquid refrigerant by oil in crankcase when compressor is essary precautions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmo-
not running. Heater power source is control power transformer. sphere.
IMPORTANT: Never open any switch or disconnect that When additional oil or a complete charge is required it must meet
deenergizes crankcase heaters unless unit is being serviced or the following specifications:
is to be shut down for a prolonged period. After a prolonged • Manufacturer: ICI Emkarate RL 32H
shutdown or service, energize crankcase heaters for 24 hours • Oil Type: Inhibited polyol ester-based synthetic compres-
before starting unit. sor lubricant
• ISO Viscosity Grade: 32
Relief Devices Do not reuse drained oil or any oil that has been exposed to the
Fusible plugs are located in each circuit to protect against damage atmosphere.
from excessive pressures.
SYSTEM BURNOUT CLEANUP PROCEDURE
HIGH-SIDE PROTECTION Some compressor electrical failures can cause the motor to burn.
One device is located between condenser and filter drier; a second When this occurs, byproducts such as sludge, carbon, and acids
is on filter drier. contaminate the system. Motor burnouts are classified as mild or
These are both designed to relieve pressure on a temperature rise severe. Test the oil for acidity using a POE oil acid test kit to deter-
to approximately 210°F (99°C). mine the severity of the burnout.
In a mild burnout, there is little or no detectable odor. Compressor
LOW-SIDE PROTECTION oil is clear or slightly discolored. An acid test of the oil will be
A device is located on suction line and is designed to relieve pres- negative. This type of failure is treated the same as a mechanical
sure on a temperature rise to approximately 170°F (77°C). Some failure. The liquid line filter drier or core should be replaced.
local building codes require that relieved gases be removed. This In a severe burnout, there is a strong, pungent, rotten egg odor.
connection will allow conformance to this requirement. Compressor oil is very dark. Evidence of burning may be present
in the tubing connected to the compressor. An acid test of the oil
59
will be positive. The following steps should be taken before re- Every 12 months (for all machines):
starting any compressors in the circuit. • Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.
1. Isolate compressors and recover refrigerant from compressor • Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.
section.
• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than ±2°F
2. Remove oil from all compressors in the circuit. An oil drain (1.2°C) variance from calibrated thermometer.
fitting is provided on each compressor. Pressurize the low
side of the compressor circuit with nitrogen. Less than 10 • Check accuracy of transducers, replace if greater than
±5 psi (34.47 kPa) variance.
psig (68.9 kPa) should be adequate. This will help in the
removal of the oil from the compressor sump. Dispose of • Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti-
contaminated oil as per local codes and regulations. freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.
3. Replace failed compressor as outlined under compressor • Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.
replacement procedure. • Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop,
4. Recharge the circuit with fresh oil. The circuit oil charge replace as necessary.
information is supplied in the 30RB Installation Instructions. • Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.
Oil level should be approximately 7/8 sight glass. • Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.
5. Install activated carbon (burnout) filter drier/core. • Check pump heater operation, if equipped.
6. Leak check, evacuate and recharge refrigerant circuit.
• Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they are
7. Operate compressors. Check filter drier pressure drop period- securely fastened to the motor shaft.
ically. Replace cores if pressure drop exceeds 4 psig
(27.6 kPa). • Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components.
Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled Water
Perform additional acid test after 24 hours of operation. Change Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) which may indi-
liquid line filter drier/core if necessary. Replace with standard fil- cate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if necessary.
ter drier/core once circuit is clean. Use the Carrier Standard Ser-
vice Techniques Manual as a reference source.
TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE See Table 45 for an abbreviated list of symptoms, possible causes
and possible remedies.
Recommended Maintenance Schedule
The following are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite condi- Alarms and Alerts
tions may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more of- The integral control system constantly monitors the unit and gen-
ten than recommended. erates warnings when abnormal or fault conditions occur. Alarms
Routine: may cause either a circuit (Alert) or the whole machine (Alarm) to
shutdown. Alarms and Alerts are assigned codes as described in
For machines with e-coat condenser coils: Fig. 34. The alarm/alert indicator LED on the scrolling marquee or
• Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and indus- Navigator™ module is illuminated when any alarm or alert condi-
trial applications. tion is present. If an Alert is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will
Every month: blink. If an Alarm is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will remain
• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary fol- on. Currently active Alerts and Alarms can be found in Alarms
lowing recommended guidelines. ALRMALM1 to ALM5.
• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refriger- The controller generates two types of alarms. Automatic reset
ant loss and presence of moisture. alarms will reset without any intervention if the condition that
caused the alarm corrects itself. Manual reset alarms require the
Every 3 months (for all machines): service technician to check for the alarm cause and reset the alarm.
• Check refrigerant charge. The following method must be followed to reset manual alarms:
• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks, Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the alarm
repair as necessary. and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the LED on the
• Check chilled water flow switch operation. side of the scrolling marquee display. Press ENTER and sub-
• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary fol- mode AlarmR.ALM (Reset All Current Alarms) is displayed.
lowing recommended guidelines. Press ENTER . The control will prompt the user for a password,
• Check sight glass moisture indicator for moisture. by displaying PASS and WORD. Press ENTER to display 1111.
• Check all condenser fans for proper operation.
Press ENTER for each character. The default password is 0111.
• Check compressor oil level. Use the arrow keys to change each individual character. Use the up
• Check crankcase heater operation. or down arrow keys to toggle the display to YES and press
• Inspect pump seal, if equipped with a hydronic pump ENTER . The alarms will be reset. Indicator light will be turned
package. off when switched correctly. Do not reset the chiller at random with-
out first investigating and correcting the cause(s) of the failure.
Each alarm is described by a three or four-digit code. The first one
or two digits indicate the alarm source and are listed below. The
last two digits pinpoint the problem. See Tables 46 and 47.
60
Table 45 — Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE REMEDY
Unit Does Not Run • Check overcurrent protection device.
Check for power to unit • Check non-fused disconnect (if equipped).
• Restore power to unit.
Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant.
Wrong or incorrect unit configuration Check unit configuration.
Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting
Active alarm instructions.
Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow
Active operating mode troubleshooting instructions. Check capacity control overrides.
Unit Operates Too Long or Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant.
Continuously Compressor or control contacts welded Replace contactor or relay.
Air in chilled water loop Purge water loop.
Non-condensables in refrigerant circuit. Remove refrigerant and recharge.
• Check EXV, clean or replace.
Inoperative EXV • Check EXV cable, replace if necessary.
• Check EXV board for output signal.
Circuit Does Not Run Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting
Active operating mode troubleshooting instructions.
Circuit Does Not Load Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting
Low saturated suction temperature See Operating Modes 21, 22 and 23.
The circuit capacity is not allowed increase if circuit superheat is greater
High circuit suction superheat than 36°F (20°C). See Alarms P.08, P.09 and P.10 for potential causes.
The circuit capacity is not allowed to increase if the circuit superheat is
Low suction superheat less than 5°F (2.8°C). See Alarms P.11, P.12 and P.13 for potential
causes.
Compressor Does Not Run Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting
instructions.
• Check control wiring.
Inoperative compressor contactor • Check scroll protection module.
• Check contactor operation, replace if necessary.
Chilled Water Pump is ON, Cooler freeze protection Chilled water loop temperature too low. Check cooler heater.
but the Machine is OFF
61
Table 46 — Alarm Codes
PREFIX SUFFIX ACTION TAKEN RESET
DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM PROBABLE CAUSE
CODE CODE BY CONTROL TYPE
Compressor failure,
Compressor Motor Circuit shut down
Compressor nn Motor wiring error, operation
.01 Sensor PTC resistance or not allowed to Manual
Temperature Too High outside of limits, improper
is greater than 4.5k  start refrigerant charge
Crankcase heater
current not detected when Compressor shut Wiring error, failed
Compressor nn Crankcase
.02 required or detected when down or not Manual crankcase heater,
Heater Failure allowed to start failed SPM.
not required.
A1 Wiring error, closed/
A2 restricted discharge valve,
A3 improper
A4 Circuit shut down
Compressor nn High Pressure High Pressure Switch refrigerant charge,
B1 .03 or not allowed to Manual
Switch open. dirty condenser coils,
B2 start failed outdoor fan motor,
B3 discharge pressure
B4 transducer inaccuracy
C1
C2 Wiring error, operation
Compressor Motor
C3 Circuit shut down outside of limits,
Compressor nn Motor Sensor Sensor PTC resistance
.04 is less than 50 or greater or
C4 not allowed to Manual compressor failure,
PTC Out of Range start improper refrigerant
than 17k . charge
24-VAC power lost to SPM Compressor shut Low voltage from main
.05 Compressor nn Power Reset down or not Automatic
board. power supply.
allowed to start
Compressor shut
Compressor nn Low Control 24-VAC power to SPM Low voltage from main
.06 down or not Automatic
Voltage Alert board too low. power supply.
allowed to start
Loss of Communication with
.A1 Compressor Board A1
.B1 Compressor Board B1
Loss of Communication with Wrong SPM address,
.B2 Affected
Compressor Board B2 No communication with wrong unit configuration,
compressor is Automatic
Loss of Communication with SPM wiring error, power loss to
.B3 shut down
Compressor Board B3 SPM.
.B4 Compressor Board B4
.C1 Compressor Board C1
Co .C4 Compressor Board C4
Circuit A & B shut
Loss of Communication with No communication with
.E1 down or not Wrong module address,
EXV Board Number 1 EXV1 allowed to start wrong unit configuration,
Automatic
Circuit C shut wiring error, power loss to
Loss of Communication with No communication with module
.E2 down or not
EXV Board Number 2 EXV2 allowed to start
Circuit A & B shut
down or not
allowed to start
(060-150,
Loss of Communication with Fan No communication with 210-250)
.F1 Board Number 1 Fan Board 1 Circuit A shut
down or not
allowed to start
(160-190, Wrong module address,
275-300) wrong unit configuration,
Automatic wiring error, power loss to
Circuit B shut module
down or not
Loss of Communication with Fan No communication with
.F2 allowed to start
Board Number 2 Fan Board 2 (160-190,
275-300)
Circuit C shut
Loss of Communication with Fan No communication with down or not
.F3 Board Number 3 Fan Board 3 allowed to start
(210-300)
62
Table 46 — Alarm Codes (cont)
.O1 Free Cooling Board Free Cooling Board
None Automatic Configuration error.
.O2 Electrical Heaters Board Electrical Heaters Board
Disable or not
allow EMM
Functions
(3-Step and Wrong module address,
No communication with 4-20 mA Demand
Co Loss of Communication with wrong unit configuration,
.O3 Energy Management Limit, 4-20 mA and Automatic
Energy Management Board wiring error, power loss to
Board Space module
Temperature
Reset, Occupancy
Override, and Ice
Build)
Wrong module address,
Unit shall return to
Loss of Communication with No communication with wrong unit configuration,
.O4 the standard air Automatic
Heat Reclaim Board Heat Reclaim Board wiring error, power loss to
cooled mode module
EXV, fan control,
and pump operate
as normal to save
Controls determine One or more circuit
Circuit A Welded Contactor compressor is still running compressor until
.01 Manual compressor contactors
Failure when circuit should be off high pressure, welded closed.
freeze, or flow
failure conditions
occur
EXV, fan control,
and pump operate
as normal to save
Circuit B Welded Contactor compressor is still running compressor until
Ct .02 Manual compressor contactors
freeze, or flow
failure conditions
occur
EXV, fan control,
and pump operate
as normal to save
Circuit C Welded Contactor compressor is still running compressor until
.03 Manual compressor contactors
freeze, or flow
failure conditions
occur
Configuration error.
Initial Factory Configuration Unit not allowed to Automatic
.n0 No configuration Password may default to
Required start
FC 0113.
Wrong or incompatible Unit not allowed to
.nn Illegal Configuration Automatic Configuration error.
configuration data start
Unit not allowed to
Master Chiller Configuration Wrong or incompatible Configuration error. Refer
MC .nn start in Master- Automatic
Error configuration data to Table 49.
Slave Control
Unit shut down or Automatic, first
Entering or Leaving Faulty thermistor, faulty
not allowed to occurrence in 24
Water Exchanger Freeze Thermistor sensed a wiring, low water flow rate,
.01 start. Chilled Water hours, Manual, if
Protection temperature at or below low loop volume, or freeze
Pump will be multiple alarms
freeze point. conditions.
started within 24 hours
Circuit A Low Suction

.05 Automatic, first
Temperature Faulty transducer, faulty
occurrence in
Low Saturated Suction wiring, low water flow rate,
24 hours,
Circuit B Low Suction Temperatures sensed for Circuit shut down low loop volume, fouled
.06 Manual, if
Temperature a period of time. cooler, or freeze
multiple alarms conditions.
within 24 hours
Circuit C Low Suction
.07 Temperature
P
.08 Circuit A High Superheat Faulty transducer, faulty
EXV>98%, Suction thermistor, faulty wiring,
Superheat >54°F (30.0°C) Circuit shut down Manual faulty EXV, low refrigerant
.09 Circuit B High Superheat and SST<MOP for more charge, plugged or
than 5 minutes
.10 Circuit C High Superheat restricted liquid line.
.11 Circuit A Low Superheat EXV 5% and Suction Automatic, first
Superheat is less than the occurrence in Faulty transducer, faulty
superheat setting by at 24 hours, thermistor, faulty wiring,
least 5°F (2.8°C) or Circuit shut down
.12 Circuit B Low Superheat Manual, if faulty EXV, or incorrect
SST>Maximum Operating multiple alarms configuration.
Pressure for more than 5 within 24 hours
minutes
.13 Circuit C Low Superheat
63
Low Water Flow, faulty
Cooler Pump Interlock wiring or contacts, faulty
Automatic if
circuit opens (consists of water flow switch, or
Unit shut down or stage=0,
.14 Cooler Interlock Failure chilled water flow system chilled water pump
not allowed to start Manual if
and chilled water pump problem. Remote lockout if
stage>0.
interlock) unit is equipped with an
EMM.
.15 Condenser Flow Switch Failure — None Manual Configuration error.
Compressor A1 Not Started or
.16 Pressure not Established
Compressor B1 Not Started or No power to the
.20 Pressure not Established compressor, faulty
Compressor B2 Not Started or compressor contactor, low
.21 Compressor differential
Pressure not Established control voltage, faulty
(Discharge-Suction) did
not increase by 10 psig (69 Circuit shut down Manual discharge or suction
Compressor B3 Not Started or pressure
.22 kPa) in 2 minutes
Pressure not Established transducers, wiring
Compressor B4 Not Started or error, improper electrical
.23 phasing.
Pressure not Established
Compressor C1 Not Started or
Improper phasing detected Check power phasing,
Electrical Box Thermostat Unit not allowed to Automatic
.28 by the reverse rotation improper wiring, or faulty
Failure start
board detection board.
P
Loss of communication Unit changes to Faulty communication
Loss of Communication with with an external control
.29 stand alone Automatic wiring, no power supply to
System Manager device for more than operation the external controller.
2 minutes
Faulty communication
Communication between Units operate as
Master/Slave Communication wiring, no power or control
.30 the master and slave stand alone Automatic
Failure power to the main base
machines has been lost. machines board to either module.
Emergency Stop Unit shuts down or Carrier Comfort Network®
.31 Unit is in Emergency Stop command has been not allowed to Automatic Emergency Stop
received. start. Command received.
.32 Cooler Pump 1 Fault

Pump Interlock status Unit shuts down. If Faulty contacts, wiring
does not match pump available, another Manual error, or low control
status. pump will start. voltage.
.33 Cooler Pump 2 Fault
Circuit A Reclaim Operation Circuit A Reclaim The affected

.34 Reclaim operation
Failure Operation Failure circuit shall
failure due to high Manual
Circuit B Reclaim Operation Circuit B Reclaim return to air
.35 SCT
Failure Operation Failure cooled mode
Circuit A Repeated High Condenser air
.37 Discharge Gas Overrides Multiple capacity recirculation, dirty or
Circuit B Repeated High overrides due to high plugged condenser coils,
.38 Circuit shut down Automatic
Discharge Gas Overrides saturated discharge inaccurate discharge
Circuit C Repeated High temperatures transducer, faulty
.39 condenser fan,
Discharge Gas Overrides
Circuit A Repeated Low
.40 Low water flow, low loop
Suction Temperature Overrides
Multiple capacity overrides volume, fouled cooler, low
Circuit B Repeated Low
.41 due to low saturated Circuit shut down Manual refrigerant charge, unit not
Suction Temperature Overrides suction temperatures configured for brine with
Circuit C Repeated Low glycol in cooler.
.42 Suction Temperature Overrides
Water Exchanger Temperature Control detects EWT Wiring error. EWT and
.97 Unit shuts down Manual
Sensors Swapped below LWT for 1 minute LWT sensors swapped.
64
.01 Circuit A Discharge Transducer
.02 Circuit B Discharge Transducer Faulty transducer, wiring
.03 Circuit C Discharge Transducer Circuit shut down error, failed Main Base
or not allowed to Automatic Board or Fan Board 3.
.04 Circuit A Suction Transducer start. Compressor circuit
.05 Circuit B Suction Transducer Measured voltage is breaker tripped.
Pr 0 vdc
.06 Circuit C Suction Transducer
Circuit A Reclaim Pumpdown
.07 The affected circuit Faulty transducer, wiring
Pressure Transducer
shall return to air Automatic error, failed EMM HR
Circuit B Reclaim Pumpdown cooled mode board.
.08 Pressure Transducer
Field programmed elapsed Maintenance required
Sr .nn Service Maintenance Alert time has expired for None Manual (see Table 50).
maintenance item
Water Exchanger Entering Fluid
.01 Unit will be shut Faulty thermistor, wiring
Thermistor Failure
down or not Automatic error, failed Main Base
Water Exchanger Leaving Fluid allowed to start. Board.
.02 Thermistor Failure
Circuit A Defrost Thermistor
.03 Failure
None Automatic Configuration error.
Circuit B Defrost Thermistor
.04 Failure
Unit shall return to
Reclaim Condenser Entering
.08 Temperature measured by the standard air Faulty thermistor, wiring
Thermistor
the controller is less than – cooled mode. Automatic error, failed EMM HR
Reclaim Condenser Leaving 40°F (–40°C) or greater board.
.09 than 240°F None
Thermistor
(115.6°C) Unit is shut down
or not allowed to
.10 OAT Thermistor Failure start. Cooler/Pump
heaters are
energized Faulty thermistor, wiring
Dual Chiller Automatic error, failed Main Base
th deactivated. Board.
Master/Slave Common Fluid Master and Slave
.11 Thermistor machines operate
in stand alone
mode
Circuit A Suction Gas
.12 Circuit shut down
Thermistor
Faulty thermistor, wiring
Circuit B Suction Gas
.13 Circuit shut down Automatic error, failed Main Base
Thermistor Board or EXV Board
Circuit C Suction Gas
.14 Circuit shut down
Thermistor Temperature measured by
Circuit A Condenser Subcooling the controller is less than –
.18 40°F (–40°C) or greater Unit shall return to Faulty thermistor, wiring
Liquid Thermistor
than 240°F the standard air error, failed EMM HR
Circuit B Condenser Subcooling (115.6°C) cooled mode. board.
.19 Liquid Thermistor
Temperature Automatic
Reset based on Faulty thermistor, wiring
Space Temperature Sensor
.21 Space error, failed Main Base
Failure Temperature Board.
disabled
Circuit A Variable Speed Fan
V0 xx Motor Failure See Table 47 — Variable Alert—No action See Table 47 — Variable
Circuit B Variable Speed Fan Speed Fan Motor Alarm
V1 xx Alarm—Circuit is Automatic Speed Fan Motor Alarm
Motor Failure Details on page 66 stopped Details on page 66.
Circuit C Variable Speed Fan Danfoss drive only.
V2 xx Motor Failure
LEGEND
EMM — Energy Management Module OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature
EWT — Entering Water Temperature PTC — Positive Temperature Coefficient
EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature
HR — Heat Reclaim SPM — Scroll Protection Module
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature
MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure
65
Table 47 — Variable Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details, Danfoss Drive
ALARM/ ALARM/ PARAMETER
NO. DESCRIPTION WARNING TRIP TRIP LOCK REFERENCE
1 10 Volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01
3 No motor (X) 1-80
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC over voltage X X
8 DC under voltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
11 Motor thermistor over temperature (X) (X) 1-90
12 Torque limit X X
13 Over current X X X
14 Earth fault X X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short circuit X X
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04
18 Start failed X
23 Internal fan fault X
24 External fan fault X 14-53
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15
29 Drive over temperature X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
33 Inrush fault X X
34 Field bus communication fault X X
35 Out of frequency range X X
36 Mains failure X X
37 Phase imbalance X X
38 Internal fault X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) 5-00, 5-01
41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) 5-00, 5-02
42 Overload of Digital Output Terminal On X30/6 (X) 5-32
42 Overload of Digital Output Terminal On X30/7 (X) 5-33
46 Power card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X (X) 1-86
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA parameter out of range X
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA timeout X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
60 External Interlock X
NOTES: 3. If a warning and an alarm are marked against a code in the table,
1. (X) = Dependent on parameter this means that either a warning occurs before the alarm, or it can
2. Trip lock condition is an alarm for a condition that could cause be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be dis-
damage to the drive. The alarm can only be reset by cycling power played for a given fault.
to the drive. 4. Alarms are shown on the drive in parameters 16-90 through 16-95.
Parameters can only be accessed with drive display service tool.
66
Table 47 — Variable Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details, Danfoss Drive (cont)
ALARM/ ALARM/ PARAMETER
NO. DESCRIPTION WARNING TRIP TRIP LOCK REFERENCE
62 Output frequency at maximum limit X
64 Voltage limit X
65 Control board over-temperature X X X
66 Heat sink temperature low X
67 Option configuration has changed X
69 Power card temperature X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X X
72 Dangerous failure X
73 Safe stop auto restart
76 Power unit setup X
79 Illegal PS configuration X X
80 Drive initialized to default value X
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X
92 NoFlow X X 22-2
93 Dry pump X X 22-2
94 End of curve X X 22-5
95 Broken belt X X 22-6
96 Start delayed X 22-7
97 Stop delayed X 22-7
98 Clock fault X 0-7
201 Fire M was active
202 Fire M limits exceeded
203 Missing motor
204 Locked rotor
243 Brake IGBT X X
244 Heatsink temperature X X X
245 Heatsink sensor X X
246 Power card supply X X
247 Power card temperature X X
248 Illegal PS configuration X X
NOTES: 3. If a warning and an alarm are marked against a code in the table,
1. (X) = Dependent on parameter this means that either a warning occurs before the alarm, or it can
2. Trip lock condition is an alarm for a condition that could cause be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be dis-
damage to the drive. The alarm can only be reset by cycling power played for a given fault.
to the drive. 4. Alarms are shown on the drive in parameters 16-90 through 16-95.
Parameters can only be accessed with drive display service tool.
67
Alarm • Check the EXV input devices, pressure transducer and
Alarm Descriptor th .01
temperature for accuracy.
Alarm Prefix • Check the liquid line filter drier for a restriction.
A1 – Compressor A1 Failure Crankcase Heater Failure
A2 – Compressor A2 Failure
A3 – Compressor A3 Failure A1.02 — Compressor A1
A4 – Compressor A4 Failure A2.02 — Compressor A2
B1 – Compressor B1 Failure A3.02 — Compressor A3
B2 – Compressor B2 Failure A4.02 — Compressor A4
B3 – Compressor B3 Failure B1.02 — Compressor B1
B4 – Compressor B4 Failure B2.02 — Compressor B2
C1 – Compressor C1 Failure B3.02 — Compressor B3
C2 – Compressor C2 Failure
C3 – Compressor C3 Failure
B4.02 — Compressor B4
C4 – Compressor C4 Failure C1.02 — Compressor C1
Co – Communication Failure C2.02 — Compressor C2
Ct – Circuit Welded Contactor Failure C3.02 — Compressor C3
FC – Factory Configuration Error C4.02 — Compressor C4
MC – Master Chiller Configuration Error Criteria for Trip
P – Process Failure
Pr – Pressure Transducer Failure The alarm criteria are checked whether the compressor is ON or
Sr – Service Notification OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors crankcase
th – Thermistor Failure heater current draw. This family of alarms is generated if one of
V0 – Circuit A Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure the following criteria is detected:
V1 – Circuit B Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure
V2 – Circuit C Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure
1. The SPM fails to detect a crankcase current draw of at least
0.5 amp while the crankcase heater is ON.
Alarm Suffix 2. The SPM detects a crankcase current draw of at least 0.5 amp
Code Number to identify source while the crankcase heater is OFF. The current is sensed inter-
nally on the SPM.
Fig. 34 — Alarm Description Action to be Taken
DIAGNOSTIC ALARM CODES AND POSSIBLE CAUSES If a fault is detected, the affected compressor will be shut down or
Motor Temperature Too High not allowed to start.
A1.01 — Compressor A1 Reset Method
A2.01 — Compressor A2 Manual
A3.01 — Compressor A3 Possible Causes
A4.01 — Compressor A4
B1.01 — Compressor B1 If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
B2.01 — Compressor B2 • Check the wiring to the crankcase heater.
B3.01 — Compressor B3 • Check the crankcase heater for operation.
B4.01 — Compressor B4 • Check the SPM crankcase heater output operation.
C1.01 — Compressor C1
C2.01 — Compressor C2 • Confirm unit configuration.
C3.01 — Compressor C3 High Pressure Switch
C4.01 — Compressor C4 A1.03 — Compressor A1
Criteria for Trip A2.03 — Compressor A2
The alarm criterion is checked whether the compressor is ON or A3.03 — Compressor A3
OFF. This alarm will be generated if the scroll protection module A4.03 — Compressor A4
(SPM) detects a compressor motor PTC (positive temperature co- B1.03 — Compressor B1
efficient) resistance greater than 4500 ohms, indicating that the B2.03 — Compressor B2
motor temperature is too high. B3.03 — Compressor B3
Action to be Taken C1.03 — Compressor C1
The circuit shuts down immediately or is not allowed to start. C2.03 — Compressor C2
Reset Method C3.03 — Compressor C3
Manual. PTC resistance must be less than 2500 ohms C4.03 — Compressor C4
Possible Causes Criteria for Trip
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: The alarm criterion is checked whether the circuit is ON or OFF.
This alarm will be generated if the circuit high-pressure switch
• Check for a PTC thermistor failure. (HPS) opens. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the
• Check for a compressor motor failure. HPS. The 30RB units employ one HPS for each circuit. The HPS
• Check for a wiring error. signal is connected to all of the SPM modules of the circuit.
• Check wiring terminations for corrosion. Action to be Taken
• Check for operation outside of the limits. The circuit shuts down immediately or is not allowed to start.
• Check for condenser air recirculation. Reset Method
• Check the circuit for proper charge. Manual
• Check the EXV for proper operation.
68
Possible Causes SPM Board Power Reset
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: A1.05 – Compressor A1
• Check the wiring of the high pressure switch circuit. Be sure A2.05 – Compressor A2
the HPS is connected to all of the SPM boards in the circuit. A3.05 – Compressor A3
A4.05 – Compressor A4
• Check the maximum condensing temperature (MCT) for B1.05 – Compressor B1
the proper setting. B2.05 – Compressor B2
• Check for non-condensables in the refrigerant circuit. B3.05 – Compressor B3
• Check for condenser air re-circulation. B4.05 – Compressor B4
C1.05 – Compressor C1
• Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged). C2.05 – Compressor C2
• Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine. C3.05 – Compressor C3
• Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction. C4.05 – Compressor C4
• Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation Criteria for Trip
and operation. The alarm criterion is checked whether the compressor is ON or
• Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open. A OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the 24 vac at
closed or restricted valve is a potential high pressure trip. the compressor through the high pressure switch input channel.
• Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy. This alarm will be generated if the main base board receives a sig-
nal from the SPM board indicating that the compressor went
• Confirm unit configuration. through a power cycle.
Motor Sensor PTC Out of Range Action to be Taken
A1.04 — Compressor A1 The compressor is shut down immediately or not allowed to start.
A2.04 — Compressor A2
A3.04 — Compressor A3 Reset Method
A4.04 — Compressor A4 Automatic
B1.04 — Compressor B1 Possible Causes
B2.04 — Compressor B2 If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
B4.04 — Compressor B4 • Check the voltage from the main three phase power supply.
C1.04 — Compressor C1 • Check the 24 vac wiring connections to the scroll com-
C2.04 — Compressor C2 pressor protection module (SPM).
C3.04 — Compressor C3 • Check for a faulty SPM.
C4.04 — Compressor C4
SPM Board Low Control Voltage Alert
Criteria for Trip
A1.06 – Compressor A1
The alarm criterion is checked whether the circuit is ON or OFF. A2.06 – Compressor A2
The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the compressor mo- A3.06 – Compressor A3
tor temperature. This alarm will be generated if the motor sensor A4.06 – Compressor A4
PTC in the compressor resistance is less than 50 ohms or greater B1.06 – Compressor B1
than 17,000 ohms. B2.06 – Compressor B2
Action to be Taken B3.06 – Compressor B3
The circuit shuts down immediately or not allowed to start. B4.06 – Compressor B4
Reset Method C1.06 – Compressor C1
C2.06 – Compressor C2
Manual C3.06 – Compressor C3
Possible Causes C4.06 – Compressor C4
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Criteria for Trip
• Check the sensor wiring to the scroll compressor protec- The alarm criterion is checked whether the compressor is ON or
tion module (SPM). OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the 24 vac at
• Check for a faulty SPM. the compressor through the high pressure switch input channel.
This alarm will be generated if the main base board receives a sig-
• Check for a compressor failure. nal from the SPM board indicating that the 24 vac level was lower
• Check for noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit. than the allowed minimum threshold.
• Check for condenser air re-circulation. Action to be Taken
• Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged). The compressor is shut down immediately or not allowed to start
• Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine. as to prevent any contactor chattering/welding from occurring.
• Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction. Reset Method
• Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation Automatic
and operation. Possible Causes
• Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open. If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
• Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy. • Check the voltage from the main three phase power supply.
• Confirm unit configuration. • Check the 24 vac wiring connections to the scroll com-
pressor protection module (SPM).
• Check for a faulty SPM.
69
Loss of Communication with Compressor Possible Causes
Co.A1 — Board A1 If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
Co.A2 — Board A2 • Check the power supply to EXV Board 2.
Co.A3 — Board A3
Co.A4 — Board A4 • Check the address of the EXV Board 2 to be sure that it is
Co.B1 — Board B1 correct.
Co.B2 — Board B2 • Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be sure
Co.B3 — Board B3 that it is connected properly.
Co.B4 — Board B4 • Confirm unit configuration.
Co.C1 — Board C1
Co.C2 — Board C2 Co.F1 — Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 1
Co.C3 — Board C3 Criteria for Trip
Co.C4 — Board C4 The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. If communi-
Criteria for Trip cation with Fan Board 1 is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the
The alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. If alarm will be triggered.
communication with the scroll compressor protection module Action to be Taken
(SPM) is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be For 30RB060-150 and 30RB210-250, Circuit A and B will shut
generated. down normally if they are running. For 30RB160-190 and
Action to be Taken 30RB275-300, Circuit A will shut down normally if it is running.
The affected compressor will be shut down. If the circuit or circuits controlled by the board are not running,
then they will not be allowed to start.
Reset Method
Reset Method
Automatic, if communication is established, the compressor, if Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start
called for will start normally. normally.
Possible Causes Possible Causes
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
• Check the power supply to the affected SPM. • Check the power supply to Fan Board 1.
• Check the address of the SPM to be sure that it is correct. • Check the address of the Fan Board 1 to be sure that it is
• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be correct.
sure that it is connected properly. • Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be
• Confirm unit configuration. sure that it is connected properly.
Co.E1— Loss of Communication with EXV Board Number 1 • Confirm unit configuration.
Criteria for Trip Co.F2 — Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 2
The alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. If Criteria for Trip
communication with EXV1 is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and on
alarm will be triggered. 30RB160-190, 275, and 300 only.
Action to be Taken Action to be Taken
If running, Circuit A and B will shut down normally. If Circuit A If communication with Fan Board 2 is lost for a period of 10 sec-
or Circuit B is not operating, it will not be allowed to start. onds, the alarm will be triggered. If running, Circuit B will shut
Reset Method down normally for 30RB160-190, 275 and 300. If Circuit B is not
Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start running for 30RB160-190, 275 and 300, then it will not be al-
normally. lowed to start.
Possible Causes Reset Method
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start nor-
• Check the power supply to EXV1. mally.
• Check the address of the EXV1 to be sure that it is correct. Possible Causes
• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
sure that it is connected properly. • Check the power supply to Fan Board 2.
• Confirm unit configuration. • Check the address of the Fan Board 2 to be sure that it is
Co.E2 — Loss of Communication with EXV Board correct.
Number 2 • Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be
Criteria for Trip sure that it is connected properly.
The alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF, on • Confirm unit configuration.
30RB210-300 units only. Co.F3 — Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 3
Action to be Taken Criteria for Trip
If communication with EXV Board 2 is lost for a period of 10 sec- The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF, and on
onds, the alarm will be triggered. If running, Circuit C will shut 30RB210-300 machines only. If communication with Fan Board 3
down normally. If Circuit C is not running, it will not be allowed is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered.
to start. Action to be Taken
Reset Method If running, Circuit C will shut down normally for 30RB210-300.
Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start If the circuit is not running for 30RB210-300, then it will not be
normally. allowed to start.
70
Reset Method • Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be
Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start nor- sure that it is connected properly.
mally. • Check unit configuration to be sure that no options that re-
Possible Causes quire the EMM are enabled.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Co.O4 — Loss of Communication with Heat Reclaim Board
• Check the power supply to Fan Board 3. Criteria for Trip
• Check the address of the Fan Board 3 to be sure that it is This alarm is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and when the
correct. unit is configured for Heat Reclaim. If communication with the
heat reclaim board is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will
• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be be triggered.
sure that it is connected properly.
Action to be Taken
• Confirm unit configuration.
The unit will return to the air cooled mode.
Co.O1 — Loss of Communication with Free Cooling Board
Reset Method
Criteria for Trip
Automatic, when communication is established, the functions will
This alarm is for a free cooling machine only. This feature is not be enabled.
supported for a cooling only machine.
Possible Causes
Action to be Taken
If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
None
• Check the power supply to heat reclaim board.
Reset Method
• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be
Automatic sure that it is connected properly.
Possible Causes • Check unit configuration to be sure that Heat Reclaim is en-
If this condition is encountered, confirm unit configuration. abled and unit does NOT contain the Heat Reclaim option.
Co.O2 — Loss of Communication with Electrical Heaters Welded Contactor Failure
Board Ct.01 – Circuit A
Criteria for Trip Ct.02 – Circuit B
This alarm is for a heat pump machines only. This feature is not Ct.03 – Circuit C
supported for a cooling only machine. Criteria For Trip
Action to be Taken This alarm is tested for when the circuit is off (all compressors
None switched to off). The algorithm will evaluate saturated suction and
Reset Method saturated condensing temperatures to determine if the compressor
is still running even though it has been commanded off.
Automatic
Action to be Taken
Possible Causes 1. Unit capacity will go to and remain at 0%. The EXV, fan con-
If this condition is encountered, confirm unit configuration. trol, and cooler pump will continue their normal operation.
Co.O3 — Loss of Communication with Energy Management 2. If a high pressure, cooler flow, or cooler freeze failure occurs,
Board then circuit operation is disabled. The critical alarm relay will
Criteria for Trip be energized in order to shut off the main power supply.
The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and when a Reset Method
function that requires the energy management module (EMM) is Reset is manual.
configured. If communication with the EMM is lost for a period of
10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. FC.n0 — Initial Factory Configuration Required
If any function controlled by the EMM (3-Step and 4-20 mA De- The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. The alarm
mand Limit, 4-20 mA and Space Temperature Reset, Occupancy will be generated if Configuration UNITTONS=0.
Override, and Ice Build) is active, that function will be terminated. Action to be Taken
If an EMM function is programmed, and communication is lost, The unit is not allowed to start.
the function will not be allowed to start.
Reset Method
Reset Method
Automatic after factory configuration is complete. The configura-
Automatic, if communication is established, the functions will be tion must be manually completed. The password may default to
enabled. 0113.
Possible Causes Possible Causes
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: If this condition is encountered, confirm the unit configuration.
• Check configuration to see if the EMM is installed, (Con- FC.nn — Illegal Configuration
figurationUNITEMM). If (EMM=YES), check for a
control option that requires the EMM that may be enabled. Criteria for Trip
Correct configuration if not correct. The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. The alarm
• Check the power supply to EMM. will be generated if the one of the following configuration errors is
detected by the control. The “nn” refers to the error code listed in
• Check the address of the EMM to be sure that it is correct. Table 48.
71
Table 48 — Illegal Configuration Alarm Code • Check loop volume. Low loop volume at nominal flow
rates can in extreme cases bypass cold water to the cooler.
FC • Check for freezing conditions.
ERROR DESCRIPTION
CODE • Check heater tape and other freeze protection items for
01 Unit size is unknown. proper operation.
02 Reclaim option selected for Heat Pump machine. • Check glycol concentration and adjust LOSP accordingly.
Hot Gas Bypass configured for a Heat Pump • If the Leaving Water Set Point is above 40°F (4.4°C) and
03 machine.
there is glycol in the loop, consider using the Medium
Number of Fans controlled by Motormaster® control is
04 greater than expected. Temperature Brine option (Configuration
SERVFLUD=2) to utilize the brine freeze point in-
Action to be Taken stead of 34°F (1.1°C).
The unit is not allowed to start. Low Suction Temperature
Reset Method P.05 — Circuit A
P.06 — Circuit B
Automatic after factory reconfiguration is completed. A power cy- P.07 — Circuit C
cle may be required.
Criteria for Trip
Possible Causes
The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON. This alarm is gen-
If this condition is encountered, confirm the unit configuration. erated if one of the following criteria is met:
MC.nn — Master Chiller Configuration Error • If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below –13°F
Criteria for Trip (–25°C) for more than 30 seconds.
The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. The units • If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below –22°F
must be configured as a Master and Slave machine (Configura- (–30°C) for more than 8 seconds.
tionRSETMSSL=1 and ConfigurationRSETMS- • If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below –40°F
SL=2), and one of the following configuration errors has been (–40°C) for more than 3 seconds.
found. The “nn” refers to the error code listed in Table 49.
Action to be Taken
Action to be Taken
The circuit is shut down immediately.Prior to the alarm trip, the
Unit not allowed to start in Master Slave control. control will take action to avoid the alarm. See Operating Modes
Reset Method 21, 22 and 23 on page 47.
Automatic Reset Method
Possible Causes Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours. Manual, if more than one
If this condition is encountered, confirm proper configuration. occurrence in 24 hours.
P.01 — Water Exchanger Freeze Protection Possible Causes
Criteria for Trip If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
The alarm criteria are checked whether the unit is ON or OFF. If • Check the sensor wiring to Main Base Board (P.05 and
the entering or leaving water thermistor senses a temperature at P.06) or Fan Board 3 (P.07).
the freeze point or less, the alarm will be generated. For a fresh • Check the board for a faulty channel.
water system (Configuration SERVFLUD=1), the freeze • Check for a faulty transducer.
point is 34°F (1.1°C). For medium temperature brine systems
(Configuration SERVFLUD=2), the freeze point is Brine • Check cooler water flow.
Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP). • Check loop volume.
Action to be Taken • Check EXV operation.
Unit shut down or not allowed to start. Chilled water pump will be • Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier,
started. service valve, etc.
Reset Method • Check the refrigerant charge.
Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours if LWT rises to 6°F (3°C) • If the Leaving Water Set Point is above 40°F (4.4°C) and
above set point. Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours. there is glycol in the loop, consider using the Medium
Possible Causes Temperature Brine option (Configuration
SERVFLUD=2) to utilize the brine freeze point instead
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: of 34°F (1.1°C).
• Check the entering and leaving fluid thermistors for accuracy.
• Check the water flow rate.
72
Table 49 — Master/Slave Alarm Code
MC
ERROR MASTER SLAVE DESCRIPTION
CODE
The master or slave water pump is not configured while the control of the lag unit pump is required
01 X X (lag_pump = 1)
02 X Master and slave units have the same network address.
03 X There is no slave configured at the slave address
04 X Slave pump_seq incorrect configuration
There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for EWT control while
05 X the slave is configured for LWT control.
There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for LWT control while
06 X the slave is configured for EWT control.
There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is configured for lag pump control
07 X while the slave is not configured for lag pump control.
There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is not configured for lag pump
08 X control while the slave is configured for lag pump control.
09 X X The slave chiller is in local or remote control (chilstat = 3)
10 X X The slave chiller is down due to fault (chilstat = 5)
11 X The master chiller operating type is not Master: master_oper_typ and master_status = off
12 X X No communication with slave.
13 X Master and slave heat/cool status are not the same.
LEGEND
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature
High Superheat Criteria for Trip

P.08 — Circuit A The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON. This alarm is gen-
P.09 — Circuit B erated if the following criterion is met:
P.10 — Circuit C The EXV position is equal to or less than 5% and the circuit’s Suc-
Criteria for Trip tion Superheat (Suction Gas Temperature – Saturated Suction
The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON. This alarm is gen- Temperature) is less than the Suction Superheat Set Point (Config-
erated if all of the following criteria are met: urationSERVSHP.A, Configuration SERVSHP.B, or
ConfigurationSERVSHP.C) by at least 5°F (2.8°C) or the
1. The EXV position is equal to or greater than 98%. circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is greater than Maximum
2. The circuit’s Suction Superheat (Suction Gas Temperature – Operating Pressure (MOP) set point (ConfigurationSERV
Saturated Suction Temperature) is greater than 54°F MOP) for more than 5 minutes.
(30.0°C). Action to be Taken
3. The circuit’s Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Max-
The circuit is shut down normally.
imum Operating Pressure (MOP) set point (Configura-
tionSERVMOP) for more than 5 minutes. Reset Method
Action to be Taken Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours. Manual, if more than one
occurrence in 24 hours.
The circuit is shut down normally.
Possible Causes
Reset Method
Manual.
• Check the suction pressure transducer wiring to Main Base
Possible Causes Board (P.11 and P.12) or Fan Board 3 (P.13).
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: • Check the board for a faulty channel.
• Check the suction pressure transducer wiring to Main Base • Check for a faulty transducer.
Board (P.08 and P.09) or Fan Board 3 (P.10).
• Check the suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1
• Check the board for a faulty channel. (P.08 and P.09) or to EXV Board 2 (P.10)
• Check for a faulty transducer. • Check the suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy.
• Check the suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1 • Check for EXV Board 1 (P.11 and P.12) or EXV Board 2
(P.08 and P.09) or to EXV Board 2 (P.10) (P.13) faulty channel.
• Check the suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy. • Check EXV operation.
• Check for EXV Board 1 (P.08 and P.09) or EXV Board 2 • Confirm Maximum Operating Pressure Set Point.
(P.10) faulty channel.
• Check the refrigerant charge.
• Check EXV operation.
P.14 — Cooler Interlock Failure
• Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier,
service valve, etc. Criteria for Trip
• Check the refrigerant charge. The criteria are tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. This algo-
rithm monitors the cooler flow switch circuit, which may include
Low Superheat field-installed cooler pump interlock (PMPI) contacts. The pump
P.11 — Circuit A interlock and flow switch are wired in series, therefore either de-
P.12 — Circuit B vice can cause a cooler interlock failure.
P.13 — Circuit C
73
This alarm is generated if one of the following criteria is met: P.24 — Compressor C1
1. The circuit (flow switch and optional pump interlock installed P.25 — Compressor C2
at TB5-1 and 2) fails to close within the OFF to ON delay P.26 — Compressor C3
(ConfigurationOPTNDELY). P.27 — Compressor C4
2. If the unit is the lag chiller under Master/Slave Control and Criteria for Trip
the circuit fails to close within 1 minute after its pump is com- The criteria are tested whether the unit is ON or in Service Test.
manded ON. This algorithm monitors the pressure differential across the com-
3. The circuit opens while the machine is ON. pressor to prove proper rotation of the compressor.
4. If the remote interlock switch is CLOSED while the During normal operation with the start of a compressor, the dis-
machine is ON (units with EMM only). charge pressure for the circuit or the compressor differential
5. If the machine is configured for Cooler Pump Control and the (Discharge Pressure – Suction Pressure) must increase 10 psig
circuit does not open within 2 minutes. (69 kPa) after 2 minutes. If this criterion is not met, the alarm is
generated.
6. The circuit fails to close within the OFF to ON delay
when the cooler pump has been commanded ON for Action to be Taken
freeze protection. The circuit is shut down immediately.
Action to be Taken Reset Method
The unit is shut down immediately, or not allowed to start. Manual
Reset Method Possible Causes
Automatic, if the alarm occurs while the machine is at Stage 0 If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
(no compressors ON). Manual reset if machine was at Stage 1 or • Check for power to the compressor.
greater. • Check control voltage to the compressor contactor. On 208-
Possible Causes volt systems, be sure the proper tap on TRAN1 is utilized.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: • Check for proper electrical phasing of the unit power sup-
• Check the chilled water flow switch operation. ply.
• Check for water flow. Be sure all water isolation valves are • Check the compressor contactor operation.
open. Check the water strainer for a restriction. • Check the discharge and suction pressure transducers for
• Check the interlock wiring circuit. accuracy.
• Check for a power supply to the pump. • Check the wiring and location of the discharge and suction
• Check for a control signal to the pump controller. pressure transducers.
• Check the chilled water pump operation. P.28 — Electrical Box Thermostat Failure/Reverse Rotation
• Check the cooler pump contactor for proper operation. Criteria for Trip
The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON. This alarm is gener-
P.15 — Condenser Flow Switch Failure ated if the signal is open.
Criteria for Trip Action to be Taken
Condenser flow switch has not closed within 1 minute after con- The unit is not allowed to start.
denser pump output has energized or opens during normal opera-
tion. This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only. Reset Method
Action to be Taken Automatic, once the phasing is corrected.
The unit will return to the air cooled mode. Possible Causes
Reset Method If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
Manual. • Check the power wiring for proper phasing.
Possible Causes • Check sensor wiring to reverse rotation protection board.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: P.29 — Loss of Communication with System Manager
• Check the condenser water flow switch operation. Criteria for Trip
• Check for low water flow. Be sure all water isolation The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. This alarm
valves are open. is generated if the System Manager had established communica-
tions with the machine and is lost for more than 2 minutes.
• Check for plugged water strainer.
Action to be Taken
• Check the interlock wiring circuit.
The action to be taken by the control depends on the configura-
• Check the power supply to the pump. tion. If Auto Start when SM lost is enabled, (Configura-
• Check for a control signal to the pump starter. tionSERVAU.SM=YES), then the unit will force the CCN
• Check the condenser water pump operation. Chiller Start Stop (Run Status R.CCNCH.SS) to ENBL and
• Check the condenser pump contactor for proper operation. clear all forced points from the System Manager. The unit will re-
vert to stand-alone operation.
Compressor Not Started or Pressure Not Established
Reset Method
P.16 — Compressor A1
P.17 — Compressor A2 Automatic, once communication is re-established.
P.18 — Compressor A3 Possible Causes
P.19 — Compressor A4 If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
P.20 — Compressor B1 • Check communication wiring.
P.21 — Compressor B2
P.22 — Compressor B3 • Check the power supply to the System Manager and unit
P.23 — Compressor B4 controls.
74
P.30 — Master/Slave Communication Failure Action to be Taken
Criteria for Trip The affected circuit will return to air cooled mode.
The criterion is tested whether the units are ON or OFF and a Reset Method
Master and Slave machine has been configured (Configuration Manual.
RSETMSSL=1 and ConfigurationRSETMSSL=2). If
communication is lost for more than 3 minutes, this alarm is Possible Causes
generated. If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
Action to be Taken • Check for low water flow. Be sure all water isolation
Dual chiller control will be disabled and each unit will operate in valves are open.
Stand-Alone mode. • Check for plugged water strainer.
Reset Method • Check for fouled tubes in reclaim condenser.
Automatic, once communication is re-established. Repeated High Discharge Gas Overrides
Possible Causes P.37 — Circuit A
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: P.38 — Circuit B
P.39 — Circuit C
• Check the CCN wiring.
Criteria for Trip
• Check for control power to each Main Base Board, Master
and Slave. The criterion is tested when the circuit is ON. This alarm will be
tripped if the circuit capacity is reduced more than 8 times in 30
• Confirm correct configuration. minutes due to high discharge gas temperatures. If no override oc-
P.31 — Unit is in Emergency Stop curs in a 30-minute period, the counter is reset.
Criteria for Trip Action to be Taken
The criterion is tested whether the units are ON or OFF and the The affected circuit will be shut down.
machine receives a Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) command Reset Method
for an Emergency Stop.
Automatic, after 30 minutes. If the alarm is cleared via the Manual
Action to be Taken method, the counter will be reset to zero.
Unit will stop, or not allowed to start. Possible Causes
Reset Method If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
Automatic, once a return to normal command is received. • Check the maximum condensing temperature (MCT) for
Possible Causes the proper setting.
If this condition is encountered, check for CCN Emergency Stop • Check for noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit.
command. • Check for condenser air re-circulation.
Cooler Pump Fault • Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged).
P.32 — Pump 1 Fault • Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine.
P.33 — Pump 2 Fault
• Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction.
Criteria for Trip
• Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation
The criterion is tested whether the units are ON or OFF. This and operation.
alarm will be generated if the cooler pump interlock opens. When
starting the pump, the control must read a closed circuit for 3 con- • Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open.
secutive reads. If the pump is operating and the circuit opens, the Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy.
alarm will be generated immediately. • Confirm unit configuration.
Action to be Taken Repeated Low Suction Temperature Overrides
The pump and machine will be shut down. If there is another P.40 – Circuit A
pump available, the control will start that pump, restart the ma- P.41 – Circuit B
chine and clear the alarm. If no other pump is available, the unit P.42 – Circuit C
will remain OFF. Criteria for Trip
Reset Method This alarm was added in software version 1.09. The criterion is ac-
Manual. tive when circuit is ON. If the circuit’s capacity is reduced more
Possible Causes than 6 times by the Capacity Override 23 (Circuit A), 24 (Circuit
B), or 25 (Circuit C) for the respective circuit, without at least 30
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: minutes elapsing between the capacity reductions, the alarm is
• Check the interlock wiring circuit. triggered. If at least 30 minutes elapse without a reduction in ca-
• Check for a control signal to the pump controller. pacity, the counter is reset to zero.
• Check the cooler pump contactor for proper operation. Action to be Taken
• Check control voltage for proper voltage. On 208-volt sys- Circuit shut down.
tems, be sure the proper tap on TRAN1 is utilized. Reset Method
Reclaim Operation Failure Manual.
P.34 — Circuit A Possible Causes
P.35 — Circuit B If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
Criteria for Trip • Confirm unit configuration.
Reclaim operation failure due to high SCT. This alarm is for units • Check EXV operation.
with the heat reclaim option only.
• Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, service valve
partially closed, filter drier with excessive pressure drop.
75
• Check the refrigerant charge. Criteria for Trip
• Check suction pressure transducer accuracy. The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON or OFF. The alarm
• Check return gas thermistor accuracy. is generated if one of the following criteria is met:
• Check Circuit Superheat Set Point (Configuration 1. This alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the MBB
SERVSHP.A, SHP.B, or SHP.C). or FB3 is 0 vdc.
• Check if system contains antifreeze (Configuration 2. The circuit is ON in cooling mode and the saturated suction
SERVFLUD=2). temperature for the circuit is greater than the referenced
• Check Brine Freeze Set Point (Configuration cooler leaving temperature (RCLT) for more than 60 seconds.
SERVLOSP) if an antifreeze solution is used. RCLT = EWT – (EWT – LWT) * circuit running tons /
total tons
• Check fluid flow rate.
• Check strainer for a restriction, clean if necessary. Action to be Taken
The circuit is shut down immediately, or not allowed to start.
• Check for cooler fouling.
Reset Method
• Check compressor oil level. If oil level is above the top of
the sightglass, then oil may be logging in the cooler. Ad- Automatic when the suction pressure reading is within the range
just oil level in compressor(s). except if it was tripped by criteria 2.
P.97 — Water Exchanger Temperature Sensors Swapped The reset will be manual if the alarm trips 3 times within a 24-hour
period or if it has been tripped by criteria 2.
Criteria for Trip
The alarm criterion is checked when the chiller is ON and one or Possible Causes
more compressors is running. This alarm will be tripped if the en- If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
tering water temperature is less than the leaving water temperature • Check for power to the compressor (i.e., circuit breaker,
for more than 1 minute. contactor operation).
Action to be Taken • Check the sensor wiring to main base board (Pr.04 and
The chiller is shut down immediately. Pr.05).
Reset Method • Check the sensor wiring to Fan Board 3 (Pr.06).
Manual • Check the board for a faulty channel.
Possible Causes • Check for a faulty transducer.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: • Check for a faulty leaving water temperature sensor.
• Check LWT and EWT wiring at main base board (connec- • Confirm unit configuration.
tor J6, channels 1,2). • Check EWT sensor.
• Check for a faulty entering or leaving water temperature Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer
sensor. Pr.07 — Circuit A
• Check cooler nozzles for proper water temperature sensor Pr.08 — Circuit B
locations. Criteria for Trip
Discharge Transducer Failure Tested when the unit is On or Off. This alarm is generated if the
Pr.01 — Circuit A voltage as sensed by the heat reclaim board is 0 vdc. This alarm is
Pr.02 — Circuit B for units with the heat reclaim option only.
Pr.03 — Circuit C Action to be Taken
Criteria for Trip The circuit will initiate a reclaim to air cooled changeover and stay
The criterion is tested whether the circuit is ON or OFF. This in air cooled mode if it had been operating in reclaim mode.
alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the MBB or FB3 is Reset Method
0 vdc.
Automatic when the transducer reading returns to normal.
Action to be Taken
Possible Causes
The circuit is shut down normally, or not allowed to start.
Reset Method
• Check the sensor wiring to heat reclaim board.
Automatic, once the transducer voltage is greater than 0 vdc.
• Check for a faulty transducer.
Possible Causes
• Check the board for a faulty channel.
• Check the sensor wiring to main base board (Pr.01 and
Pr.02). Sr.nn — Service Maintenance Alert
• Check the sensor wiring to Fan Board 3 (Pr.03). Criteria for Trip
• Check the board for a faulty channel. This alert is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and the Servic-
ing Alert decisions listed under Time ClockMCFG have been
• Check for a faulty transducer. enabled. The alarm will be generated if the one of the following
• Confirm unit configuration. configuration errors is detected by the control. The “nn” refers to
Suction Transducer Failure the error code listed in Table 50.
Pr.04 — Circuit A Action to be Taken
Pr.05 — Circuit B None.
Pr.06 — Circuit C Reset Method
Manual, after the service has been completed and Time
ClockMCFG RS.SV is reset for the alert.
76
Possible Causes • Check the board for a faulty channel.
If this condition is encountered, confirm the machine’s • Confirm unit configuration.
configuration. th.09 — Leaving Condenser Reclaim Thermistor
Table 50 — Service Maintenance Alert Codes Criteria for Trip
Tested when the unit is On or Off. This alarm is generated if the
CODE DESCRIPTION
temperature measured by the sensor is outside the range of –40°F
01 Circuit A Loss of Refrigerant Charge (–40°C) to 240°F (115.6°C). This alarm is for units with the heat
02 Circuit B Loss of Refrigerant Charge reclaim option only.
03 Circuit C Loss of Refrigerant Charge
Action to be Taken
04 Water Loop Size Warning
05 Air Exchanger Cleanliness Warning
None
06 Pump 1 Servicing Required Reset Method
07 Pump 2 Servicing Required Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is
08 Reclaim Pump Servicing Required within the expected range.
09 Water Filter Servicing Required Possible Causes
Water Exchanger Fluid Thermistor Failure • Check the sensor wiring to the heat reclaim board.
th.01 — Entering • Check for a faulty thermistor.
th.02 — Leaving
• Check the board for a faulty channel.
Criteria for Trip • Confirm unit configuration.
If the temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the
range –40°F (–40°C) to 240°F (115.6°C). th.10 — OAT Thermistor Failure
The unit shuts down normally, or is not allowed to start. If the outdoor-air temperature as measured by the thermistor is
outside of the range –40°F (–40°C) to 240°F (115.6°C).
Reset Method
Action to be Taken
Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is
within the expected range. Unit shuts down under normal conditions or is not allowed to
start. Temperature reset based on outdoor air temperature will be
Possible Causes disabled.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: The OAT sensor controls the cooler heaters. If this sensor fails, the
• Check the sensor wiring to the main base board. cooler heaters will be energized when the machine stages to 0.
• Check the sensor for accuracy. Reset Method
For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is
Thermistors on page 78. within the expected range and Temperature reset based on out-
th.03 — Circuit A Defrost Thermistor Failure door-air temperature will be enabled.
th.04 — Circuit B Defrost Thermistor Failure Possible Causes
Criteria for Trip If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
This alarm is for a heat pump machine only. This feature is not • Check the sensor wiring to the main base board.
supported for a cooling only machine. • Check for a faulty thermistor.
Action to be Taken For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see
None Thermistors on this page.
Reset Method th.11 — Master/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor
Automatic Criteria for Trip
Possible Causes This alarm criterion is checked whether the unit is ON or OFF and
If this condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration. has been configured for Dual Chiller Control. The alarm will be
triggered if the Dual Chiller Common Fluid temperature as mea-
th.08 — Entering Condenser Reclaim Thermistor sured by the thermistor is outside of the range –40°F (–40°C) to
Criteria for Trip 240°F (115.6°C).
Tested when the unit is On or Off. This alarm is generated if the Action to be Taken
temperature measured by the sensor is outside the range of –40°F Dual Chiller Control disabled. Units operate as a stand-alone
(–40°C) to 240°F (115.6°C). This alarm is for units with the heat machine.
reclaim option only. Reset Method
Action to be Taken Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected
The unit will return to the air-cooled mode. range. The Dual Chiller algorithm will resume once the alarm is
Reset Method cleared.
Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is Possible Causes
within the expected range. If this condition is encountered, check the following items:
Possible Causes • Check the sensor wiring to the main base board.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: • Check for a faulty thermistor.
• Check the sensor wiring to the heat reclaim board. For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see
• Check for a faulty thermistor. Thermistors on page 78.
77
Suction Gas Thermistor Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure
th.12 — Circuit A V0-xx — Circuit A
th.13 — Circuit B V1-xx — Circuit B
th.14 — Circuit C V2-xx — Circuit C
Criteria for Trip Criteria for Trip
This alarm criterion is checked whether the unit is ON or OFF. If See Table 24 on page 27 and Table 47 on page 66.
the suction gas temperature as measured by the thermistor is out- Action to be Taken
side of the range –40°F (–40°C) to 240°F (115.6°C), the alarm
will be triggered. • Alert — No action
Action to be Taken • Alarm — Circuit is stopped
The affected circuit shuts down normally. Reset Method
Reset Method Automatic reset.
Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected Possible Causes
range. The affected circuit will restart once the alarm has cleared. See Table 47 on page 66.
Possible Causes Sensors
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: The electronic control uses up to 12 thermistors to sense tem-
• Check the sensor wiring to the EXV board. peratures and up to 8 transducers to sense pressure for con-
• Check the board for a faulty channel. trolling chiller operation. These sensors are outlined below.
• Check for a faulty thermistor. Thermistors (Tables 51-53)
For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see Thermistors that are monitoring the chiller’s operation include:
Thermistors on this page. cooler entering water, cooler leaving water, dual chiller leaving
Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor water, compressor suction gas temperature, and outside air
thermistors. These thermistors are 5,000 ohms at 77°F (25°C)
th.18 — Circuit A and are identical in temperature versus resistance. The space
th.19 — Circuit B temperature thermistor is 10,000 ohmsat 77°F (25°C) and has a
Criteria for Trip different temperature vs. resistance.
Tested when the unit is On or Off. If the temperature as mea- COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (T1)
sured by the sensor is outside of the range of –40°F (–40°C) to
240°F (115.6°C). This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim On all sizes, this thermistor is installed in a well in the entering
option only. water nozzle of the cooler.
Action to be Taken COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (T2)
The unit will return to the air cooled mode. On all sizes, this thermistor is installed in a well in the leaving wa-
Reset Method ter nozzle of the cooler. See Fig. 35 and 36.
Automatic, the alarm will reset once the reading is within the ex- OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE (T3)
pected range. This sensor is factory-installed and is attached to the bottom of the
Possible Causes condenser mounting rail.
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: DUAL CHILLER LWT (T6)
• Check the sensor wiring to the EMM HR. On duplex chillers, 30RB315-390, a factory-supplied, field-in-
• Check for a faulty thermistor. stalled well and thermistor are installed in the common supply wa-
ter header of the two modules.
th.21 — Space Temperature Sensor Failure COMPRESSOR SUCTION GAS TEMPERATURE (T4, T5, T7)
Criteria for Trip This thermistor is installed in a well located in the common suc-
tion line for the circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.
This alarm criterion is checked whether the unit is ON or OFF and
if Space Temperature Reset has been enabled. If the outdoor-air CONDENSING LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (T9)
temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the range This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This
–40°F (–40°C) to 240°F (115.6°C), the alarm will be triggered. thermistor is installed in a well in the leaving water nozzle of the
Action to be Taken reclaim condenser.
Unit operates under normal control. Temperature Reset based on CONDENSING ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (T10)
Space Temperature is disabled. This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This
Reset Method thermistor is installed in a well in the entering water nozzle of the
Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected reclaim condenser.
range. The Space Temperature Reset will resume once the alarm SUBCOOLED CONDENSER GAS TEMPERATURE (T11, T12)
has cleared.
This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This
Possible Causes thermistor is installed in a well in the common liquid line of each
If this condition is encountered, check the following items: circuit.
• Check sensor wiring to the energy management module. REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE (T8)
• Check the board for a faulty channel. This sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a field-supplied, field-in-
• Check for a faulty thermistor. stalled accessory mounted in the indoor space and is used for wa-
For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see ter temperature reset. The sensor should be installed as a wall-
Thermistors. mounted thermostat would be (in the conditioned space where it
78
will not be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or direct 2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the space
exposure to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor). temperature sensor terminal block.
Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to terminals in 3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of the
the unit main control box. See Fig. 37. The space temperature sen- space temperature sensor.
sor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female connector. 4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the space
The RJ11 connector is used access into the Carrier Comfort Net- temperature sensor.
work® (CCN) at the sensor.
To connect the space temperature sensor (see Fig. 37): IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector wiring
1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for the MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus wire used for
the entire network. Refer to Table 12 for acceptable wiring.
application, connect one wire of the twisted pair to one SEN
terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN terminal 5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to the
located under the cover of the space temperature sensor. remainder of the CCN communication bus.
2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 7 and 8 on NOTE: The energy management module (EMM) is required for
TB6 located in the unit control box. this accessory.
Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the sensor
through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11 connector Transducers
into the CCN: Table 54 lists pressure transducers for controlling chiller operation.
1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color
scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)
Table 51 — Thermistor Identification

THERMISTOR ID DESCRIPTION RESISTANCE AT 77³F (25³C) CONNECTION POINT COMMENT
EWT (T1) Entering Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH2 —
LWT (T2) Leaving Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH1 —
OAT (T3) Outdoor Air Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH4 —
SGTA (T4) Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV1-J3-A, THA —
SGTB (T5) Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV1-J3-B, THB —
SGTC (T7) Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV2-J3-A, THA —
DUAL (T6) Dual Chiller LWT Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH3 —
SPT (T8) Space Temperature Thermistor 10k  EMM-J6-CH2 —
HLWT (T9) Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH1 Heat Reclaim Option
HEWT (T10) Condenser Entering Water Thermistor 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH2 Heat Reclaim Option
HRT.A (T11) Sub Condenser Gas Temp A 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH3 Heat Reclaim Option
HRT.B (T12) Sub Condenser Gas Temp B 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH4 Heat Reclaim Option
O-RING BRASS NUT 3/8 - 24 FOR

ASSEMBLY ON BRASS WELL
Fig. 35 — 5K Thermistor (P/N 30RB660036)

1/4-18 NPT
6" MINIMUM
1.188 in.
CLEARANCE FOR
THERMISTOR 2.315 in.
REMOVAL
Fig. 36 — Entering and Leaving Dual Water Thermistor Well (P/N 00PPG000008000A)
SENSOR
TB6
SEN SEN
7
Fig. 37 — Typical Remote Space Temperature Sensor Wiring
79
Table 52 — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs Resistance
TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP RESISTANCE
(F) (Ohms) (F) (Ohms) (F) (Ohms)
–25 98,010 59 7,686 143 1,190
–24 94,707 60 7,665 144 1,165
–23 91,522 61 7,468 145 1,141
–22 88,449 62 7,277 146 1,118
–21 85,486 63 7,091 147 1,095
–20 82,627 64 6,911 148 1,072
–19 79,871 65 6,735 149 1,050
–18 77,212 66 6,564 150 1,029
–17 74,648 67 6,399 151 1,007
–16 72,175 68 6,238 152 986
–15 69,790 69 6,081 153 965
–14 67,490 70 5,929 154 945
–13 65,272 71 5,781 155 925
–12 63,133 72 5,637 156 906
–11 61,070 73 5,497 157 887
–10 59,081 74 5,361 158 868
–9 57,162 75 5,229 159 850
–8 55,311 76 5,101 160 832
–7 53,526 77 4,976 161 815
–6 51,804 78 4,855 162 798
–5 50,143 79 4,737 163 782
–4 48,541 80 4,622 164 765
–3 46,996 81 4,511 165 750
–2 45,505 82 4,403 166 734
–1 44,066 83 4,298 167 719
0 42,679 84 4,196 168 705
1 41,339 85 4,096 169 690
2 40,047 86 4,000 170 677
3 38,800 87 3,906 171 663
4 37,596 88 3,814 172 650
5 36,435 89 3,726 173 638
6 35,313 90 3,640 174 626
7 34,231 91 3,556 175 614
8 33,185 92 3,474 176 602
9 32,176 93 3,395 177 591
10 31,202 94 3,318 178 581
11 30,260 95 3,243 179 570
12 29,351 96 3,170 180 561
13 28,473 97 3,099 181 551
14 27,624 98 3,031 182 542
15 26,804 99 2,964 183 533
16 26,011 100 2,898 184 524
17 25,245 101 2,835 185 516
18 24,505 102 2,773 186 508
19 23,789 103 2,713 187 501
20 23,096 104 2,655 188 494
21 22,427 105 2,597 189 487
22 21,779 106 2,542 190 480
23 21,153 107 2,488 191 473
24 20,547 108 2,436 192 467
25 19,960 109 2,385 193 461
26 19,393 110 2,335 194 456
27 18,843 111 2,286 195 450
28 18,311 112 2,239 196 445
29 17,796 113 2,192 197 439
30 17,297 114 2,147 198 434
31 16,814 115 2,103 199 429
32 16,346 116 2,060 200 424
33 15,892 117 2,018 201 419
34 15,453 118 1,977 202 415
35 15,027 119 1,937 203 410
36 14,614 120 1,898 204 405
37 14,214 121 1,860 205 401
38 13,826 122 1,822 206 396
39 13,449 123 1,786 207 391
40 13,084 124 1,750 208 386
41 12,730 125 1,715 209 382
42 12,387 126 1,680 210 377
43 12,053 127 1,647 211 372
44 11,730 128 1,614 212 367
45 11,416 129 1,582 213 361
46 11,112 130 1,550 214 356
47 10,816 131 1,519 215 350
48 10,529 132 1,489 216 344
49 10,250 133 1,459 217 338
50 9,979 134 1,430 218 332
51 9,717 135 1,401 219 325
52 9,461 136 1,373 220 318
53 9,213 137 1,345 221 311
54 8,973 138 1,318 222 304
55 8,739 139 1,291 223 297
56 8,511 140 1,265 224 289
57 8,291 141 1,240 225 282
58 8,076 142 1,214
80
Table 53 — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs Resistance/Voltage
TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP RESISTANCE TEMP RESISTANCE

(C) (Ohms) (C) (Ohms) (C) (Ohms)
–32 100,260 15 7,855 62 1,158
–31 94,165 16 7,499 63 1,118
–30 88,480 17 7,161 64 1,079
–29 83,170 18 6,840 65 1,041
–28 78,125 19 6,536 66 1,006
–27 73,580 20 6,246 67 971
–26 69,250 21 5,971 68 938
–25 65,205 22 5,710 69 906
–24 61,420 23 5,461 70 876
–23 57,875 24 5,225 71 836
–22 54,555 25 5,000 72 805
–21 51,450 26 4,786 73 775
–20 48,536 27 4,583 74 747
–19 45,807 28 4,389 75 719
–18 43,247 29 4,204 76 693
–17 40,845 30 4,028 77 669
–16 38,592 31 3,861 78 645
–15 38,476 32 3,701 79 623
–14 34,489 33 3,549 80 602
–13 32,621 34 3,404 81 583
–12 30,866 35 3,266 82 564
–11 29,216 36 3,134 83 547
–10 27,633 37 3,008 84 531
–9 26,202 38 2,888 85 516
–8 24,827 39 2,773 86 502
–7 23,532 40 2,663 87 489
–6 22,313 41 2,559 88 477
–5 21,163 42 2,459 89 466
–4 20,079 43 2,363 90 456
–3 19,058 44 2,272 91 446
–2 18,094 45 2,184 92 436
–1 17,184 46 2,101 93 427
0 16,325 47 2,021 94 419
1 15,515 48 1,944 95 410
2 14,749 49 1,871 96 402
3 14,026 50 1,801 97 393
4 13,342 51 1,734 98 385
5 12,696 52 1,670 99 376
6 12,085 53 1,609 100 367
7 11,506 54 1,550 101 357
8 10,959 55 1,493 102 346
9 10,441 56 1,439 103 335
10 9,949 57 1,387 104 324
11 9,485 58 1,337 105 312
12 9,044 59 1,290 106 299
13 8,627 60 1,244 107 285
14 8,231 61 1,200
Table 54 — Pressure Transducers

TRANSDUCER ID DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER* CONNECTION POINT COMMENT
DPTA Ckt. A Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A MBB-J7A-CH6 —
SPTA Ckt. A Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A MBB-J7B-CH7 —
DPTB Ckt. B Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A MBB-J7C-CH8 —
SPTB Ckt. B Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A MBB-J7D-CH9 —
DPTC Ckt. C Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A FB3-J7-CH13 30RB210-300 Only
SPTC Ckt. C Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A FB3-J8-CH14 30RB210-300 Only
PD.A Ckt. A Pumpdown Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A EMM HR-J8-CH6 Heat Reclaim Option Only
PD.B Ckt. B Pumpdown Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A EMM HR-J8-CH5 Heat Reclaim Option Only
*00PPG000030600A — High Pressure

00PPG000030700A — Low Pressure
81
Service Test display will show ON. The chiller must be enabled by turning the
Main power and control circuit power must be on for Service Test. Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch to Enable. Press ENTER
The Service Test function is used to verify proper operation of var- and ON will flash. Use either arrow key to change the value to
ious devices within the chiller, such as condenser fan(s), compres- OFF and press ENTER . The item should be inactive.
sors, minimum load valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s)
and remote alarm relay. This is helpful during the start-up proce- To enter the Quick Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact
dure to determine if devices are installed correctly. See Fig. 38-45 switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to the Service
for 30RB wiring diagrams. Test mode. Press ENTER to access TEST. Use the key until
To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact the display reads QUIC. Press ENTER to access Q.REQ. Press
switch must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys to move
to the Service Test mode. The items are described in the Service ENTER and the display will show OFF. Press ENTER and
Test table. There are two sub-modes available. Service OFF will flash. Enter the password if required. Use either arrow
TestT.REQ allows for manual control of the compressors and key to change the QUIC value to ON and press ENTER . Quick
minimum load control. In this mode the compressors will operate Test mode is now active. Follow the same instructions for the
only on command. The capacity control and head pressure control Manual Control mode to activate a component.
algorithms will be active. The condenser fans will operate along
with the EXVs. There must be a load on the chiller of operate for Example — Test the chilled water pump (see Table 55).
an extended period of time. All circuit safeties will be honored Power must be applied to the unit. Enable/Off/Remote Contact
during the test. Service TestQUIC allows for test of EXVs, con- switch must be in the OFF position.
denser fans, pumps, low ambient head pressure control speed con- Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by chang-
trol, crankcase and cooler heaters, and status points (alarm relays, ing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete outputs are
running status and chiller capacity). This mode allows for the test- then turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. Test
ing of non-refrigeration items. If there are no keys pressed for 5 the compressor and minimum load valve solenoid (if installed)
minutes, the active test mode will be disabled. outputs in a similar manner. The minimum load valve solenoids
To enter the Manual Control mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Con- will be turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes.
tact switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to the Ser- Compressors will stay on until the operator turns them off. The
vice Test mode. Press ENTER to access TEST. Press ENTER Service Test mode will remain enabled for as long as there is one
or more compressors running. All safeties are monitored during
to access T.REQ. Press ENTER and the display will show OFF. this test and will turn a compressor, circuit or the machine off if re-
Press ENTER and OFF will flash. Enter the password if required. Any other mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or
quired. Use either arrow key to change the T.REQ value to ON changed during the Manual Control mode only. The STAT item
(Run StatusVIEW) will display “0” as long as the Service
and press ENTER . Manual Control mode is now active. Press mode is enabled. The TEST sub-mode value must be changed
the arrow keys to move to the appropriate item. To activate an back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Re-
item locate the item, press ENTER and the display will show mote contact for normal operation.
OFF. Press ENTER and OFF will flash. Use either arrow key to NOTE: There may be up to a one-minute delay before the selected
item is energized.
change the value to ON and press ENTER . The item should be
active. To turn the item off, locate the item, press ENTER and the
82
Table 55 — Testing the Chilled Water Pump
VALUE
MODE KEYPAD DISPLAY
SUB-MODE ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT
(Red LED) ENTRY EXPANSION (Units)
SERVICE TEST ENTER Service Test Mode
TEST Manual Sequence
QUIC ENTER Q.REQ
PASS WORD Password may be required

ENTER 0111
ENTER Each ENTER will lock in the next

ENTER
digit. If 0111 is not the password,
use the arrow keys to change the
ENTER
password digit and press ENTER
ENTER
when correct.
ENTER Q.REQ Returns to the original field
ENTER OFF
ENTER OFF OFF will flash

The Enable/Off/Remote Contact
ON switch must be in the OFF
position.
ESCAPE Q.REQ
EXV.A
EXV.B
Water Exchanger
PMP.1 Pump 1
ENTER OFF
ENTER OFF OFF will flash
ON
ENTER ON Pump 1 will turn on.

ENTER ON ON will flash
OFF
ENTER OFF Pump 1 will turn off.
83
LEGEND FOR FIG. 38-45
ALM R — Alarm Relay OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature
ALT R — Alert Relay PDP — Pumpdown Pressure
CB — Circuit Breaker PMP — Pump, Chilled Water
CD-HT — Condenser Heater PMPI — Chilled Water Pump Interlock
CL-HT — Cooler Heater PVFD — Pump Variable Frequency Drive
CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch RDY R — Ready Relay
DLSV — Discharge Line Soleniod Valve RRB — Reverse Rotation Board
DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer RUN R — Run Relay
ECA-A — Entering Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit A SGT — Suction Gas Thermistor
ECA-B — Entering Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit B SHD R — Shutdown Relay
ECW-A — Entering Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit A SPM — Scroll Protection Module
ECW-B — Entering Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit B SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer
EMM — Energy Management Module TB — Terminal Block
ENT A/C — Entering Air-Cooled TRAN — Transformer
ENT W/C — Entering Water-Cooled UPC — Unitary Protocol Controller
FIOP — Factory-Installed Option Terminal Block Connection
FM — Fan Motor
FVFD — Fan Motor Variable Frequency Drive Marked Terminal
HEVCF — High Efficiency Variable Condenser Fan Option
HOA — Hand/Off/Auto Unmarked Terminal
HOA-A — Hand/Off/Auto, Auto Setting
HR — Heat Reclaim Unmarked Splice
LCA-A — Leaving Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit A
LCA-B — Leaving Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit B Factory Wiring
LCW — Leaving Condenser Water
LCW-A — Leaving Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit A Optional Wiring
LCW-B — Leaving Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit B
LLSV — Liquid Line Solenoid Valve Indicates common potential.
LVG A/C — Leaving Air-Cooled Does not represent wiring.
LVG W/C — Leaving Water-Cooled
LWT — Leaving Water Temperature FIOP or Accessory
MLV — Minimum Load Valve
MM — Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control Wire Tag
84
EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
DARK = SWITCH LOCATION
Fig. 38 — Control Schematic, 30RB060-080
85
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
86
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
87
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
88
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
Fig. 42 — Control Schematic, 30RB080-150 with HEVCF Option
89
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
90
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
91
???
????? ????????? ????????????

???? ?????????????? ???????????? ?????????
??? ???????????? ????????
?????
?????
???????
??? ??????
???
???
???
???
???
???
????????
?
?
?
?
?
?
???
?
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
?? ?? ? ???
?
??
?
??? ?
?? ??? ??? ??
?
???
?
?
???
?
? ???
????
??
?
? ?
? ???
? ?
?? ???
??? ? ?
????
??
? ???
?
? ?
? ???
? ?? ???
? ?????? ?????????????????????
????
?
? ?? ???
? ?????? ?????????????????????
?????????????
????
?
???????????? ?
? ?? ???
?????? ?????????????????????????????
????
?
? ??
?
? ?????? ????????????????????????????
????
?
? ?? ???
?? ???? ??? ??? ? ???? ??????????????
?????
? ? ??????
??? ??? ??
???????? ????? ????? ????? ????? ????? ????? ????? ????? ????? ?????
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
??
?
?
?
?
???
???
???
???
?
?
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
???
??????
??
????
???
???
??
?????
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
?????
?????
?????
?????
?????
?????
?????
?????
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??
??? ??
???? ????? ???

???
??????
???
???
???
???????
????????? ???????
???????
????? ??? ????????????? ???
?? ?? ??? ? ??
??? ???? ?????

?????????
????????
??????? ????????
????? ??? ????????????? ???
???
?? ?? ??? ? ??
???
??? ???????? ???
????????? ???????
???????
????? ??? ??????????????? ?? ?
?? ?? ??? ? ?? ???????
?????????
???????
????? ??? ????????????? ???
????????? ????????
???????
???????????????
?? ?? ??? ? ??
?????? ?????????????? ??? ????????? ???????

???????
?????????
????? ??? ????????????? ???
??? ???????
??????????????? ???????? ?? ?? ??? ?? ??
?????????????? ??? ????????? ???????

???????
????? ??? ????????????? ???
????????
?????????
??????? ?? ?? ??? ?? ??
????? ??? ??????????????? ???
?? ?? ??? ? ??
??? ????????? ???????
???????
????????? ???????? ????? ??? ????????????? ???
???????
??????????????? ?? ?? ??? ?? ??
?????????????
????????? ????????
???????
???????????????
a30-4622
??????????
Fig. 45 — Heat Reclaim Control Schematic
92
APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES
Table A — Mode — Run Status
WRITE PAGE
ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT CCN TABLE CCN POINT
STATUS NO.
VIEW AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS 5,82
XXXX.X
EWT Entering Fluid Temp (deg F/deg C) 0-100 STATEGEN EWT 23
XXX.X
LWT Leaving Fluid Temp (deg F/deg C) 0-100 STATEGEN LWT 23
XXX.X
SETP Active Setpoint (deg F/deg C) 0-100 GENUNIT SP 45
XXX.X 23,42,
CTPT Control Point (deg F/deg C) 0-100 GENUNIT CTRL_PNT 45
0=Off
1=Running 29,30,
STAT Unit Run Status 2=Stopping GENUNIT STATUS 82
3=Delay
OCC Occupied NO/YES GENUNIT CHIL_OCC 29
0=Local Off
1=Local On
CTRL Status Unit Control Typ 2=CCN GENUNIT ctr_type 29
3=Remote
CAP Percent Total Capacity XXX (%) 0-100 GENUNIT CAP_T
CAP.S Capacity Indicator XX over_cap 23
LIM Active Demand Limit Val XXX (%) 0-100 GENUNIT DEM_LIM 39
STGE Current Stage XX cur_stag
0=Normal
ALRM Alarm State 1=Partial GENUNIT ALM
2=Shutdown
0=Cooling
HC.ST Heat Cool Status 1=Heating GENUNIT HEATCOOL 23
2=Standby
RC.ST Reclaim Select Status NO/YES GENUNIT reclaim_sel
TIME Time of Day XX.XX 00.00-23.59 N/A TIME
1=January
2=February
3=March
4-April
5=May
6=June
MNTH Month of Year 7=July N/A moy
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
DATE Day of Month XX 1-31 N/A dom
YEAR Year of Century XX 00-99 N/A yoc
R.CCN CCN FOR PRODIALOG
CH.SS CCN Chiller Start Stop ENBL/DSBL forcible GENUNIT CHIL_S_S 74
0=Cool
HC.SL Heat Cool Select 1=Heat forcible GENUNIT HC_SEL
2=Auto
C.OCC Chiller Occupied NO/YES forcible GENUNIT CHIL_OCC
RECL Reclaim Select NO/YES forcible GENUNIT RECL_SEL
SP.OC Setpoint Occupied NO/YES forcible GENUNIT SP_OCC
D.LIM Active Demand Limit Val XXX (%) 0-100 forcible GENUNIT DEM_LIM
XXX.X
CTRL Control Point (deg F/deg C) 0-100 forcible GENUNIT CTRL_PNT
EMGY Emergency Stop ENBL/DSBL forcible GENUNIT EMSTOP
RUN UNIT RUN HOUR AND START
HRS.U Machine Operating Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible hr_mach
STR.U Machine Starts XXXX 0-9999 forcible STRTHOUR st_mach
HR.P1 Water Pump 1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_cpum1
HR.P2 Water Pump 2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_cpum2
HR.CD Heat Reclaim Pump Hours XXXX (hours) forcible FANHOURS hr_hpump 49
HOUR COMPRESSOR RUN HOURS
HR.A1 Compressor A1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a1
HR.B1 Compressor B1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b1
HR.C1 Compressor C1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c1
STRT COMPRESSOR STARTS
ST.A1 Compressor A1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a1
ST.B1 Compressor B1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b1
ST.C1 Compressor C1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c1
93
APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)
Table A — Mode — Run Status (cont)
WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
STRT (cont) COMPRESSOR STARTS
FAN FAN RUN HOURS
FR.A1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana1
FR.B1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb1
FR.C1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc1
CP.UN COMPRESSOR DISABLE
A1.UN Compressor A1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a1
B1.UN Compressor B1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b1
C1.UN Compressor C1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c1
MAIN PREDICTIVE MAINTENANCE
CHRG Refrigerant Charge NO/YES SERMAINT charge_m
WATE Water Loop Size NO/YES SERMAINT wloop_m
PMP.1 Pump 1 (days) (days) SERMAINT cpump1_m
PMP.2 Pump 2 (days) (days) SERMAINT cpump2_m
PMP.C Cond Pump (days) (days) SERMAINT hpump_m
W.FIL Water Filter (days) (days) SERMAINT wfilte_m
SOFTWARE VERSION
VERS NUMBER
APPL CSA-XX-XXXXXXXXX PD5_APPL
MARQ XXXXXX-XX-XX STDU
NAVI XXXXXX-XX-XX Navigator
EXV1 XXXXXX-XX-XX EXV_BRD1
EXV2 XXXXXX-XX-XX EXV_BRD2
AUX1 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD1
AUX4 XXXXXX-XX-XX Press ENTER AUX_BRD4
AUX5 XXXXXX-XX-XX and ESCAPE AUX_BRD5
simultaneously
CPA1 XXXXXX-XX-XX to read version SPM_CPA1
CPA2 XXXXXX-XX-XX information SPM_CPA2
CPA3 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA3
CPA4 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA4
CPB1 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB1
CPC1 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC1
EMM XXXXXX-XX-XX EMM_NRCP
*As data in all of these categories can exceed 9999 the following display strategy
is used:
From 0-9999 display as 4 digits.
From 9999-99900 display xx.xK
From 99900-999000 display as xxxK.
94
Table B — Service Test

WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
TEST COMPRESSORS N/A
T.REQ Manual Sequence OFF/ON* forcible N/A service_test 53
CP.A1 Compressor A1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_1 53
HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass A Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_a
CP.B1 Compressor B1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_1 53
HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass B Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_b
CP.C1 Compressor C1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_1 53
HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass C Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_c
QUIC QUICK TEST MODE N/A 53
Q.REQ Quick Test Mode OFF/ON† forcible N/A test_request
EXV.A Circuit A EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_a 52
EXV.B Circuit B EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_b 52
EXV.C Circuit C EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_c 52
FAN.A Circuit A Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_a
FAN.B Circuit B Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_b
FAN.C Circuit C Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_c
SPD.A Circ A Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_a
SPD.B Circ B Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_b
SPD.C Circ C Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_c
FRV.A Free Cooling Valve A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1a
FRP.A Refrigerant Pump Out A OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2a
FRV.B Free Cooling Valve B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1b
FRP.B Refrigerant Pump Out B OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2b
FRV.C Free Cooling Valve C OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1c
FRP.C Refrigerant Pump Out C OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2c
RV.A 4 Way Valve Circuit A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A rv_qck_a
RV.B 4 Way Valve Circuit B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A rv_qck_b
BOIL Boiler Command OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A boiler_qck
HR1.A Air Cond Enter Valve A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ea_qck_a
HR2.A Air Cond Leaving Valv A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_la_qck_a
HR3.A Water Cond Enter Valv A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ew_qck_a
HR4.A Water Cond Leav Valve A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_lw_qck_a
HR1.B Air Cond Enter Valve B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ea_qck_b
HR2.B Air Cond Leaving Valv B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_la_qck_b
HR3.B Water Cond Enter Valv B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ew_qck_b
HR4.B Water Cond Leav Valve B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_lw_qck_b
PMP.1 Water Exchanger Pump 1 OFF/ON forcible N/A cpump_qck1
PMP.2 Water Exchanger Pump 2 OFF/ON forcible N/A cpump_qck2
CND.P Reclaim Condenser Pump OFF/ON forcible N/A cond_pump_qck
CL.HT Cooler Heater Output OFF/ON forcible N/A coo_heat_qck
CP.HT Condenser Heater Output OFF/ON forcible N/A cond_htr_qck
CH.A1 Compressor A1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a1
CH.B1 Compressor B1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b1
CH.C1 Compressor C1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c1
HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass A Output OFF/ON forcible N/A
HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass B Output OFF/ON forcible N/A
HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass C Output OFF/ON forcible N/A
Q.RDY Chiller Ready Status OFF/ON forcible N/A ready_qck
QUIC (cont) QUICK TEST MODE
Q.RUN Chiller Running Status OFF/ON EMM forcible N/A running_qck
SHUT Customer Shutdown Stat OFF/ON EMM forcible N/A shutdown_qck
CATO Chiller Capacity 0-10v XX.X (vdc) 0-100 EMM forcible N/A CAPT_010_qcK
ALRM Alarm Relay OFF/ON forcible N/A alarm_qck
ALRT Alert Relay OFF/ON forcible N/A alert_qck
C.ALM Critical Alarm Relay OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A critical_qck
*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configur-
ing T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then place the Enable/Off/
Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.
†Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configur-
ing Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position to perform Quick Test.
95
Table C — Mode — Temperature

WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
UNIT ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMP
XXX.X –45-245°F
EWT Water Exchanger Enter (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) STATEGEN EWT 43
XXX.X –45-245°F
LWT Water Exchanger Leaving (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) STATEGEN LWT 43
XXX.X –45-245°F
OAT Outside Air Temperature (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) GENUNIT OAT 45
XXX.X –45-245°F
CHWS Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) STATEGEN CHWS TEMP
XXX.X
HEWT Heat Reclaim Entering (deg F/deg C) RECLAIM HR_EWT 49
XXX.X
HLWT Heat Reclaim Leaving (deg F/deg C) RECLAIM HR_LWT 49
XXX.X –45-245°F
SPT Optional Space Temp (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) STATEGEN SPACETMP
CIR.A TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A
XXX.X –45-245°F
SCT.A Sat Cond Temp Circ A (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCA_AN SCT_A
XXX.X –45-245°F
SST.A Sat Suction Temp Circ A (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCA_AN SST_A
XXX.X –45-245°F
SGT.A Suction Gas Temp Circ A (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCA_AN SUCT_T_A
SUP.A Superheat Temp Circ A XXX.X (F/C) CIRCA_AN SH_A
XXX.X –45-245°F
HRT.A Sub Condenser Gas Tmp A (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) RECLAIM hr_subta
HRS.A Sub Cooling Temp A XXX.X (F/C) RECLAIM hr_subca 49
CIR.B TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B
XXX.X –45-245°F
SCT.B Sat Cond Temp Circ B (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCB_AN SCT_B
XXX.X –45-245°F
SST.B Sat Suction Temp Circ B (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCB_AN SST_B
XXX.X –45-245°F
SGT.B Suction Gas Temp Circ B (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCB_AN SUCT_T_B 9
SUP.B Superheat Temp Circ B XXX.X (F/C) CIRCB_AN SH_B
XXX.X –45-245°F
HRT.B Sub Condenser Gas Tmp B (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) RECLAIM hr_subtb
HRS.B Sub Cooling Temp B XXX.X (F/C) RECLAIM hr_subcb 49
CIR.C TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT C CIRCC_AN
XXX.X –45-245°F
SCT.C Sat Cond Temp Circ C (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCC_AN SCT_C
XXX.X –45-245°F
SST.C Sat Suction Temp Circ C (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCC_AN SST_C
XXX.X –45-245°F
SGT.C Suction Gas Temp Circ C (deg F/deg C) (–43-118°C) CIRCC_AN SUCT_T_C
SUP.C Superheat Temp Circ C XXX.X (F/C) CIRCC_AN SH_C
Table D — Mode — Pressure

WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
PRC.A PRESSURE CIRCUIT A
XXX.X
DP.A Discharge Pressure Cir A (psig/kPa) CIRCA_AN DP_A 48
XXX.X
SP.A Suction Pressure Circ A (psig/kPa) CIRCA_AN SP_A
XXX.X
PD.A Pumpdown Pressure Cir A (psig/kPa) RECLAIM PD_P_A
PRC.B PRESSURE CIRCUIT B
XXX.X
DP.B Discharge Pressure Cir B (psig/kPa) CIRCB_AN DP_B 48
XXX.X
SP.B Suction Pressure Circ B (psig/kPa) CIRCB_AN SP_B
XXX.X
PD.B Pumpdown Pressure Cir B (psig/kPa) RECLAIM PD_P_B
PRC.C PRESSURE CIRCUIT C
XXX.X
DP.C Discharge Pressure Cir C (psig/kPa) CIRCC_AN DP_C 48
XXX.X
SP.C Suction Pressure Circ C (psig/kPa) CIRCC_AN SP_C
XXX.X
PD.C Pumpdown Pressure Cir C (psig/kPa) RECLAIM PD_P_C
96
Table E — Mode — Setpoints

WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
COOL COOLING SETPOINTS
–20-70°F
XXXX.X 30,31,
CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1 (deg F/deg C) (–29-21°C), forcible SETPOINT csp1 42
Default = 44.0
–20-70°F
XXXX.X
CSP.2 Cooing Setpoint 2 (deg F/deg C) (–29-21°C), forcible SETPOINT csp2 30,31
Default = 44.0
–20-70°F
XXXX.X
CSP.3 Ice Setpoint (deg F/deg C) (–29-21°C), forcible SETPOINT ice_sp 31,45
Default = 44.0
0-20,
CRV1 Current No Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 forcible SETPOINT v_cr_no 31
0-20,
CRV2 Current Full Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 forcible SETPOINT v_cr_fu 31
0-125°F
CRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) (0-69.4°C), forcible SETPOINT dt_cr_no 31
Default = 0
0-125°F
CRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) (0-69.4°C), forcible SETPOINT dt_cr_fu 31
Default = 0
0-125°F
XXX.X
CRO1 OAT No Reset Temp (deg F/deg C) (–18-52°C), forcible SETPOINT oatcr_no 31
Default = 14.0
0-25°F
XXX.X
CRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp (deg F/deg C) (–18-52°C), forcible SETPOINT oatcr_fu 31
Default = 14.0
0-125°F
XXX.X
CRS1 Space T No Reset Temp (deg F/deg C) (–18-52°C), forcible SETPOINT spacr_no 31
Default = 14.0
0-125°F
XXX.X
CRS2 Space T Full Reset Temp (deg F/deg C) (–18-52°C), forcible SETPOINT spacr_fu 31
Default = 14.0
–30-30°F
DGRC Degrees Cool Reset XX.X (F/C) (–16.7-16.7°C), forcible SETPOINT cr_deg 31
Default = 0
XX.X
CAUT Cool Changeover Setpt (deg F/deg C) Default = 75.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT cauto_sp
0.2-2.0°F
CRMP Cool Ramp Loading X.X (0.1-1.1°C), forcible cramp_sp 17,23
Default = 1.0
HEAT HEATING SETPOINTS
XXX.X
HSP.1 Heating Setpoint 1 (deg F/deg C) Default = 100 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT HSP.1
XXX.X
HSP.2 Heating Setpoint 2 (deg F/deg C) Default = 100 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT HSP.2
HRV1 Current No Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT v_hr_no
HRV2 Current Full Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT v_hr_fu
HRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT dt_hr_no
HRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT dt_hr_fu
XXX.X
HRO1 OAT No Reset Temp (deg F/deg C) Default = 14.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT oathr_no
XXX.X
HRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp (deg F/deg C) Default = 14.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT oathr_fu
DGRH Degrees Heat Reset XX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT DGRH
XX.X
HAUT Heat Changeover Setpt (deg F/deg C) Default = 64 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT hauto_sp
HRMP Heat Ramp Loading X.X Default = 1.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT hramp_sp
MISC MISCELLANEOUS SETPOINTS
0-100,
DLS1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 XXX (%) Default = 100 forcible SETPOINT lim_sp1 39
0-100,
0-100,
XXX.X
RSP Heat Reclaim Setpoint (deg F/deg C) Default = 122 forcible SETPOINT rsp 48
RDB Reclaim Deadband XX.X (F/C) Default = 9.0 forcible SETPOINT hr_deadb 48
97
Table F — Mode — Inputs

WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
GEN.I GENERAL INPUTS
ONOF On Off Switch OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN ONOF
LOCK Cooler Interlock OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LOCK_1 23
DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LIM_SW1 39
DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LIM_SW2 39
ICE.D Ice Done OFF/ON STATEGEN ICE_SW
DUAL Dual Setpoint Switch OFF/ON STATEGEN SETP_SW
ELEC Electrical Box Safety OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN ELEC_BOX
PUMP Pump Run Feedback OFF/ON STATEGEN PUMP_DEF
OCCS Occupancy Override Swit OFF/ON STATEGEN OCC_OVSW
RECL Heat Reclaim Switch OFF/ON STATEGEN RECL_SW 48
HC.SW Heat Cool Switch Status OFF/ON STATEGEN HC_SW
RLOC Remote Interlock Switch OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN REM-LOCK
C.FLO Reclaim Cond Flow OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN CONDFLOW
DMND 4-20 mA Demand Signal XXX.X (mA) 4 to 20 STATEGEN LIM_ANAL 40
RSET 4-20 mA Reset/Setpoint XXX.X (mA) 4 to 20 STATEGEN SP_RESET 39
Table G — Mode — Outputs

WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
CIR.A OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A
CP.A1 Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A1
HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass Circ A OFF/ON CIRCA_D HGBP_A
HT.A1 Comp A1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a1_ht
FAN.A Circuit A Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCA_D FAN_ST_A
SPD.A Circ A Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCA_AN hd_pos_a
EXV.A Circuit A EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCA_AN EXV_A 52
FRP.A Refrigerant Pump Out A OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_PMP_A
FRVA Free Cooling Valve A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_VLV_A
HR1.A Air Cond Enter Valve A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_ca_a
HR2.A Air Cond Leaving Valv A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_la_a
HR3.A Water Cond Enter Valv A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_en_a
HR4.A Water Cond Leav Valve A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_lw_a
RV.A 4 Way Valve Circuit A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D RV_A
CIR.B OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B
CP.B1 Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B1
HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass Circ B OFF/ON CIRCB_D HGBP_B
HT.B1 Comp B1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B1
FAN.B Circuit B Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCB_D FAN_ST_B
SPD.B Circ B Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCB_AN hd_pos_b
EXV.B Circuit B EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCB_AN EXV_B 52
FRP.B Refrigerant Pump Out B OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCB_D FR_PMP_B
FRVB Free Cooling Valve B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_VLV_B
HR1.B Air Cond Enter Valve B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_ca_b
HR2.B Air Cond Leaving Valv B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_la_b
HR3.B Water Cond Enter Valv B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_en_b
HR4.B Water Cond Leav Valve B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_lw_b
RV.B 4 Way Valve Circuit B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCB_D RV_B
CIR.C OUTPUTS CIRCUIT C
CP.C1 Compressor C1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C1
HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass Circ C OFF/ON CIRCC_D HGBP_C
HT.C1 Comp C1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c1_ht
FAN.C Circuit C Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCC_D FAN_ST_C
SPD.C Circ C Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCC_AN hd_pos_c
EXV.C Circuit C EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCC_AN EXV_C 52
FRP.C Refrigerant Pump Out C OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCC_D FR_PMP_ C
FRVC Free Cooling Valve C OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCC_D FR_VLV_C
98
Table G — Mode — Outputs (cont)
WRITE PAGE
STATUS NO.
GEN.O GENERAL OUTPUTS
PMP.1 Water Exchanger Pump 1 OFF/ON STATEGEN CPUMP_1
PMP.2 Water Exchanger Pump 2 OFF/ON STATEGEN CPUMP_2
CND.P Reclaim Condenser Pump OFF/ON STATEGEN COND_PUMP
CO.HT Cooler Heater Output OFF/ON STATEGEN COOLHEAT
CN.HT Condenser Heater Output OFF/ON RECLAIM cond_htr
REDY Chiller Ready Status OFF/ON forcible RECLAIM READY
RUN Chiller Running Status OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN RUNNING
SHUT Customer Shutdown Stat OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN SHUTDOWN
CATO Chiller Capacity 0-10 v XX.X forcible STATEGEN CAPT_010
ALRM Alarm Relay OFF/ON STATEGEN ALARM
ALRT Alert Relay OFF/ON STATEGEN ALERT
BOIL Boiler Command OFF/ON Not supported. STATEGEN BOILER
C.ALM Critical Alarm Relay OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN critical_qck
Table H — Mode — Configuration

WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT DEFAULT
STATUS TABLE POINT NO.
DISP DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
TEST Test Display LED’s OFF/ON OFF N/A display_test
METR Metric Display US/METR US DISPCONF DISPUNIT
0=English
1=Espanol
LANG Language Selection 2=Francais 0 DISPCONF LANGUAGE 3
3=Portugues
4=Translated
UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION
1=Air Cooled Heat pump not
TYPE Unit Type 2=Heat Pump supported 1 FACTORY unit_typ
56 to 300
(nominal size —
TONS Unit Size XXX (tons) refer to Table 1 for FACTORY unitsize 71
unit modular
combinations)
0: Std. unit, no fan
drive options
1: Low ambient
option.
For HEVCF option
set to number of
fans on circuit:
VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A X 0-6 Size 60-70 —n/a FACTORY varfan_a
Size 80 — 2
Size 90-120 — 3
Size 130-150 — 4
Size 160-190 — 6
Size 210-250 — 4
Size 275-300 — 6
drive options
1: Low ambient
option.
For HEVCF option
set to number of
fans on circuit:
VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B X 0-6 Size 60-70 —n/a FACTORY varfan_b
Size 80 — 2
Size 90-110 — 3
Size 120-170 — 4
Size 190 — 6
Size 210-250 — 4
Size 275-300 — 6
drive options
1: Low ambient
For HEVCF option
set to number of
VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C X 0-6 fans on circuit: FACTORY varfan_c
Size 210-225 — 4
Size 250 — 6
Size 275 — 4
Size 300 — 6
0=Unused 1 is default for
1=Startup Only med. temp.
HGBP Hot Gas Bypass Control 2=Close Ctrl brine units 0 FACTORY hgbp_sel 17
3=High Ambient (FLUD=2)
60HZ 60 Hz Frequency NO/YES YES FACTORY freq_60H
RECL Heat Reclaim Select NO/YES NO FACTORY recl_opt 48
EHS Electrical Heater Stage 0-4 Not supported 0 FACTORY ehs_sel
EMM EMM Module Installed NO/YES NO FACTORY emm_nrcp 71
Password Enable
PAS.E Password Protection Must Be DSBL/ENBL ENBL FACTORY pass_enb
Disabled to Change Password
PASS Password XXX 1 to 0150 0111 FACTORY fac_pass
FREE Free Cooling Select NO/YES Not supported. NO FACTORY freecool
Must be set to
PD4.D Pro_Dialog User Display NO/YES NO NO FACTORY pd4_disp
BOIL Boiler Command Select OFF/ON Not supported. OFF FACTORY boil_sel
99
Table H — Mode — Configuration (cont)
WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION
(cont)
0=No fan drive
1=Low ambient
VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select option 0 FACTORY Vh_sel
2=HEVCF option
1140 Low
RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM XXXX 0 to 1140 Ambient or 1140 FACTORY Vh_rpm
HEVCF option
MCHX MCHX Exchanger Select NO/YES NO FACTORY mchx_sel
FC Factory Country Code X 0 to 1 1=USA 1 FACTORY fac_code
VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Volts 208,380,460,575 Volts Voltage dependent FACTORY vfd_volt
QMFD Special Demand 0 to 255 Not supported 0 FACTORY qm_field
SERV SERVICE CONFIGURATION
1=Water 17,30,
Low Brine is
FLUD Cooler Fluid Type 2=Brine not supported. 1 SERVICE1 flui_typ 45,47,
3=Low Brine 72
XX.X 40-60°F
MOP EXV MOP Setpoint (deg F/deg C) (4.4-15.6°C) 50 SERVICE1 mop_sp 73
500-640 psi
HP.TH High Pressure Threshold XXX.X (psi/kPa) (3447 to 609 SERVICE1 hp_th 23,48
4412 kPa)
3-14°F
SHP.A Cir A Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) (1.7-7.8°C) 9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_a 73
3-14°F
SHP.B Cir B Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) (1.7-7.8°C) 9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_b 73
3-14°F
SHP.C Cir C Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) (1.7-7.8°C) 9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_c 73
2.0 (Number of
degrees added to
0.5-9°F
HTR Cooler Heater DT Setp XX.X (F/C) (0.3-5.0°C) brine freeze set SERVICE1 heatersp 45,55
point to enable
cooler heater.)
EWTO Entering Water Control NO/YES NO SERVICE1 ewt_opt 30
AU.SM Auto Start When SM Lost NO/YES NO SERVICE1 auto_sm 74
BOTH HSM Both Command Select NO/YES NO USER both_sel
XX –20-38°F
LLWT Brine Min. Fluid Temp. (deg F/deg C) (–28.9-3.3°C) 28.0 (3.3) USER Mini_Lwt
23,30,
XX.X –4-50°F
LOSP Brine Freeze Setpoint (deg F/deg C) (–20-10°C) 34.0 SERVICE1 lowestsp 45,47,
55,72
Std. Unit and Low
HD.PG Varifan Proportion Gain XX.X –10-10 Amb.: 2.0 SERVICE1 hd_pg
HEVCF: 1.0
Std. Unit and Low
HD.DG Varifan Derivative Gain XX.X –10-10 Amb.: 0.4 SERVICE1 hd_dg
HEVCF: 0.1
Std. Unit and Low
HD.IG Varifan Integral Gain XX.X –10-10 Amb.: 0.2 SERVICE1 hd_ig
HEVCF: 0.1
HR.MI Reclaim Water Valve Min XXX.X (%) 20 SERVICE1 min_3w
HR.MA Reclaim Water Valve Max XXX.X (%) 100 SERVICE1 max_3w
AVFA Attach Drive to Fan A NO/YES Not supported. NO
AVFB Attach Drive to Fan B NO/YES Not supported. NO
AVFC Attach Drive to Fan C NO/YES Not supported. NO
OPTN UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS
CCNA CCN Address XXX 1-239 1 N/A CCNA 45
CCNB CCN Bus Number XXX 0-239 0 N/A CCNB 45
1=2400
2=4800
BAUD CCN Baud Rate 3=9600 3 N/A BAUD
4=19200
5=38400
0=Equal
LOAD Loading Sequence Select 1=Staged 0 USER seq_typ 20
0=Automatic
1=Cir A Leads
LLCS Lead/Lag Circuit Select 2=Cir B Leads 0 USER lead_cir 20
3=Cir C Leads
17,23,
RL.S Ramp Load Select ENBL/DSBL DSBL USER ramp_sel 45
17,17,
DELY Minutes Off Time XX (Minutes) 1 to 15 1 USER off_on_d 45
ICE.M Ice Mode Enable ENBL/DSBL DSBL USER ice_cnfg 30
0=No Pump
1=1 Pump Only 29-
PUMP Cooler Pumps Sequence 2=2 Pumps Auto 0 USER pump_seq 29,42,
3=PMP 1 Manual 46
4=PMP 2 Manual
ROT.P Pump Rotation Delay XXXX (hours) 24 to 3000 48 USER pump_del 46
PM.PS Periodic Pump Start NO-YES NO USER pump_per 29,46
P.SBY Stop Pump In Standby NO-YES NO USER pump_sby
P.LOC Flow Checked if Pmp Off NO-YES YES USER pump_loc 29
LS.ST Night Low Noise Start XX.XX 00.00-23.59 00.00 USER nh_start 46
LS.ND Night Low Noise End XX.XX 00-00-23.59 00.00 USER nh_end 46
LS.LT Low Noise Capacity Lim XXX (%) 0-100 100 USER nh_limit 45,46
100
Table H — Mode — Configuration (cont)
WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
OPTN UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS
(cont)
XX.X
OA.TH Heat Mode OAT Threshold (deg F/deg C) Not supported. 5F USER heat_th
XX.X
FREE Free Cooling OAT Limit (deg F/deg C) Not supported. 32.0 USER free_oat
XX.X 5-32 F
BO.TH Boiler OAT Threshold (deg F/deg C) (–15-0 C) Not supported. 14 USER boil_th
XX.XX 23 -70 F
EHST Elec Stag OAT Threshold (deg F/deg C) (–5-21 C) Not supported. 41 USER ehs_th
EHSB Last Heat Elec Backup NO-YES Not supported. NO USER ehs_back
E.DEF Quick EHS in Defrost NO-YES Not supported. NO USER ehs_defr
EHSP Elec Heating Pulldown XX (min) Not supported. 0 USER ehs_pull
AUTO Auto Changeover Select NO-YES Not supported. NO USER auto_sel
RSET RESET, COOL AND HEAT TEMP
0=No Reset
1=Out Air Temp
CRST Cooling Reset Type 2=Delta T Temp 0 USER cr_sel 31,45
3=4-20 mA Input
4=Space Temp
0=No Reset
1=Out Air Temp
HRST Heating Reset Type 2=Delta T Temp Not supported. 0 USER hr_sel
3=4-20 mA Input
0=None 39,40,
DMDC Demand Limit Select 1=Switch 0 USER lim_sel 45
2=4-20 mA Input
DMMX mA for 100% Demand Lim XX.X (mA) 0.0 USER lim_mx 40
DMZE mA for 0% Demand Limit XX.X (mA) 0.0 USER lim_ze 40
0=Disable 45,46,
MSSL Master/Slave Select 1=Master 0 MST_SLV ms_sel 72,75
2=Slave
SLVA Slave Address XXX 1-236 2 MST_SLV slv_addr
LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select ENBL/DSBL DSBL MST_SLV ll_bal 17,44
LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta XXX (hours) 40-400 168 MST_SLV ll_bal_d 17,44
LLDY Lag Start Delay XX (minutes) 2-30 10 MST_SLV lsrt_tim 17,44
0=Off if Unit stopped
LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select 1=On if Unit stopped 0 MST_SLV lag_pump 17,44
LPUL Lead Pulldown Time XX (minutes) 0-60 0 MST_SLV lead_pul 17,44
101
Table I — Mode — Timeclock

WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT STATUS TABLE POINT NO.
TIME TIME OF DAY
HH.MM Hour and Minute XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible* N/A HH.MM
DATE MONTH DATE DAY AND YEAR
1=January
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
MNTH Month of Year 7=July forcible* N/A MNTH
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
DOM Day of Month XX 1-31 forcible* N/A DOM
1=Monday
2=Tuesday
3=Wednesday
DAY Day of Week 4=Thursday forcible* N/A DAY
5=Friday
6=Saturday
7=Sunday
YEAR Year of Century XX 00-99 forcible* N/A YEAR
SCH1 TIME SCHEDULE 1 29,30
PER.1 Period 1 Occ/Unocc Sel
PER.1OCC.1 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD1
PER.1UNO.1 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD1
PER.1MON.1 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.1TUE.1 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.1WED.1 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.1THU.1 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.1FRI.1 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.1SAT.1 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.1SUN.1 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.1HOL.1 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1
PER.2 Period 2 Occ/Unocc Sel OCC1P01S
PER.3 Period 3 Occ/Unocc Sel OCC1P01S
102
Table I — Mode — Timeclock (cont)
WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
SCH1 (cont) TIME SCHEDULE 1
PER.7OCC.7 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S OCCTOD7
PER.7UNO.7 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S UNOCTOD7
PER.7MON.7 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.7TUE.7 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.7WED.7 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.7THU.7 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.7FRI.7 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.7SAT.7 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.7SUN.7 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.7HOL.7 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7
PER.8 Period 8 Occ/Unocc Sel OCCP01S
PER.8OCC.8 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S OCCTOD8
PER.8UNO.8 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S UNOCTOD8
PER.8MON.8 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
PER.8TUE.8 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
PER.8WED.8 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
PER.8THU.8 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
PER.8FRI.8 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
PER.8SAT.8 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
PER.8SUN.8 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
PER.8HOL.8 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8
SCH2 TIME SCHEDULE 2 29,30
PER.2OCC.2 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD
PER.3OCC.3 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD
103
WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
SCH2 (cont) TIME SCHEDULE 2
PER.7UNO.7 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible UNOCTOD7
PER.7MON.7 Monday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.7TUE.7 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.7WED.7 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.7THU.7 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.7FRI.7 Friday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.7SAT.7 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.7SUN.7 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.7HOL.7 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7
PER.8OCC.8 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCTOD8
PER.8UNO.8 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible UNOCTOD8

PER.8MON.8 Monday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
PER.8TUE.8 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
PER.8WED.8 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
PER.8THU.8 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
PER.8FRI.8 Friday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
PER.8SAT.8 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
PER.8SUN.8 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
PER.8HOL.8 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8
HOLI HOLIDAYS CONFIGURATION
HOL.1 Holidays Config 1
1=January
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
HOL.1MON.1 Holiday Start Month 7=July forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_MON
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
HOL.1DAY.1 Holiday Start Day XX 1 to 31 forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_DAY
HOL.1DUR.1 Holiday Duration in Day XX 1 to 99 forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_LEN
HOL.1HOL.2 Holidays Config 2
See
HOL.1MON.2 Holiday Start Month HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_MON
See
HOL.2DAY.2 Holiday Start Day HOL.1DAY.1 forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_DAY
See
HOL.2DUR.2 Holiday Duration in Day HOL.1DUR.1 forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_LEN
HOL.9 Holidays Config 9
See
HOL.9MON.9 Holiday Start Month HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_MON
See
HOL.9DAY.9 Holiday Start Day HOL.1DAY.1 forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_DAY
See
HOL.9DUR.9 Holiday Duration in Days HOL.1DUR.1 forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_LEN
HOL.10HO.10 Holidays Config 10
See
HOL.10MO.10 Holiday Start Month HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_09
See
HOL.10DA.10 Holiday Start Day HOL.1DAY.1 forcible HOLDY_09
See
HOL.10DU.10 Holiday Duration in Days HOL.1DUR.1 forcible HOLDY_09
104
WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
HOLI (cont) HOLIDAYS CONFIGURATION
HOL.16HO.16 Holidays Config 16
See
HOL.16MO.16 Holiday Start Month HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_16
See
HOL.16DA.16 Holiday Start Day HOL.1DAY.1 forcible
See
HOL.16DU.16 Holiday Duration in Days HOL.1DUR.1 forcible
MCFG SERVICE MAINTENANCE CONFIG 42,76
AL.SV Service Warning Select NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG s_alert
CHRG Refrigerant Charge NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG charge_a
WATE Water Loop Size NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG wloop_c
PMP.1 Pump 1 (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible† MAINTCFG pump1_c
PMP.2 Pump 2 (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible† MAINTCFG pump2_c
PMP.C Cond Pump (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible† MAINTCFG hpump_c
W.FIL Water Filter (days) XXXX (days) forcible† MAINTCFG wfilte_c 42
0=Default
1=Refrigerant
Charge
2=Water loop size
3=Not used
RS.SV Servicing Alert Reset 4=Pump 1 forcible† SERMAINT s_reset
5=Pump 2
6=Reclaim Pump
7=Water filter
8=Reset all
*Default=NO.
†Default=0.
Table J — Operating Mode

WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
SLCT OPERATING TYPE CONTROL
0=Switch Ctrl 30,41,44,
OPER Operating Type Control 1=Time Sched Default = 0 forcible N/A N/A 48
2=CCN Control
0=Setpoint Occ
1=Setpoint1
SP.SE Setpoint Select 2=Setpoint2 Default = 0 forcible N/A N/A 31
3=4-20mA Setp
4=Dual Setp Sw
0=Cooling Default = 0
1=Heating
HC.SE Heat Cool Select 2=Auto Chgover 1-3 not forcible GENUNIT HC_SEL 30
supported.
3=Heat Cool Sw
0=No Default = 0
RL.SE Reclaim Select 1=Yes Yes = CCN forcible GENUNIT RECL_SEL 48
2=Switch Ctrl control
MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT
MD01 Startup Delay in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_01 45
MD02 Second Setpoint in Use OFF/ON MODES MODE_02 45
MD03 Reset in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_03 45
MD04 Demand Limit Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_04 45
MD05 Ramp Loading Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_05 45
MD06 Cooler Heater Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_06 45
MD07 Water Pumps Rotation OFF/ON MODES MODE_07 45
MD08 Pump Periodic Start OFF/ON MODES MODE_08 45
MD09 Night Low Noise Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_09 45
MD10 System Manager Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_10 45
MD11 Mast Slave Ctrl Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_11 45
MD12 Auto Changeover Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_12 45
MD13 Free Cooling Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_13 45
MD14 Reclaim Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_14 45
MD15 Electric Heat Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_15 45
MD16 Heating Low EWT Lockout OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_16 45
MD17 Boiler Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_17 45
MD18 Ice Mode in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_18 45
MD19 Defrost Active on Cir A OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_19 45
MD20 Defrost Active on Cir B OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_20 45
MD21 Low Suction Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_21 45
MD22 Low Suction Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_22 45
MD23 Low Suction Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_23 45
MD24 High DGT Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_24 45
MD25 High DGT Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_25 45
MD26 High DGT Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_26 45
MD27 High Pres Override Cir A OFF/ON MODES MODE_27 45
MD28 High Pres Override Cir B OFF/ON MODES MODE_28 45
MD29 High Pres OVerride Cir C OFF/ON MODES MODE_29 45
MD30 Low Superheat Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_30 45
MD31 Low Superheat Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_31 45
MD32 Low Superheat Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_32 45
NOTE: See Operating Modes starting on page 111.
105
Table K — Mode — Alarms

WRITE CCN CCN PAGE
ITEM EXPANSION* UNITS RANGE COMMENT STATUS TABLE POINT NO.
R.ALM RESET ALL CURRENT ALRM forcible N/A N/A 60
ALRM† CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARM 60
Current Alarm 1 GENUNIT alarm_1
H.ALM** ALARM HISTORY
Alarm History #1 ALRMHIST alm_history_01
ALRMHIST
*Expanded display will be actual alarm expansion.
†Up to five current alarms will be displayed.
**History of thirty past alarms will be displayed.
106
APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES
Table L — Status Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS
CIRCA_AN
Percent Total Capacity 0 - 100 % CAPA_T
Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_A
Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_A
Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpa1_cur
Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpa1_tmp
Saturated Condensing Tmp ±nnn.n °F SCT_A
Saturated Suction Temp ±nnn.n °F SST_A
Suction Gas Temperature ±nnn.n °F SUCT_T_A
Suction Superheat Temp ±nnn.n ^F SH_A
EXV Position 0 - 100 % EXV_A
CIRCA_D
Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_A1
Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_a1_ht
Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_A
Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_a1

Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_A
4 Way Refrigerant Valve On/Off RV_A

CIRCB_AN
Percent Total Capacity 0 - 100 % CAPB_T
Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_B
Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_B
Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpb1_cur
Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpb1_tmp
Saturated Condensing Tmp ±nnn.n °F SCT_B
Saturated Suction Temp ±nnn.n °F SST_B
Suction Gas Temperature ±nnn.n °F SUCT_T_B
Suction Superheat Temp ±nnn.n ^F SH_B
EXV Position 0-100 % EXV_B
Head Press Actuator Pos 0-100 % hd_pos_b
107
APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)
Table L — Status Display Tables (cont)
CIRCB_D
Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_B1
Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_b1_ht
Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_B
Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_b1

Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_B
4 Way Refrigerant Valve On/Off RV_B

CIRCC_AN
Percent Total Capacity 0-100 % CAPC_T
Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_C
Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_C
Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpc1_cur
Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpc1_tmp
Saturated Condensing Tmp ±nnn.n °F SCT_C
Saturated Suction Temp ±nnn.n °F SST_C
Suction Gas Temperature ±nnn.n °F SUCT_T_C
Suction Superheat Temp ±nnn.n ^F SH_C
EXV Position 0-100 % EXV_C
Head Press Actuator Pos 0-100 % hd_pos_c
CIRCC_D
Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_C1
Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_c1_ht
Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_C
Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_c1

Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_C
108
FANHOURS FAN Operating Hours
Circuit A Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana1
Circuit B Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb1
Circuit C Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc1
WATER PUMPS
Water Pump #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum1
Water Pump #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum2
Heat Reclaim Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_hpump
FREE COOLING PUMPS
Circuit A Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_a
Circuit B Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_b
Circuit C Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_c
FREECOOL GENERAL PARAMETER
Free Cooling Disable? Yes/No FC_SW
LWT-OAT Delta nnn.n ^F fc_delta
Current Cooling Power nnn KW cool_pwr
Estimated FreeCool Power nnn KW fc_pwr
Next session allowed in nn min fc_next
Cooling/FreeCool Timeout nn min fc_tmout
Free Cool Conditions OK? Yes/No fc_ready
Free Cool Request ? Yes/No fc_reqst
Valve Actuator Heaters ? On/Off FC_HTR
CIRCUIT A
Free Cooling Active Yes/No fc_on_a
Fan Staging Number 1-6 FAN_ST_A
3 Way Valve Position nnn % fc_vlv_a
3 Way Valve Status text* FC_VLV_A
Refrigerant Pump Out On/Off fc_pmp_a
Pump Inlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_inp_a
Pump Outlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_oup_a
Pump Differential Pressure nnn PSI fc_dp_a
CIRCUIT B
Free Cooling Active Yes/No fc_on_b
Fan Staging Number 1-6 FAN_ST_B
3 Way Valve Position nnn % fc_vlv_b
3 Way Valve Status text* FC_VLV_B
Refrigerant Pump Out On/Off fc_pmp_b
Pump Inlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_inp_b
Pump Outlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_oup_b
Pump Differential Pressure nnn PSI fc_dp_b
109
GENUNIT GENERAL PARAMETER
Local
Control Type CCN ctr_type
Remote
0 = Off
1 = Running
2 = Stopping
3 = Delay
4 = Tripout
Run Status STATUS
5 = Ready
6 = Override
7 = Defrost
8 = Run Test
9 = Test
CCN Chiller Start/Stop Enable/Disable CHIL_S_S forcible
Chiller Occupied? Yes/No CHIL_OCC forcible
Minutes Left for Start 0-15 min min_left
0 = Cool, 1 = Heat
Heat/Cool Status 2 = Stand-by HEATCOOL
3 = Both
Heat/Cool Select (0=Cool, 0 = Cool
1=Heat, 1 = Heat HC_SEL forcible
2= Auto) 2 = Auto
Heat Reclaim Select Yes/No RECL_SEL forcible
Free Cooling Disable Yes/No FC_DSBLE
0 Normal
Alarm State 1 Partial ALM
2 Shutdown
Current Alarm 1 nnnnn alarm_1
Percent Total Capacity nnn % CAP_T
Active Demand Limit Val nnn % DEM_LIM forcible
Lag Capacity Limit Value nnn % LAG_LIM
Current Setpoint ±nnn.n °F SP
Setpoint Occupied Yes/No SP_OCC forcible
Setpt 1
Setpt 2
Setpoint Control Ice_sp sp_ctrl
4-20mA
Auto
Control Point ±nnn.n °F CTRL_PNT forcible
Controlled Water Temp ±nnn.n °F CTRL_WT
External Temperature ±nnn.n °F OAT
Emergency Stop Enable/Disable EMSTOP forcible
110
MODES OPERATING MODES
Startup Delay in Effect Yes/No Mode_01
Second Setpoint in Use Yes/No Mode_02
Reset in Effect Yes/No Mode_03
Demand Limit Active Yes/No Mode_04
Ramp Loading Active Yes/No Mode_05
Cooler Heater Active Yes/No Mode_06
Cooler Pumps Rotation Yes/No Mode_07
Pump Periodic Start Yes/No Mode_08
Night Low Noise Active Yes/No Mode_09
System Manager Active Yes/No Mode_10
Master Slave Active Yes/No Mode_11
Auto Changeover Active Yes/No Mode_12
Free Cooling Active Yes/No Mode_13
Reclaim Active Yes/No Mode_14
Electric Heat Active Yes/No Mode_15
Heating Low EWT Lockout Yes/No Mode_16
Boiler Active Yes/No Mode_17
Ice Mode in Effect Yes/No Mode_18
Defrost Active On Cir A Yes/No Mode_19
Defrost Active On Cir B Yes/No Mode_20
Low Suction Circuit A Yes/No Mode_21
Low Suction Circuit B Yes/No Mode_22
Low Suction Circuit C Yes/No Mode_23
High DGT Circuit A Yes/No Mode_24
High DGT Circuit B Yes/No Mode_25
High DGT Circuit C Yes/No Mode_26
High Pres Override Cir A Yes/No Mode_27
High Pres Override Cir B Yes/No Mode_28
High Pres Override Cir C Yes/No Mode_29
Low Superheat Circuit A Yes/No Mode_30
Low Superheat Circuit B Yes/No Mode_31
Low Superheat Circuit C Yes/No Mode_32
RECLAIM Heat Reclaim Select Yes/no RECL_SEL
Reclaim Condenser Pump On/Off CONDPUMP
Reclaim Condenser Flow On/Off condflow
Reclaim Condenser Heater On/Off cond_htr
Reclaim Entering Fluid ±nnn.n °F HR_EWT
Reclaim Leaving Fluid ±nnn.n °F HR_LWT
Reclaim Fluid Setpoint ±nnn.n °F RSP forcible
Reclaim Valve Position ±nnn.n % hr_v_pos
HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT A
Reclaim Status Circuit A n† hrstat_a
Pumpdown Pressure Cir A ±nnn.n psi PD_P_A
Sub Condenser Temp Cir A ±nnn.n °F hr_subta
Pumdown Saturated Tmp A ±nnn.n °F hr_sat_a
Subcooling Temperature A ±nnn.n ^F hr_subca
Air Cond Entering Valv A On/Off hr_ea_a
Water Cond Enter Valve A On/Off hr_ew_a
Air Cond Leaving Valve A On/Off hr_la_a
Water Cond Leaving Val A On/Off hr_lw_a
HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT B
Reclaim Status Circuit B n† hrstat_b
Pumpdown Pressure Cir B ±nnn.n psi PD_P_B
Sub Condenser Temp Cir B ±nnn.n °F hr_subtb
Pumdown Saturated Tmp B ±nnn.n °F hr_sat_b
Subcooling Temperature B ±nnn.n ^F hr_subcb
Air Cond Entering Valv B On/Off hr_ea_b
Water Cond Enter Valve B On/Off hr_ew_b
Air Cond Leaving Valve B On/Off hr_la_b
Water Cond Leaving Val B On/Off hr_lw_b
111
STATEGEN UNIT DISCRETE IN
On/Off – Remote Switch Open/Close ONOFF_SW
Remote Heat/Cool Switch Open/Close HC_SW
Off, On Cool, On
Current Control on_ctrl
Heat, On Auto
Remote Reclaim Switch Open/Close RECL_SW
Free Cooling Disable Sw. Open/close FC_SW
Remote Setpoint Switch Open/Close SETP_SW
Limit Switch 1 Status Open/Close LIM_SW1
Limit Switch 2 Status Open/Close LIM_SW2
Occupied Override Switch Open/Close OCC_OVSW
Ice Done Storage Switch Open/Close ICE_SW
Interlock Status Open/Close LOCK_1
Pump Run Status Open/Close PUMP_DEF
Remote Interlock Status Open/Close REM_ LOCK
Electrical Box Safety Open/Close ELEC_BOX
UNIT DISCRETE OUT
Electrical Heat Stage 0-4/Off EHS_STEP
Boiler Command On/Off BOILER
Water Pump #1 Command On/Off CPUMP_1 forcible
Water Pump #2 Command On/Off CPUMP_2 forcible
Rotate Pumps Now Yes/No ROT_PUMP forcible
Reclaim Condenser Pump On/Off COND_PMP forcible
Cooler Heater Command On/Off COOLHEAT
Shutdown Indicator State On/Off SHUTDOWN
Alarm Relay Status On/Off ALARMOUT
Alert Relay Status On/Off ALERT
Ready or Running Status On/Off READY
Running Status On/Off RUNNING
Critical Alarm Status On/Off CRITICAL
UNIT ANALOG
Water Exchanger Entering ±nnn.n °F EWT
Water Exchanger Leaving ±nnn.n °F LWT
Optional Space Temp ±nnn.n °F SPACETMP
CHWS Temperature ±nnn.n °F CHWSTEMP
Reset /Setpoint 4-20mA In ±nn.n ma SP_RESET
Limit 4-20mA Signal ±nn.n ma LIM_ANAL
Chiller Capacity Signal ±nn.n volts CAPT_010
112
STRTHOUR Machine Operating Hours nnnnn hours HR_MACH
Machine Starts Number nnnnn st_mach
Compressor A1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A1
Compressor A1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a1
Compressor B1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B1
Compressor B1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b1
Compressor C1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C1
Compressor C1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c1
CYCLES
Starts Max During 1 Hour nn st_cp_mx
Starts/hr From Last 24 h nn st_cp_av
Circuit A Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_a
Circuit B Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_b
* Text reflects status of valve “Closed,” “Closing,” “Opened,” “Opening,”
“Stopped,” or “Failed.”
†See RECLAIM table on page 111.
113
Table M — Configuration Display Tables
TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME
ALARMDEF/ Alarm Routing Control 0 or 1 for each position 00000000 ALRM_CNT
ALARMS01 Alarm Equipment Priority 0-7 4 EQP_TYP
Comm Failure Retry Time 1-240 10 min RETRY_TM
Realarm Time 1-255 30 min RE_ALARM
Alarm System Name 8 chars PRO_RBRQ ALRM_NAM
BRODEFS/ 0=Unused
BROCASTS 1=Broadcast time, date, holiday
flag and OAT.
2=For Standalone chiller.
Activate 2 — ccnbroad
Daylight savings time & holiday
determination will be done
without broadcasting through the
bus.
OAT Broadcast
Bus # 0 to 239 0 oatbusnm
Element # 0 to 239 0 oatlocad
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SELECT Disable/Enable Disable dayl_sel
ENTERING
Month 1 to 12 3 startmon
Day of week* (1=Monday) 1 to 7 7 startdow
Week Number of Month† 1 to 5 5 startwom
LEAVING
Month 1 to 12 10 stopmon
Day of week* (1=Monday) 1 to 7 7 stopdow
Week Number of Month† 1 to 5 5 stopwom
!CtrlD / Device Name 8 chars
PD5_RBRQ: PRO-DIALOG 5
Description 24 chars 30RB&30RQ
Location 24 chars
CSA-SR-
Software Part Number 16 chars 20C46xxxx
Model Number 20 chars
Serial Number 12 chars
Reference Number 24 chars
DISPCONF Metric Display on STDU Yes/No No DISPUNIT
Language Selection 0=English
0=English 1=Espanol
1=Espanol 2=Francais 0 LANGUAGE
2=Francais 3=Portugues
3=Portugues 4=English2
4=English2
114
Table M — Configuration Display Tables (cont)
FACTORY 1 (Cooling Only),
Unit Type 1 unit_typ
2 (not supported)
Unit Capacity** 56 to 500 Unit Dependent tons unitsize
NB Fans on Varifan Cir A†† 0 to 6 0 varfan_a
NB Fans on Varifan Cir B†† 0 to 6 0 varfan_b
NB Fans on Varifan Cir C†† 0 to 6 0 varfan_c
Air Cooled Reclaim Sel Yes/No No recl_opt
Free Cooling Select Yes/No No free_opt
Electrical Heat Stages 0 to 4 0 ehs_sel
Boiler Command Select Yes/No No boil_sel
Power Frequency 60HZ Sel Yes/No Yes freq_60H
Energy Management Module Yes/No No emm_nrcp
0-Hot gas bypass valve (not
used)
1=Used for Startup only
Hot Gas Bypass Select 2=Close Control 0 hgbp_sel
3=High Ambient (if High pressure
mode is active, close control shall
be active)
No=Use ComfortLink
display as user interface (factory No
installed) (Must be set to No
Pro_dialog Display Selec pd4_disp
Yes=Use Pro_dialog for ComfortLink
synopsis as user interface (not display)
supported)
Factory Password 0 to 150 111 fac_pass
MCHX Exchanger Select Yes/No Unit Dependent mchx_sel
VLT Fan Drive Select Not Supported 0 vlt_sel
VLT Fan Drive RPM Not Supported 0 vlt_rpm
Desuperheater Select Not Supported No desuper
Dual Speed Fan Select Not Supported No dual_fan
1 (Must be set to 1
for units
Factory Country Code 0-1 fac_code
manufactured in
USA)
VFD Voltage for USA 208,380,460,575*** Unit dependent volts vfd_volt
Special Demand 0 0 qm_field
* Day of week where daylight savings time will occur in the morning (at †† Number of fans controlled directly by a variable speed fan actuator
2:00 am). In the default setting, daylight savings time occurs on Sunday using 0 to 10 vdc signal or LEN communication. This will enable the
(7) morning, 1 hour shall be added when entering and 1 hour sub- controls to determine the remaining discrete fan staging outputs from
tracted when leaving. the total fans on each circuit. Configure to 1 for low ambient head pres-
† Date once selected (from 1) shall occur in the week number entered. sure control. Configuration to match number of fans on circuit for
1: If day of week selected is 7 (Sunday) time change will occur the first HEVCF option.
Sunday (week number 1) in the month. 5: If day of week selected is 7 *** Must be configured to nameplate voltage. Configure 208/230-v units
(Sunday) time change will occur the last Sunday of the month (week for 208.
number 4 or 5).
** Enter unit size. This item allows the controls to determine capacity of
each compressor and the total number of fans on each circuit based on
a compressor arrangement array (can be viewed in table FACTORY2,
next page). It is not necessary to enter compressor capacity and num-
ber of fans on each circuit. See the Unit Compressor Configuration
table on the next page as a reference.
115
Unit Compressor Capacity (%) Configuration
30RB POINT NAME (FACTORY2 TABLE)
UNIT
SIZE cap_a1 cap_a2 cap_a3 cap_a4 cap_b1 cap_b2 cap_b3 cap_b4 cap_c1 cap_c2 cap_c3 cap_c4
060 20 20 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
070 25 25 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
080 20 20 0 0 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0
090 25 25 0 0 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0
100 25 25 0 0 25 25 0 0 0 0 0 0
110 25 25 0 0 20 20 20 0 0 0 0 0
120 25 25 0 0 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 0
130 25 25 25 0 20 20 20 0 0 0 0 0
150 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 0
160 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 0 0 0 0 0
170 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 0
190 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0 0 0 0
210 25 25 25 0 20 20 20 0 25 25 25 0
225 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0
250 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 25
275 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0
300 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Factory2 Table
FACTORY2 Compressor A1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a1
Compressor A2 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a2
Compressor B1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b1
Compressor C1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c1
Circuit A Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_a
Circuit B Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_b
Circuit C Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_c
EXV A Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0=EXV not used exva_max
EXV B Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0 exvb_max
EXV C Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0 exvc_max
NOTES:
1. Compressor capacity will be automatically be determined if unit
size entered in FACTORY table matches the values in the unit
compressor configuration table.
2. Total number of fans includes fans controlled by a variable speed
fan. This value will be automatically populated if unit size entered in
FACTORY table matches the values in the unit compressor config-
uration table.
116
Table N — Configuration Display Tables
HOLIDAY/ Holiday Start Month 0-12 0 HOL_MON
HOLDY01S to Start Day 0-31 0 HOL_DAY
HOLDY16S Duration (days) 0-99 0 HOL_LEN
MASTER SLAVE CONTROL
Master/Slave Select 0=Disable
0=Disable 1=Master 0 ms_sel
1=Master 2=Slave
2=Slave
Master Control Type 1=Local Control
1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 1 ms_ctrl
2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control
3=CCN Control
MST_SLV
Slave Address 1 to 236 2 slv_addr
Lag Start Timer 2 to 30 10 min lstr_tim
Lead/Lag Balance Yes/No No ll_bal
Lead/Lag Balance Delta 40 to 400 168 hours ll_bal_d
Lag Unit Pump Control 0=Stop if Unit Stops
0=Stop if Unit Stops 0 lag_pump
1=Run if Unit Stops
1=Run if Unit Stops
Lead Pulldown Time 0 to 60 0 min lead_pul
Timed Override Hours 0-4 0 OVR_EXT
Period 1 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 11111111 DOW1
Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD1
Occupied To 00:00-24:00 24:00 UNOCTOD1
OCCDEFCS/ Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD4
OCCPC01S and Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD4
OCCPC02S Period 5 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW5
117
Table N — Configuration Display Tables (cont)
USER 0-3
Circuit Loading Sequence 0=Auto,
0=Auto,1=A Lead 1=A Lead 0 lead_cir
2=B Lead, 3 =C Lead 2=B Lead,
3 =C Lead
Staged Loading Sequence No/Yes No seq_typ
Ramp Loading Select No/Yes No ramp_sel
Unit Off to On Delay 1-15 1 Min off_on_d
Cooler Pumps Sequence 0-4
0=No Pump 0=No Pump
1=One Pump Only 1=One Pump Only 0 pump_seq
2=Two Pumps Auto 2=Two Pumps Auto
3=Pump#1 Manual 3=Pump#1 Manual
4=Pump#2 Manual 4=Pump#2 Manual
Pump Auto Rotation Delay 24-3000 48 hours pump_del
Pump Sticking Protection No/Yes No pump_per
Stop Pump During Standby No/Yes No pump_sby
Flow Checked if Pump Off No/Yes Yes pump_loc
Auto Changeover Select No/Yes No auto_sel
Cooling Reset Select 0-4 0 cr_sel
Heating Reset Select 0-4
1 =OAT, 1 =OAT,
0=None 0=None 0 hr_sel
2=Delta T, 2=Delta T,
3=4-20mA Control 3=4-20mA Control
4=Space Temp 4=Space Temp
Demand Limit Type Select 0-2
0=None 0=None 0 lim_sel
1=Switch Control 1=Switch Control
2=4-20mA Control 2=4-20mA Control
mA For 100% Demand Limit 0-20 0 ma lim_mx
mA For 0% Demand Limit 0-20 0 ma lim_ze
Heating OAT Threshold -4-32 5 °F heat_th
Boiler OAT Threshold 5-59 14 °F boil_th
Free Cooling -4-37.4 32 °F free_oat
OAT Threshold -4-37.4 32.0 °F free_th
Full Load Timeout 5-60 15 min fc_tmout
Pre_Cooling Selected No/Yes No pre_cool
HSM Both Command Select No/Yes No both_sel
Elec Stage OAT Threshold 23-70 41 °F ehs_th
1 Elec Stage for backup No/Yes No ehs_back
Electrical Pulldown Time 0-60 0 min ehs_pull
Quick EHS for Defrost No/Yes No ehs_defr
Night control
Start Hour 00:00-24:00 00:00 nh_start
End Hour 00:00-24:00 00:00 nh_end
Capacity Limit 0-100 100 % nh_cnfg
Ice Mode Enable No/Yes No ice_cnfg
Menu Description Select No/Yes Yes menu_des
Pass For All User Config No/Yes No all_pass
NOTES: 3. Configuration 2 (4-20mA Control) shall require an Energy Manage-
1. Flow checked if pump off needed when a command is sent to the ment Module. Configuration 1 Switch Demand limit provides 3 step
primary pump to prevent cooler from freezing in winter conditions. demand limit if an Energy Management Module is present. Other-
Command will set the cooler flow switch to closed while the con- wise, only one step is allowed.
trols stop the cooler pump. The controls may then generate an
alarm. If this decision is active, the cooler flow switch is not
checked when the cooler pump is stopped.
2. If cooling reset select set point has been selected the set point
based on 4 to 20 mA input signal through ComfortLink controls,
then a 4 to 20 mA reset function shall be ignored. Configuration
3 (4-20mA Control) and 4 (Space Temperature) shall require an
Energy Management Module.
118
Table O — Setpoint Display Tables
SETPOINT COOLING
Cooling Setpoint 1 –20.0-78.8 44.0 °F csp1
Cooling Setpoint 2 –20.0-78.8 44.0 °F csp2
Cooling Ice Setpoinp –20.0-32.0 44.0 °F ice_sp
OAT No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oatcr_no
OAT Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oatcr_fu
Delta T No Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_cr_no
Delta T Full Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_cr_fu
Current No Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_cr_no
Current Full Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_cr_fu
Space T No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F spacr_no
Space T Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F spacr_fu
Cooling Reset Deg. Value –30-30 0.0 ^F cr_deg
Cooling Ramp Loading 0.2-2.0 1.0 ^F cramp_sp
HEATING
Heating Setpoint 1 68.0-122.0 100.0 °F hsp1
Heating Setpoint 2 68.0-122.0 100.0 °F hsp2
OAT No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oathr_no
OAT Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oathr_fu
Delta T No Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_hr_no
Delta T Full Reset Value 0- 25 0.0 ^F dt_hr_fu
Current No Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_hr_no
Current Full Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_hr_fu
Heating Reset Deg. Value –30-30 0.0 ^F hr_deg
Heating Ramp Loading 0.2-2.0 1.0 ^F hramp_sp
AUTO CHANGEOVER
Cool Changeover Setpt 39-122 75.0 °F cauto_sp
Heat Changeover Setpt 32-115 64.0 °F hauto_sp
MISCELLANEOUS
Switch Limit Setpoint 1 0-100 100 % lim_sp1
Reclaim Setpoint 95.0-122.0 122.0 °F rsp
Reclaim Deadband 5-27 9.0 ^F hr_deadb
Head Setpoint 40.0-122.0 95.0 °F head_stp
Fan Max Speed 0-100 100 % fan_smax
119
Table P — Maintenance Display Tables
DEFROSTM CIR A DEFROST CONTROL
[Table for display Exchanger Frost Factor 0-100 % frost_a
only. Forcing is not Next Sequence Allowed in nnn min def_se_a
supported on this Defrost Active? True/False mode[19]
maintenance Defrost Temperature ±nnn.n °F DEFRT_A
screen.]
Defrost Duration nnn min defr_dua
Fan Sequence Started n def_fa_a
Override State nn over_d_a
Mean SST Calculation ±nnn.n °F sst_dm_a
Delta: OAT - Mean SST ±nnn.n ^F delt_a
Reference Delta ±nnn.n ^F delt_r_a
Delta - Reference Delta ±nnn.n °F delt_v_a
Frost Integrator Gain n.n fr_int_a
Defrost Fan Start Cal A 0.00 psi def_ca_a
Defrost Fan Offset Cal A 0.00 psi def_of_a
CIR B DEFROST CONTROL
Exchanger Frost Factor 0-100 % frost_b
Next Sequence Allowed in nnn min def_se_b
Defrost Active? True/False mode[20]
Defrost Temperature ±nnn.n °F DEFRT_B
Defrost Duration nnn min defr_dub
Fan Sequence Started? n def_fa_b
Override State nn over_d_b
Mean SST calculation ±nnn.n °F sst_dm_b
Delta: OAT - Mean SST ±nnn.n ^F delt_b
Reference Delta ±nnn.n ^F delt_r_b
Delta - Reference Delta ±nnn.n ^F delt_v_b
Frost Integrator Gain n.n fr_int_b
Defrost Fan Start Cal B 0.00 psi def_ca_b
Defrost Fan Offset Cal B 0.00 psi def_of_b
FANCTRL Cir A SCT Control Point °F sct_sp_a
Cir A SCT Candidate °F sct_fu_a
Cir A Fan Drive Power kW drva_pwr
Cir A Fan Drive Version drva_ver
Cir B SCT Control Point °F sct_sp_b
Cir B SCT Candidate °F sct_fu_b
Cir B Fan Drive Power kW drvb_pwr
Cir B Fan Drive Version drvb_ver
Cir C SCT Control Point °F sct_sp_c
Cir C SCT Candidate °F sct_fu_c
Cir C Fan Drive Power kW drvc_pwr
Cir C Fan Drive Version drvc_ver
LAST_POR Power On 1: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on1
Power On 1: hour-minute nnnn time_on1
PowerDown 1:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of1
PowerDown 1:hour-minute nnnn time_of1
Power On 2: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on2
120
Table P — Maintenance Display Tables (cont)
LOADFACT Average Ctrl Water Temp ±nnn.n °F ctrl_avg
Differential Water Temp ±nnn.n °F diff_wt
Water Delta T ±nnn.n ^F delta_t
Control Point ±nnn.n °F CTRL_PNT
Reset Amount ±nnn.n ^F reset
Controlled Temp Error ±nnn.n ^F tp_error
Actual Capacity nnn % cap_t
Actual Capacity Limit nnn % cap_lim
Current Z Multiplier Val ±n.n zm
Load/Unload Factor ±nnn.n % smz
Active Stage Number nn cur_stag
Active Capacity Override nn over_cap
EXV Position Limit Cir A nnn.n % exvlim_a

SH Setpoint Circuit A nn.n ^F sh_sp_a
Cooler Exchange DT Cir A nn.n ^F pinch_a
Cooler Pinch Ctl Point A nn.n ^F pinch_spa
EXV Override Circuit A nn ov_exv_a
EXV Position Limit Cir B nnn.n % exvlim_b
SH Setpoint Circuit B nn.n ^F sh_sp_b
Cooler Exchange DT Cir B nn.n ^F pinch_b
Cooler Pinch Ctl Point B nn.n ^F pinch_spb
EXV Override Circuit B nn ov_exv_b
EXV Position Limit Cir C nnn.n % exvlim_c
SH Setpoint Circuit C nn.n ^F sh_sp_c
Cooler Exchange DT Cir C nn.n ^F pinch_c
Cooler Pinch Ctl Point C nn.n ^F pinch_spc
EXV Override Circuit C nn ov_exv_c
EHS Ctrl Override nn over_ehs

Requested Electric Stage nn eh_stage
Electrical Pulldown? True/False Ehspulld
Required Cooling Power req_pow
Free Cool Override Cir A ov_fc_a
Free Cool Override Cir B ov_fc_b
MSTSLAVE MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL
Unit is Master or Slave Disable/Master/Slave mstslv
Master Control Type* Local/Remote/CCN ms_ctrl
Master/Slave Ctrl Active True/False ms_activ
Lead Unit is the Master/Slave lead_sel
Slave Chiller State† 0/1/2/3/4/5/6*** slv_stat
Slave Chiller Total Cap 0-100 % slv_capt
Lag Start Delay** 1-30 min l_strt_d
Lead/Lag Hours Delta* ±nnnnn hours ll_hr_d
Lead/Lag Changeover?** Yes/No ll_chang
Lead Pulldown? Yes/No ll_pull
Master/Slave Error nn ms_error
Max Available Capacity?†† Yes/No cap_max
OCCDEFCM/ Current Mode (1=occup.) 0/1 MODE
OCC1PO1S Current Occp Period # 1 to 8 PER_NO
OCC2PO2S Timed-Override in Effect Yes/No OVERLAST
Timed-Override Duration 0-4 hours OVR_HRS
Current Occupied Time 00:00-23:59 STRTTIME
Current Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 ENDTIME
Next Occupied Day Mon-Sun NXTOCDAY
Next Occupied Time 00:00-23:59 NXTOCTIM
Next Unoccupied Day Mon-Sun NXTUNDAY
Next Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 NXTUNTIM
Prev Unoccupied Day Mon-Sun PRVUNDAY
Prev Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 PRVUNTIM
PR_LIMIT Discharge A Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sdt_m_a
[Table for display Discharge A Temp Rate ±nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_a
only. Used for Discharge A Gas Limit ±nnn.n °F sdtlim_a
Cooling and Heat Suction A Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sst_m_a
Pump Compressor Discharge A Tp Average 2 ±nnn.n ^F sdt_m2_a
Envelope.]
Discharge A Temp Limit2 ±nnn.n ^F sdtlim2a
Discharge B Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sdt_m_b
Discharge B Temp Rate ±nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_b
Discharge B Gas Limit ±nnn.n °F sdtlim_b
Suction B Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sst_m_b
Discharge C Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sdt_m_c
Discharge C Temp Rate ±nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_c
Discharge C Gas Limit ±nnn.n °F sdtlim_c
Suction C Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sst_m_c
121
Table P — Maintenance Display Tables (cont)
SERMAINT Reset Maintenance Alert
1 to 6: reset individually nn S_RESET forcible
7: reset all
OPERATION WARNINGS
1 — Refrigerant Charge Normal/Low/Disable charge_m
2 — Water Loop Size Normal/Low/Disable wloop_m
GENERAL SERVICING DELAYS
3 — Pump 1 (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable cpump1_m
4 — Pump 2 (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable cpump2_m
5 — Reclaim Pump (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable hpump_m
6 — Water Filter (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable wfilte_m
*Always CCN for the slave chiller. *** 0 — Off and available
†Slave chiller chillstat value. 1 — On CCN
**This decision is consistent for Master chiller only. It shall be set by 2 — Not used
default to 0 for the slave chiller. 3 — Local mode
††This item is true when chiller has loaded its total available capacity 4 — Restart after power failure
tonnage. 5 — Shut down due to fault
6 — Communication failure
Table Q — Service Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS
CP_UNABL1,2 Compressor A1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a1
Compressor A2 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a2
Compressor B1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b1
Compressor C1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c1
MAINTCFG MAINTENANCE CONFIG
Servicing Alert Enable/Disable Disable s_alert
Refrigerant Charge Ctrl Enable/Disable Disable charge_c
Water Loop Control Enable/Disable Disable wloop_c
CPump 1 Ctl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 cpump1_c
CPump 2 Ctl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 cpump2_c
HPump Ctrl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 hpump_c
Water Filter Ctrl (days) 0-1000 0 wfilte_c
SERVICE13 Cooler Fluid Type 1-3 1 flui_typ
Entering Fluid Control Yes/No No ewt_opt
Prop PID Gain Varifan –20.0-20.0 2.0 hd_pg
Int PID Gain Varifan –5.0-5.0 0.2 hd_ig
Deri PID Gain Varifan –20.0-20.0 0.4 hd_dg
EXV A Superheat 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_a
Setpoint
EXV B Superheat 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_b
Setpoint
EXV C Superheat 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_c
Setpoint
EXV MOP Setpoint 30.8-50.0 50.0 °F mop_sp
High Pressure Threshold 500-640 609 psi hp_th
Cooler Heater Delta Spt 1-6 2 ^F heatersp
Brine Freeze Setpoint –20-34 34 °F lowestsp
Minimum LWT Setpoint 38 °F mini_lwt
Auto Start When SM Lost Enable/Disable Disable auto_sm
Auto Z Multiplier Setpt 4-10 6 zm_spt
Maximum Z Multiplier 1.0-6.0 6.0 hc_zm
Recl Valve Min Position 0-50 20 % min_3w
Recl Valve Max Position 20-100 100 % max_3w
User Password 0-150 11 N/A use_pass
Service Password 0-150 88 N/A ser_pass
SPM Board Configuration 0 or 1 for each 00001010 spm_conf
digit
Maximum Ducted Fan 0-100 100 % fan_max
Speed
122
Table Q — Service Display Tables (cont)
TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS
UPDHRFAN4 TABLE TO BE USED
FOR RUN TIMES AND
START UPDATE IN
CASE OF CONTROL
RETROFIT
FAN Operating Hours
WATER PUMP
UPDTHOUR5 TABLE TO BE USED
FOR RUN TIMES
UPDATE IN CASE OF
CONTROL RETROFIT
Machine Operating Hours nnnnn hours hr_mach
Machine Starts nnnnn st_mach
Compressor A1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a1
Compressor B1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b1
Compressor C1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_c1
NOTES: 4 This table shall be used for purposes of transplanting the devices on
1 Table used to disable compressors for maintenance purposes. The time in the event of a module hardware failure or software upgrade via
capacity control will consider that these compressors (once set to YES) downloading. It shall be usable only if all items are still null. Afterwards,
are failed manually (no alarm will appear). its access shall be denied.
2 All data will be re-initialized to “NO” at Power on reset on units using 5 This table shall be used for purposes of transplanting the devices on
pro_dialog display. For ComfortLink display, data shall be saved. time in the event of a module hardware failure or software upgrade via
3 This table shall be downloadable at any time. However, modified value downloading. It shall be usable only if all items are still null. Afterwards,
shall not be used by tasks until the unit is in OFF state. This shall not its access shall be denied.
apply to the Varifan gains that shall be modified at any time and used
immediately by the head pressure control tasks even if the unit is in
operation.
123
APPENDIX C — CCN ALARMS
Table R — CCN Alarm Descriptions

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE
Thermistor Failure
th-01 Water exchanger Entering Fluid Thermistor
th-02 Water exchanger Leaving Fluid Thermistor
th-03 Circuit A Defrost Thermistor
th-04 Circuit B Defrost Thermistor
th-08 Reclaim Condenser Entering Thermistor
th-09 Reclaim Condenser Leaving Thermistor
th-10 OAT Thermistor
th-11 MASTER/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor
th-12 Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor
th-13 Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor
th-14 Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor
th-18 Circuit A Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor
th-19 Circuit B Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor
th-21 Space Temperature Thermistor
Pressure Transducer Failure
Pr-01 Circuit A Discharge Transducer
Pr-02 Circuit B Discharge Transducer
Pr-03 Circuit C Discharge Transducer
Pr-04 Circuit A Suction Transducer
Pr-05 Circuit B Suction Transducer
Pr-06 Circuit C Suction Transducer
Pr-07 Circuit A Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer
Pr-08 Circuit B Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer
Communication with Slave Board Failure
Co-A1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A1
Co-B1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B1
Co-C1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C1
Co-E1 Loss of communication with EXV Board Number 1
Co-E2 Loss of communication with EXV Board Number 2
Co-F1 Loss of communication with Fan Board Number 1
Co-O1 Loss of communication with Free Cooling Board
Co-O2 Loss of communication with Electrical Heaters Board
Co-O3 Loss of communication with Energy Management NRCP2 Board
Co-O4 Loss of communication with Heat Reclaim Board
Ct-01 Circuit A Welded Contactor Failure
Ct-02 Circuit B Welded Contactor Failure
Ct-03 Circuit C Welded Contactor Failure
Process Failure
FC-n0 No factory configuration
FC-01 Illegal factory configuration Number #1 to nn
MC-nn Master chiller configuration error Number #1 to nn
P-01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection
P-05 Circuit A Low Suction Temperature
P-06 Circuit B Low Suction Temperature
P-07 Circuit C Low Suction Temperature
P-08 Circuit A High Superheat
P-09 Circuit B High Superheat
P-10 Circuit C High Superheat
P-11 Circuit A Low Superheat
124
APPENDIX C — CCN ALARMS (cont)
Table R — CCN Alarm Descriptions (cont)
P-12 Circuit B Low Superheat
P-13 Circuit C Low Superheat
P-14 Cooler Interlock Failure
P-15 Condenser Flow Switch Failure
P-16 Compressor A1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established
P-20 Compressor B1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established
P-24 Compressor C1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established
P-28 Electrical Box Thermostat or Power Reverse Phase Detection
P-29 Loss of communication with System Manager
P-30 Master/Slave communication Failure
P-31 Unit is in CCN emergency stop
P-32 Water pump #1 default
P-33 Water pump #2 default
P-34 Circuit A Reclaim Operation Failure
P-35 Circuit B Reclaim Operation Failure
P-37 Circuit A — Repeated high discharge gas overrides
P-38 Circuit B — Repeated high discharge gas overrides
P-39 Circuit C — Repeated high discharge gas overrides
P-40 Circuit A — Repeated low suction temp overrides
P-41 Circuit B — Repeated low suction temp overrides
P-42 Circuit C — Repeated low suction temp overrides
P-43 Low entering water temperature in heating
P-97 Water Exchanger Temperature Sensors Swapped
Service Failure
Sr-nn Service maintenance alert Number # nn (see Table 49)
Compressor Failure
A1-01 Compressor A1 Motor Temperature Too High
A1-02 Compressor A1 Crankcase Heater Failure
A1-03 Compressor A1 High Pressure Switch
A1-04 Compressor A1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range
A1-05 Compressor A1 Power Reset
A1-06 Compressor A1 Low Control Voltage Alert
B1-01 Compressor B1 Motor Temperature Too High
B1-02 Compressor B1 Crankcase Heater Failure
B1-03 Compressor B1 High Pressure Switch
125
APPENDIX C — CCN ALARMS (cont)
Table R — CCN Alarm Descriptions (cont)
B1-04 Compressor B1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range
B1-05 Compressor B1 Power Reset
B1-06 Compressor B1 Low Control Voltage Alert
Compressor Failure
C1-01 Compressor C1 Motor Temperature Too High
C1-02 Compressor C1 Crankcase Heater Failure
C1-03 Compressor C1 High Pressure Switch
C1-04 Compressor C1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range
C1-05 Compressor C1 Power Reset
C1-06 Compressor C1 Low Control Voltage Alert
V0-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit A
V1-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit B
V2-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit C
126
APPENDIX D — R-410A PRESSURE VS. TEMPERATURE
Table S — R410A Pressure vs. Temperature Chart

PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C
12 –37.7 –38.7 114 37.8 3.2 216 74.3 23.5 318 100.2 37.9 420 120.7 49.3 522 137.6 58.7
14 –34.7 –37.1 116 38.7 3.7 218 74.9 23.8 320 100.7 38.2 422 121.0 49.4 524 137.9 58.8
16 –32.0 –35.6 118 39.5 4.2 220 75.5 24.2 322 101.1 38.4 424 121.4 49.7 526 138.3 59.1
18 –29.4 –34.1 120 40.5 4.7 222 76.1 24.5 324 101.6 38.7 426 121.7 49.8 528 138.6 59.2
20 –26.9 –32.7 122 41.3 5.2 224 76.7 24.8 326 102.0 38.9 428 122.1 50.1 530 138.9 59.4
22 –24.5 –31.4 124 42.2 5.7 226 77.2 25.1 328 102.4 39.1 430 122.5 50.3 532 139.2 59.6
24 –22.2 –30.1 126 43.0 6.1 228 77.8 25.4 330 102.9 39.4 432 122.8 50.4 534 139.5 59.7
26 –20.0 –28.9 128 43.8 6.6 230 78.4 25.8 332 103.3 39.6 434 123.2 50.7 536 139.8 59.9
28 –17.9 –27.7 130 44.7 7.1 232 78.9 26.1 334 103.7 39.8 436 123.5 50.8 538 140.1 60.1
30 –15.8 –26.6 132 45.5 7.5 234 79.5 26.4 336 104.2 40.1 438 123.9 51.1 540 140.4 60.2
32 –13.8 –25.4 134 46.3 7.9 236 80.0 26.7 338 104.6 40.3 440 124.2 51.2 544 141.0 60.6
34 –11.9 –24.4 136 47.1 8.4 238 80.6 27.0 340 105.1 40.6 442 124.6 51.4 548 141.6 60.9
36 –10.1 –23.4 138 47.9 8.8 240 81.1 27.3 342 105.4 40.8 444 124.9 51.6 552 142.1 61.2
38 –8.3 –22.4 140 48.7 9.3 242 81.6 27.6 344 105.8 41.0 446 125.3 51.8 556 142.7 61.5
40 –6.5 –21.4 142 49.5 9.7 244 82.2 27.9 346 106.3 41.3 448 125.6 52.0 560 143.3 61.8
42 –4.5 –20.3 144 50.3 10.2 246 82.7 28.2 348 106.6 41.4 450 126.0 52.2 564 143.9 62.2
44 –3.2 –19.6 146 51.1 10.6 248 83.3 28.5 350 107.1 41.7 452 126.3 52.4 568 144.5 62.5
46 –1.6 –18.7 148 51.8 11.0 250 83.8 28.8 352 107.5 41.9 454 126.6 52.6 572 145.0 62.8
48 0.0 –17.8 150 52.5 11.4 252 84.3 29.1 354 107.9 42.2 456 127.0 52.8 576 145.6 63.1
50 1.5 –16.9 152 53.3 11.8 254 84.8 29.3 356 108.3 42.4 458 127.3 52.9 580 146.2 63.4
52 3.0 –16.1 154 54.0 12.2 256 85.4 29.7 358 108.8 42.7 460 127.7 53.2 584 146.7 63.7
54 4.5 –15.3 156 54.8 12.7 258 85.9 29.9 360 109.2 42.9 462 128.0 53.3 588 147.3 64.1
56 5.9 –14.5 158 55.5 13.1 260 86.4 30.2 362 109.6 43.1 464 128.3 53.5 592 147.9 64.4
58 7.3 –13.7 160 56.2 13.4 262 86.9 30.5 364 110.0 43.3 466 128.7 53.7 596 148.4 64.7
60 8.6 –13.0 162 57.0 13.9 264 87.4 30.8 366 110.4 43.6 468 129.0 53.9 600 149.0 65.0
62 10.0 –12.2 164 57.7 14.3 266 87.9 31.1 368 110.8 43.8 470 129.3 54.1 604 149.5 65.3
64 11.3 –11.5 166 58.4 14.7 268 88.4 31.3 370 111.2 44.0 472 129.7 54.3 608 150.1 65.6
66 12.6 –10.8 168 59.0 15.0 270 88.9 31.6 372 111.6 44.2 474 130.0 54.4 612 150.6 65.9
68 13.8 –10.1 170 59.8 15.4 272 89.4 31.9 374 112.0 44.4 476 130.3 54.6 616 151.2 66.2
70 15.1 –9.4 172 60.5 15.8 274 89.9 32.2 376 112.4 44.7 478 130.7 54.8 620 151.7 66.5
72 16.3 –8.7 174 61.1 16.2 276 90.4 32.4 378 112.6 44.8 480 131.0 55.0 624 152.3 66.8
74 17.5 –8.1 176 61.8 16.6 278 90.9 32.7 380 113.1 45.1 482 131.3 55.2 628 152.8 67.1
76 18.7 –7.4 178 62.5 16.9 280 91.4 33.0 382 113.5 45.3 484 131.6 55.3 632 153.4 67.4
78 19.8 –6.8 180 63.1 17.3 282 91.9 33.3 384 113.9 45.5 486 132.0 55.6 636 153.9 67.7
80 21.0 –6.1 182 63.8 17.7 284 92.4 33.6 386 114.3 45.7 488 132.3 55.7 640 154.5 68.1
82 22.1 –5.5 184 64.5 18.1 286 92.8 33.8 388 114.7 45.9 490 132.6 55.9 644 155.0 68.3
84 23.2 –4.9 186 65.1 18.4 288 93.3 34.1 390 115.0 46.1 492 132.9 56.1 648 155.5 68.6
86 24.3 –4.3 188 65.8 18.8 290 93.8 34.3 392 115.5 46.4 494 133.3 56.3 652 156.1 68.9
88 25.4 –3.7 190 66.4 19.1 292 94.3 34.6 394 115.8 46.6 496 133.6 56.4 656 156.6 69.2
90 26.4 –3.1 192 67.0 19.4 294 94.8 34.9 396 116.2 46.8 498 133.9 56.6 660 157.1 69.5
92 27.4 –2.6 194 67.7 19.8 296 95.2 35.1 398 116.6 47.0 500 134.0 56.7 664 157.7 69.8
94 28.5 –1.9 196 68.3 20.2 298 95.7 35.4 400 117.0 47.2 502 134.5 56.9 668 158.2 70.1
96 29.5 –1.4 198 68.9 20.5 300 96.2 35.7 402 117.3 47.4 504 134.8 57.1 672 158.7 70.4
98 30.5 –0.8 200 69.5 20.8 302 96.6 35.9 404 117.7 47.6 506 135.2 57.3 676 159.2 70.7
100 31.2 –0.4 202 70.1 21.2 304 97.1 36.2 406 118.1 47.8 508 135.5 57.5 680 159.8 71.0
102 32.2 0.1 204 70.7 21.5 306 97.5 36.4 408 118.5 48.1 510 135.8 57.7 684 160.3 71.3
104 33.2 0.7 206 71.4 21.9 308 98.0 36.7 410 118.8 48.2 512 136.1 57.8 688 160.8 71.6
106 34.1 1.2 208 72.0 22.2 310 98.4 36.9 412 119.2 48.4 514 136.4 58.0 692 161.3 71.8
108 35.1 1.7 210 72.6 22.6 312 98.9 37.2 414 119.6 48.7 516 136.7 58.2 696 161.8 72.1
110 35.5 1.9 212 73.2 22.9 314 99.3 37.4 416 119.9 48.8 518 137.0 58.3
112 36.9 2.7 214 73.8 23.2 316 99.7 37.6 418 120.3 49.1 520 137.3 58.5
127
APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS
WEEKLY
Compressor Check Oil Level.
Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary.
Condenser
Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and industrial applications.
Controls Review Alarm/Alert History.
MONTHLY
Cooler Inspect water pumps.
Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than ±2°F (1.2°C) variance from calibrated
Controls thermometer.
Check accuracy of transducers, replace if greater than ±5 psi (34.47 kPa) variance.
Check refrigerant charge level.
Refrigerant System Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrigerant loss and presence of moisture.
Perform leak test.
QUARTERLY
Compressor Check crankcase heater operation.
Controls Check chilled water flow switch operation.
Condenser Check all condenser fans for proper operation.
Refrigerant System Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks, repair as necessary.
Inspect pump seal, if equipped with a hydronic pump package.
Hydronic System
Lubricate pump motor as required.
Starter Inspect all contactors.
ANNUALLY
Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze is present in the chilled water loop, if
applicable.
Cooler Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.
Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.
Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.
Condenser Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they are securely fastened to the motor shaft.
Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components.
Controls Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.
Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.
Refrigerant System Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop, replace as necessary.
Hydronic System Check pump heater operation if equipped.
NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Mainte-
nance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.
128
APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)
CHECK CHECK OPERATOR

DATE OIL LEVEL CONDENSER ALARMS / REMARKS
INITIALS
COIL FAULTS
NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Mainte-

nance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.
129
30RB MAINTENANCE LOG FOR MONTHLY, QUARTERLY, AND ANNUAL CHECKS
Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Operator
UNIT SECTION ACTION UNIT ENTRY

Check Oil Level yes/no
Compressor Check Crankcase Heater Operation yes/no
Send Oil Sample Out for Analysis yes/no
Check Cooler Heater Operation yes/no
Check Chiller Water Loop yes/no
Cooler Check Chilled Water Strainers yes/no
Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI) PSI
Inspect Water Pumps yes/no
Inspect and Clean All Coils yes/no
Condenser Check all Condenser Fans for Proper Operation yes/no
Check Condition of Condenser Fan Blades yes/no
General Cleaning and Tightening Connections yes/no
Check Chilled Water Flow Switch Operation yes/no
Controls Perform Service Test yes/no
Confirm Accuracy of Pressure Transducers yes/no
130
Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors yes/no

General Tightening and Cleaning Connections yes/no
Starter
Inspect All Contactors yes/no
Check Refrigerant Charge Level yes/no
Verify Operation of EXVs and Record Position 0-100%
Record System Superheat deg. F
Check Moisture Sight Glass yes/no
System
Perform Leak Test yes/no
Check all Refrigerant Joints and Valves for yes/no
Refrigerant Leaks
Check Filter Driers yes/no
Annually
NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.
30RB SEASONAL SHUTDOWN LOG
Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Operator
UNIT SECTION ACTION ENTRY

Cooler Isolate and Drain Cooler
Do Not Disconnect Control Power Unless Cooler is
Controls Completely Drained
NOTES:
1. Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.
2. Refer to Installation Instructions for proper Winterization procedure.
131
APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION
The following section is used to configure the UPC Open con-
troller which is used when the BACnet1 communication option 9 0
is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in a separate
1
7 8
2 34
10's
enclosure below the main control box.
6
5
TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER
9 0
The user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is
1
7 8
2 34
1's
unique on the BACnet network. Perform the following proce-
6
5
dure to assign an address:
1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw ter- Fig. A — Address Rotary Switches
minal connector from the controller's power terminals BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS
labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address
each time power is applied to it. The UPC Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance
address. This Device Instance MUST be unique for the com-
2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the con- plete BACnet system in which the UPC Open controller is in-
troller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens digit stalled. The Device Instance is auto generated by default and is
of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones derived by adding the MAC address to the end of the Network
digit. Number. The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller
As an example in Fig. A, if the controller’s address is 25, point is 16101, but it can be changed using i-Vu® Tools or BACView
the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on the device. By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device
Ones (1's) switch to 5. Instance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of
1610120.
1. BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE (American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers).
BT485
TERMINATOR
BACNET
CONNECTION POWER LED
(BAS PORT)
Tx1 LED
Rx1 LED
Tx2 LED
Rx2 LED BACNET
BAUD RATE
8
67 9 DIP SWITCHES
01
EIA-485
45
23
JUMPERS ADDRESS
8
67 9 ROTARY
01
45
23 SWITCHES
RUN LED
ERROR LED
Fig. B — UPC Open Controller
132
APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)
CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/TP
Use the same baud rate and communication settings for all con-
trollers on the network segment. The UPC Open controller is
fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this protocol's
communications.
If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull the
screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals
labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP Switches
and jumpers each time power is applied to it.
Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS
Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP
switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table T. Fig. C — DIP Switches
Table T — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a daisy-
for MS/TP chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are 22 AWG
(American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance, twisted,
DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length is 2000 ft.
Off Off Off Off On Off Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on a
Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set to network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions due
EIA-485 and 2W. to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E.
The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches set To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:
for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP. 1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's
Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appropri- BAS Port.
ate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600, 19.2k, 2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and grounds.
38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. D and Table U. 3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s
Table U — Baud Selection Table screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.
NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network segment.
BAUD RATE DS2 DS1
4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC
9,600 Off Off
Open controller's power terminals if they are not currently
19,200 On Off
connected.
38,400 Off On
5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a
76,800 On On
module status report. To perform a module status report
WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/TP using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold
NETWORK the “FN” key then press the “.” key.
The UPC Open controller communicates using BACnet on an
MS/TP network segment communications at 9600 bps,
19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.
Fig. D — Network Wiring
133
Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation

To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator on to MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS
the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector. Recommendations are shown in Tables V and W. The wire
NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with it. jacket and UL temperature rating specifications list two accept-
To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products i-Vu® able alternatives. The Halar specification has a higher tempera-
Open Control System Master Prices. ture rating and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard
specification, and it is appropriate for use in applications where
the user is concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also
less likely to crack in extremely low temperatures.
NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum sig-
nal integrity.
Table V — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

SPECIFICATION RECOMMMENDATION
Cable Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable
Conductor 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)
Insulation Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.
Color Code Black/White
Twist Lay 2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal
Shielding Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire
SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D.
Jacket Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.
DC Resistance 15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal
Capacitance 12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor
Characteristic Impedance 100 Ohms nominal
Weight 12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)
SmokeGard 167°F (75°C)
UL Temperature Rating Halar -40 to 302°F (–40 to 150°C)
Voltage 300 Vac, power limited
Listing UL: NEC CL2P, or better
LEGEND
AWG — American Wire Gage
CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable
DC — Direct Current
FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer
NEC — National Electrical Code
O.D. — Outside Diameter
TC — Tinned Copper
UL — Underwriters Laboratories
134
Table W — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors
WIRING SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS
Connect Air Contractors
Wire Type Description Belden RMCORP Wire
International and Cable
22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for W221P-22227 — 25160PV CLP0520LC
MS/TP specifications.
Network (RS-485) 24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,
TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide W241P-2000F 82841 25120-OR —
for specifications.
Rnet 4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated. W184C-2099BLB 6302UE 21450 CLP0442
LEGEND
AWG — American Wire Gage
CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable
CMP — Communications Plenum Rated
FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer
TC — Tinned Copper
LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER’S
The user can use a BACview6 handheld keypad display unit or PROPERTIES
the Virtual BACview software as a local user interface to an The UPC Open device and ComfortLink control must be set to
Open controller. These items let the user access the controller the same CCN Address (Element) number and CCN Bus num-
network information. These are accessory items and do not ber. The factory default settings for CCN Element and CCN
come with the UPC Open controller. Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.
The BACview6 unit connects to the local access port on the If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are re-
UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must quired, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations
be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local must be changed.
access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will re- The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address
quire an additional USB link cable for connection. and Bus number in the ComfortLink control. These configura-
See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instructions tions can be changed using the scrolling marquee display or ac-
on connecting and using the BACview6 device. cessory Navigator handheld device.
To order a BACview6 Handheld (BV6H), consult Commercial Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)
Products i-Vu® Open Control System Master Prices. Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)
The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address
and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These configura-
tions can be changed using the accessory BACview6 display.
Navigation: BACview→CCN
Home: Element Comm Stat
Element: 1
Bus: 0
Fig. F — BACview6 Device Connection
135
If the UPC Open is used with the chiller application of Lead/ COMMUNICATION LEDS
Lag/Standby, all chillers and UPC Open’s CCN element num- The LEDs indicate if the controller is communicating with the
bers must be changed to a unique number in order to follow devices on the network. See Tables X and Y. The LEDs should
CCN specifications. In this application, there can only be a reflect communication traffic based on the baud rate set. The
maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus. higher the baud rate the more solid the LEDs become. See
For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC Fig. A for location of LEDs on UPC Open module.
Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/
Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY
must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger The UPC Open controller’s 10-year lithium CR2032 battery
on the CCN bus. provides a minimum of 10,000 hours of data retention during
For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC Open power outages.
defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/Lag/
Standby application is used, then the Carrier technician must IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open when
change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broadcaster replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data will
on the CCN bus. be lost.
TROUBLESHOOTING Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the bat-
If there are problems wiring or addressing the UPC Open con- tery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's po-
troller, contact Carrier Technical Support. larity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open controller.
NETWORK POINTS LIST
The points list for the controller is shown in Table Z.
Table X — LED Status Indicators
LED STATUS
Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on
Power the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition that
caused the fault returns to normal.
Rx Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
Tx Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is a Tx LED for Ports 1 and 2.
Run Lights based on controller status. See Table Y.
Error Lights based on controller status. See Table Y.
Table Y — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication
RUN LED ERROR LED STATUS
2 flashes per second Off Normal
2 flashes per second 2 flashes, alternating with Run LED Five minute auto-restart delay after system error
2 flashes per second 3 flashes, then off Controller has just been formatted
2 flashes per second 1 flash per second Controller is alone on the network
2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted
5 flashes per second On Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running
5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running
7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Ten second recovery period after brownout
14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout
136
Table Z — Network Points List

CCN POINT READ/ DEFAULT BACNET BACNET
POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS RANGE
NAME WRITE VALUE OBJECT ID OBJECT NAME
Active Demand Limit Val DEM_LIM R/W % N/A 0-100 AV:1 dem_lim_1
Air Cond Entering Valv A hr_ea_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:4 hr_ea_a_1
Air Cond Entering Valv B hr_ea_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:5 hr_ea_b_1
Air Cond Leaving Valve A hr_la_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:6 hr_la_a_1
Air Cond Leaving Valve B hr_la_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:7 hr_la_b_1
Alarm Relay Status ALARMOUT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:8 alarmout_1
0=Normal,
Alarm State ALM R N/A N/A 1=Partial, AV:2 alm_1
2=Shutdown
Alert Relay Status ALERT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:9 alert_1
Auto Changeover Active Mode_12 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:10 mode_12_1
Boiler Active Mode_17 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:11 mode_17_1
Boiler Command BOILER R N/A N/A On/Off BV:12 boiler_1
CCN Chiller Start/Stop CHIL_S_S R/W N/A N/A Enable/Disable BV:1500 chil_s_s_1
Chiller Capacity Signal CAPT_010 R volts N/A ±nn.n AV:3 capt_010_1
Chiller Occupied? CHIL_OCC R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:1501 chil_occ_1
CHWS Temperature - Prime Variable CHWSTEMP R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:1612 chwstemp_1
Cir A Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_a1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:13 cp_a1_ht_1
Cir A Compressor 1 Output CP_A1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:14 cp_a1_1
Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpa1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:4 cpa1_cur_1
Cir A Discharge Pressure DP_A R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1601 dp_a_1
Cir A EXV Position EXV_A R % N/A 0-100 AV:8 exv_a_1
Cir A Fan Output DO # 1 fan_a1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:21 fan_a1_1
Cir A Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_A R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:9 fan_st_a_1
Cir A Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_a R % N/A 0-100 AV:10 hd_pos_a_1
Cir A Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_A R N/A N/A On/Off BV:27 hgbp_v_a_1
Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpa1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:11 cpa1_tmp_1
Cir A Percent Total Capacity CAPA_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:15 capa_t_1
Cir A Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_A R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:1602 sct_a_1
Cir A Saturated Suction Temp SST_A R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:1603 sst_a_1
Cir A Suction Gas Temperature SUCT_T_A R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:16 suct_t_a_1
Cir A Suction Pressure SP_A R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:1600 sp_a_1
Cir A Suction Superheat Temp SH_A R ^F N/A ±nnn.n AV:17 sh_a_1
Cir B Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_b1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:28 cp_b1_ht_1
Cir B Compressor 1 Output CP_B1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:29 cp_b1_1
Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpb1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:18 cpb1_cur_1
137
Table Z — Network Points List (cont)
Cir B Discharge Pressure DP_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1605 dp_b_1
Cir B EXV Position EXV_B R % N/A 0-100 AV:22 exv_b_1
Cir B Fan Output DO # 1 fan_b1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:36 fan_b1_1
Cir B Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_B R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:23 fan_st_b_1
Cir B Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_b R % N/A 0-100 AV:24 hd_pos_b_1
Cir B Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_B R N/A N/A On/Off BV:42 hgbp_v_b_1
Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpb1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:25 cpb1_tmp_1
Cir B Percent Total Capacity CAPB_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:29 capb_t_1
Cir B Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_B R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:30 sct_b_1
Cir B Saturated Suction Temp SST_B R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:31 sst_b_1
Cir B Suction Gas Temperature UCT_T_B R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:32 suct_t_b_1
Cir B Suction Pressure SP_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:33 sp_b_1
Cir B Suction Superheat Temp SH_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:34 sh_b_1
Cir C Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_c1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:43 cp_c1_ht_1
Cir C Compressor 1 Output CP_C1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:44 cp_c1_1
Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpc1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:35 cpc1_cur_1
Cir C Discharge Pressure DP_C R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1609 dp_c_1
Cir C EXV Position EXV_C R % N/A 0-100 AV:39 exv_c_1
Cir C Fan Output DO # 1 fan_c1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:51 fan_c1_1
Cir C Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_C R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:40 fan_st_c_1
Cir C Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_c R % N/A 0-100 AV:41 hd_pos_c_1
Cir C Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_C R N/A N/A On/Off BV:57 hgbp_v_c_1
Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpc1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:42 cpc1_tmp_1
Cir C Percent Total Capacity CAPC_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:46 capc_t_1
Cir C Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_C R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:47 sct_c_1
Cir C Saturated Suction Temp SST_C R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:48 sst_c_1
Cir C Suction Gas Temperature SUCT_T_C R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:49 suct_t_c_1
Cir C Suction Pressure SP_C R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:50 sp_c_1
Cir C Suction Superheat Temp SH_C R ^F N/A ±nnn.n AV:51 sh_c_1
Circuit A Fan #1 Hours hr_fana1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:52 hr_fana1_1
138
Circuit B Fan #1 Hours hr_fanb1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:58 hr_fanb1_1
Circuit C Fan #1 Hours hr_fanc1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:64 hr_fanc1_1
0=Auto
1=A Lead
Circuit Loading Sequence lead_cir R/W N/A 0 AV:70 lead_cir_1
2=B Lead
3=C Lead
Compressor A1 Hours HR_CP_A1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:71 hr_cp_a1_1
Compressor A1 Starts st_cp_a1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:72 st_cp_a1_1
Compressor B1 Hours HR_CP_B1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:79 hr_cp_b1_1
Compressor B1 Starts st_cp_b1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:80 st_cp_b1_1
Compressor C1 Hours HR_CP_C1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:87 hr_cp_c1_1
Compressor C1 Starts st_cp_c1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:88 st_cp_c1_1
Control Point CTRL_PNT R/W °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:96 ctrl_pnt_1
Controlled Water Temp CTRL_WT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:95 ctrl_wt_1
1=Water,
Cooler Fluid Type flui_typ R N/A 1 2=Brine AV:97 flui_typ_1
3=Low Brine
Cooler Heater Active Mode_06 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:58 mode_06_1
Cooler Heater Command COOLHEAT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:59 coolheat_1
Cooler Pumps Rotation Mode_07 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:60 mode_07_1
0=No pump,
1=1 pump only,
2=2 pumps
auto,
Cooler Pumps Sequence pump_seq R/W N/A 0 AV:98 pump_seq_1
3=Pump 1
manual,
4=Pump 2
manual
Cooling Ice Setpoint ice_sp R/W ^F 1 -20-+32 AV:99 ice_sp_1
Cooling Ramp Loading cramp_sp R/W ^F 0 0.2-2.0 AV:100 cramp_sp_1
Cooling Reset Deg. Value cr_deg R/W °F 44 -30 -+30 AV:101 cr_deg_1
Cooling Setpoint 1 csp1 R/W °F 44 -20.0-+78.8 AV:102 csp1_1
Cooling Setpoint 2 csp2 R/W min N/A -20.0-+78.8 AV:103 csp2_1
Critical Alarm Status CRITICAL R N/A N/A On/Off BV:61 critical_1
Current Full Reset Value v_cr_fu R/W ma 0 0-20 AV:104 v_cr_fu_1
Current No Reset Value v_cr_no R/W ma 0 0-20 AV:105 v_cr_no_1
139
Current Setpoint SP R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:3500 chws_sp_1
Defrost Active On Cir A Mode_19 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:62 mode_19_1
Defrost Active On Cir B Mode_20 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:63 mode_20_1
Delta T Full Reset Value dt_cr_fu R/W ^F 0 0-25 AV:106 dt_cr_fu_1
Delta T No Reset Value dt_cr_no R/W ^F 0 0-25 AV:107 dt_cr_no_1
Demand Limit Active Mode_04 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:64 mode_04_1
0=None,
1=Switch
Demand Limit Type Select lim_sel R/W N/A 0 control, AV:108 lim_sel_1
2=4-20mA
Control
Electric Heat Active Mode_15 R N/A N/A 0-4/Off BV:67 mode_15_1
Electrical Box Safety ELEC_BOX R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:65 elec_box_1
Electrical Heat Stage EHS_STEP R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:66 ehs_step_1
Element Comm Status R N/A N/A BV:2999 element_stat_1
Emergency Stop EMSTOP R/W N/A N/A Enable/Disable BV:68 emstop_1
Equipment Alarm R N/A N/A BV:146 element_alarm_1
External Temperature OAT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:109 oat_1
Flow Checked if Pump Off pump_loc R/W N/A Yes Yes/No BV:69 pump_loc_1
Free Cooling Active Mode_13 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:70 mode_13_1
Free Cooling Disable Sw. FC_SW R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:72 fc_sw_1
Free Cooling Disable? FC_DSBLE R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:71 fc_dsble_1
Heat Reclaim Pump Hours hr_hpump R hours N/A nnnnn AV:112 hr_hpump_1
Heat Reclaim Select RECL_SEL R/W N/A N/A Yes/No BV:74 recl_sel_1
0=Cool,
Heat/Cool Select HC_SEL R/W N/A N/A 1=Heat, AV:110 hc_sel_1
2=Auto
0=Cool, 1=Heat
Heat/Cool Status HEATCOOL R N/A N/A 2=Stand-by, AV:111 heatcool_1
3=Both
Heating Low EWT Lockout Mode_16 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:73 mode_16_1
High DGT Circuit A Mode_24 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:75 mode_24_1
High DGT Circuit B Mode_25 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:76 mode_25_1
High DGT Circuit C Mode_26 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:77 mode_26_1
High Pres Override Cir A Mode_27 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:78 mode_27_1
High Pres Override Cir B Mode_28 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:79 mode_28_1
High Pres Override Cir C Mode_29 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:80 mode_29_1
Ice Done Storage Switch ICE_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:81 ice_sw_1
Ice Mode in Effect Mode_18 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:82 mode_18_1
Interlock Status LOCK_1 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:83 lock_1_1
Lag Capacity Limit Value LAG_LIM R % N/A nnn AV:113 lag_lim_1
Limit 4-20mA Signal LIM_ANAL R ma N/A ±nn.n AV:114 lim_anal_1
Limit Switch 1 Status LIM_SW1 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:84 lim_sw1_1
Limit Switch 2 Status LIM_SW2 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:85 lim_sw2_1
Local Schedule R N/A N/A BV:2 schedule_1
Low Suction Circuit A Mode_21 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:86 mode_21_1
Low Suction Circuit B Mode_22 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:87 mode_22_1
Low Suction Circuit C Mode_23 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:88 mode_23_1
mA For 0% Demand Limit lim_ze R/W mA 0 0-20 AV:117 lim_ze_1
mA For 100% Demand Limit lim_mx R/W mA 0 0-20 AV:118 lim_mx_1
Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH R hours N/A nnnnn AV:115 hr_mach_1
Machine Starts Number st_mach R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:116 st_mach_1
0= Disable,
Master/Slave Select ms_sel R/W N/A 0 1=Master, AV:119 ms_sel_1
2=Slave
Minutes Left for Start min_left R min N/A 0-15 AV:120 min_left_1
Night Low Noise Active Mode_09 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:89 mode_09_1
OAT Full Reset Value oatcr_fu R/W °F 14 14-125 AV:121 oatcr_fu_1
OAT No Reset Value oatcr_no R/W °F 0 0-25 AV:122 oatcr_no_1
Occupied Override Switch OCC_OVSW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:90 occ_ovsw_1
On/Off - Remote Switch ONOFF_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:91 onoff_sw_1
Optional Space Temp SPACETMP R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:123 spacetmp_1
Pass For All User Config all_pass R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:92 all_pass_1
Percent Total Capacity CAP_T R % N/A nnn AV:1700 cap_t_1
140
Pump Auto Rotation Delay pump_del R/W hours 48 24-3000 AV:124 pump_del_1
Pump Periodic Start Mode_08 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:93 mode_08_1
Pump Run Status PUMP_DEF R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:94 pump_def_1
Pump Sticking Protection pump_per R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:95 pump_per_1
Pumpdown Pressure Cir A PD_P_A R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:125 pd_p_a_1
Pumpdown Pressure Cir B PD_P_B R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:126 pd_p_b_1
Pumpdown Saturated Tmp A hr_sat_a R °F N/A n AV:127 hr_sat_a_1
Pumpdown Saturated Tmp B hr_sat_b R °F N/A n AV:128 hr_sat_b_1
Ramp Loading Active Mode_05 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:96 mode_05_1
Ramp Loading Select ramp_sel R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:97 ramp_sel_1
Ready or Running Status READY R N/A N/A On/Off BV:98 ready_1
Reclaim Active Mode_14 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:99 mode_14_1
Reclaim Condenser Flow condflow R N/A N/A On/Off BV:100 condflow_1
Reclaim Condenser Heater cond_htr R N/A N/A On/Off BV:101 cond_htr_1
Reclaim Condenser Pump CONDPUMP R N/A N/A On/Off BV:102 condpump_1
Reclaim Condenser Pump COND_PMP R N/A N/A On/Off BV:103 cond_pmp_1
Reclaim Deadband hr_deadb R/W ^F 9.0 5-27 AV:129 hr_deadb_1
Reclaim Entering Fluid HR_EWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:130 hr_ewt_1
Reclaim Leaving Fluid HR_LWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:131 hr_lwt_1
Reclaim Setpoint rsp R/W °F 122 95-122 AV:132 rsp_1
Reclaim Status Circuit A hrstat_a R N/A N/A n AV:133 hrstat_a_1
Reclaim Status Circuit B hrstat_b R N/A N/A n AV:134 hrstat_b_1
Reclaim Valve Position hr_v_pos R % N/A ±nnn.n AV:135 hr_v_pos_1
Remote Heat/Cool Switch HC_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:104 hc_sw_1
Remote Interlock Status REM_LOCK R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:105 rem_lock_1
Remote Reclaim Switch RECL_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:106 recl_sw_1
Remote Setpoint Switch SETP_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:107 setp_sw_1
Reset in Effect Mode_03 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:108 mode_03_1
Reset/Setpoint 4-20mA In SP_RESET R ma N/A ±nn.n AV:136 sp_reset_1
Rotate Pumps Now? ROT_PUMP R/W N/A N/A Yes/No BV:109 rot_pump_1
0=Off,
1=Running
2=Stopping, 3=
Delay
4=Tripout,
Run Status STATUS R N/A N/A AV:137 status_1
5=Ready
6=Override,
7=Defrost
8=Run Test,
9=Test
Running Status RUNNING R N/A N/A On/Off BV:110 running_1
Second Setpoint in Use Mode_02 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:111 mode_02_1
Setpoint Occupied? SP_OCC R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:112 sp_occ_1
Shutdown Indicator State SHUTDOWN R N/A N/A On/Off BV:113 shutdown_1
Space T Full Reset Value spacr_fu R °F 14 14-125 AV:138 spacr_fu_1
Space T No Reset Value spacr_no R °F 14 14-125 AV:139 spacr_no_1
Staged Loading Sequence seq_typ R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:114 seq_typ_1
Starts Max During 1 Hour st_cp_mx R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:141 st_cp_mx_1
Starts/hr From Last 24 h st_cp_av R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:140 st_cp_av_1
Startup Delay in Effect Mode_01 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:115 mode_01_1
Sub Condenser Temp Cir A hr_subta R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:142 hr_subta_1
Sub Condenser Temp Cir B hr_subtb R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:143 hr_subtb_1
Subcooling Temperature A hr_subca R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:144 hr_subca_1
Subcooling Temperature B hr_subcb R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:145 hr_subcb_1
Superheat Override Cir A Mode_30 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:116 mode_30_1
Superheat Override Cir B Mode_31 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:117 mode_31_1
Superheat Override Cir C Mode_32 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:118 mode_32_1
Switch Limit Setpoint 1 lim_sp1 R/W % 100 0-100 AV:146 lim_sp1_1
cool_demand_level_
System Cooling Demand Level R N/A N/A AV:9006 1
System Demand Limiting R N/A N/A BV:3 dem_lmt_act_1
System Manager Active Mode_10 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:119 mode_10_1
141
System OAT Master R N/A N/A AV:80001 mstr_oa_temp_1
Unit Off to On Delay off_on_d R/W min 1 1-15 AV:149 off_on_d_1
User Defined Analog 1 R N/A N/A AV:2901 user_analog_1_1
User Defined Binary 1 R N/A N/A BV:2911 user_binary_1_1
Water Cond Enter Valve A hr_ew_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:120 hr_ew_a_1
Water Cond Enter Valve B hr_ew_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:121 hr_ew_b_1
Water Cond Leaving Val A hr_lw_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:122 hr_lw_a_1
Water Cond Leaving Val B hr_lw_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:123 hr_lw_b_1
Water Exchanger Entering Temp EWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:150 ewt_1
Water Exchanger Leaving Temp LWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:151 lwt_1
Water Pump #1 Command CPUMP_1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:124 cpump_1_1
Water Pump #1 Hours hr_cpum1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:152 hr_cpum1_1
Water Pump #2 Command CPUMP_2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:125 cpump_2_1
Water Pump #2 Hours hr_cpum2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:153 hr_cpum2_1
LEGEND
CCN — Carrier Comfort Network
CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint
DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature
DO — Discrete Output
OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature
R — Read
W — Write
142
APPENDIX G — SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES
LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE
CONTROL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The 30RB low ambient control is a variable frequency drive ON
(VFD) that varies the speed of the lead condenser fan in each DIP SWITCH 2
circuit to maintain the calculated head pressure control set
AOUT+ AOUT- P+ N-
point. The fan speed varies in proportion to the 0 to 10 vdc an-

alog signal produced by the AUX1 fan board. The display indi- 12 13 14 15
cates motor speed in Hz by default. These units may use a Sie-
mens Micromaster 420/440 VFD or a Schneider Altivar 21 and DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 24V+ 0V
212. The Schneider Altivar VFD performs the same functions ENABLE
RLB RLC
as Siemens drive. However, there are different control wiring JUMPER 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
connections and parameter programming.
Siemens VFD Operation 10V+ 0V AIN+ AIN-
The low ambient temperature head pressure controller is pre-
configured to operate from a 0 to 10 vdc analog input signal
present on terminals 3 (AIN+) and 4 (AIN–). Jumpers between 1 2 3 4
terminals 2 and 4 and terminals 5 and 8 are required for proper

operation. The drive is enabled based on an increase in the ana-
log input signal above 0 vdc. Output is varied from 0 Hz to 60
Hz as the analog signal increases from 0 vdc to 10 vdc. When
the signal is at 0 vdc the drive holds the fan at 0 rpm. The head + –
pressure control set point is not adjustable. The MBB deter- 0-10 VDC FROM FAN BOARD
mines the control set point as required. NOTE: For 575-v units, jumper terminals are 5 and 9.
Siemens VFD Replacement
If the controller is replaced the parameters in Table AA must Fig. H — Low Ambient Temperature Control Signal
be configured. See Fig. G and H. Wiring
Table AA — Siemens VFD Head Pressure Control DIP switch settings:
Parameters • DIP switch 1 is not used.
PARAMETER* VALUE DESCRIPTION • DIP switch 2 is the motor frequency: OFF = 50 Hz,
P0010 1 Enter Quick Commissioning
ON = 60 Hz)
P0311 1140 Rated Motor Speed Siemens VFD Programming
P3900 1 End of Quick Commissioning Parameter values can be altered via the operator panel. The op-
P0003 3 User Access Level erator panel features a five-digit, seven-segment display for
P0757 0.50 Control Signal Scaling Offset displaying parameter numbers and values, alarm and fault mes-
P0761 0.50 Control Signal Scaling Offset sages, set points, and actual values. See Fig. I. See Table AB
P1210 6 Automatic Restart Setting
for additional information on the operator panel.
P1310 10 Continuous Boost Parameter NOTE: The operator panel motor control functions are disabled
by default. To control the motor via the operator panel, parame-
*Remove jumper from terminals 5 and 8 (or terminals 5 and 9 for 575-v ter P0700 should be set to 1 and P1000 set to 1. The operator
units) before configuring parameter. Reinstall jumper after configuration
is complete. panel can be fitted to and removed from the drive while power is
applied. If the operator panel has been set as the I/O control
(P0700 = 1), the drive will stop if the operator panel is removed.
L3
L3
L2
N D D
+ -
L2 C C
L1
L
L1 U V W
Fig. I — Siemens VFD Low Ambient
Temperature Controller
T1 T2 T3
TO CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR
Fig. G — Low Ambient Temperature Control Power

Wiring
143
APPENDIX G — SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES (cont)
Changing Single Digits in Parameter Values with the Siemens in P0010=1) to the default settings. This will only occur in
VFD Operator Panel Quick Commissioning mode. See Fig. J.
To change the parameters value rapidly, the single digits of the dis- Reset the Siemens VFD to Factory Default
play can be changed by performing the following actions: To reset all parameters to the factory default settings, the fol-
1. Press P (parameter button) to enter the parameter value lowing parameters should be set as follows:
changing level. 1. Set P0010=30.
2. Set P0970 =1.
2. Press Fn (function button) to cause the far right digit to blink.
NOTE: The reset process can take up to 3 minutes to complete.
3. Change the value of this digit by pressing or . Troubleshooting the Siemens VFD with the Operating Panel
4. Press Fn again to cause the next digit to blink. Warnings and faults are displayed on the operating panel with
Axxx and Fxxx. The individual messages are shown in Table AC.
5. Perform steps 2 to 4 until the required value is displayed. If the motor fails to start, check the following:
• Power on T1, T2 and T3.
6. Press P to exit the parameter value changing level.
• Configuration jumpers in place.
NOTE: The function button may also be used to acknowledge a
fault condition. • Control signal between 1 vdc and 10 vdc on terminals 3 and 4.
Quick Commissioning with the Siemens VFD Operator Panel • P0010 = 0.
It is important that parameter P0010 be used for commission- • P0700 = 2.
ing and P0003 be used to select the number of parameters to be Siemens VFD Fault Messages (Tables AC and AD)
accessed. The P0010 parameter allows a group of parameters In the event of a failure, the drive switches off and a fault code
to be selected that will enable quick commissioning. Parame- appears on the display.
ters such as motor settings and ramp settings are included. At NOTE: To reset the fault code, use one of the following methods:
the end of the quick commissioning sequences, P3900 should
be selected, which, when set to 1, will carry out the necessary 1. Cycle the power to the drive.
motor calculations and clear all other parameters (not included
2. Press the Fn button on the operator panel.
Table AB — Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Operator Panel
PANEL/BUTTON FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Indicates Status The LCD displays the settings currently used by the converter.
Start Converter The Start Converter button is disabled by default. To enable this button set P0700 = 1.
Press the Stop Converter button to cause the motor to come to a standstill at the selected ramp
down rate. Disabled by default, to enable set P0700 = 1.
Stop Converter
0 Press the Stop Converter button twice (or hold) to cause the motor to coast to a standstill. This
function is always enabled.
Press the Change Direction button to change direction of rotation of the motor. Reverse is indicated
Change Direction by a minus (–) sign or a flashing decimal point. Disabled by default, to enable set P0700 = 1.
Press the Jog Motor button while the inverter has no output to cause the motor to start and run
jog Jog Motor at the preset jog frequency. The motor stops when the button is released. The Jog Motor
button is not enabled when the motor is running.
Use the Functions button to view additional information. Press and hold the button to display
the following information starting from any parameter during operation:
1. DC link voltage (indicated by d – units V).
2. Output current. (A)
3. Output frequency (Hz)
4. Output voltage (indicated by o – units V).
5. The value selected in P0005 (If P0005 is set to show any of the above [3, 4, or 5] then this
Functions
Fn will not be shown when toggling through the menu).
Press the Functions button repeatedly to toggle through displayed values.
Jump Function
Press of the Fn button from any parameter (rXXXX or PXXXX) to immediately jump to R0000,
when another parameter can be changed, if required. Return to R0000 and press the
Functions again to return.
P Access Parameters Allows access to the parameters.
Press the Increase Value button to increase the displayed value. To change the Frequency
Increase Value Setpoint using the operator panel set P1000 = 1.
Press the Decrease Value button to decrease the displayed value. To change the Frequency
Decrease Value Setpoint using the operating panel set P1000 = 1.
144
P0010 Start Quick Commissioning

0 Ready to Run
1 Quick Commissioning
30 Factory Setting
P0700 Selection of Command Source
NOTE: P0010 must always be set back to ‘0’ before operating (on/off/reverse)
the motor. However if P3900 = 1 is set after commissioning this 0 Factory Setting
is done automatically. 1 Basic Operator Panel
2 Terminal/Digital Inputs (default)
P0100 Operation
0 Power in kW; f default 50 Hz
1 Power in hp; f default 60 Hz P1000 Selection of Frequency Setpoint
2 Power in kW; f default 60 Hz 0 No frequency setpoint
1 Operator panel frequency control 
NOTE: Settings 0 and 1 should be changed using the DIP 2 Analog Setpoint (default)
switches to allow permanent setting.
P1080 Min. Motor Frequency

P0304 Rated Motor Voltage* Sets minimum motor frequency (0-650Hz) at which the motor
10 V — 2000 V will run independent of the frequency setpoint. The value set
Nominal motor voltage (V) from rating plate here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.
P0305 Rated Motor Current* P1082 Max. Motor Frequency

0 — 2 x inverter rated current (A) Sets maximum motor frequency (0-650Hz) at which the motor
Nominal motor current (A) from rating plate will run at independent of the frequency setpoint. The value set
here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.
P0307 Rated Motor Power*

0 kW — 2000 kW P1120 Ramp-Up Time
Nominal motor power (kW) from rating plate. 0 s - 650 s
If P0100 = 1, values will be in hp Time taken for the motor to accelerate from standstill up to
maximum motor frequency.
P0310 Rated Motor Frequency*

12 Hz — 650 Hz P1121 Ramp-Down Time
Nominal motor frequency (Hz) from rating plate 0 s - 650 s
Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor
frequency down to a standstill.
P0311 Rated Motor Speed*

0 — 4000 1/min
Nominal motor speed (rpm) from rating plate P3900 End Quick Commissioning
0 End Quick Commissioning without motor calculation or
factory reset.
1 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation and
factory reset (Recommended)
2 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation and with
I/O reset
3 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation but
*Motor-specific parameters — see motor rating plate. without I/O reset
NOTE: Shaded boxes are for reference only.
Fig. J — Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Flow Chart Quick Commissioning
145
Table AC — Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Fault Messages

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSES TROUBLESHOOTING
F0001 • Motor power does not correspond to the Check the following:
Overcurrent inverter power 1. Motor power (P0307) must correspond to inverter power (P0206)
• Motor lead short circuit 2. Motor cable and motor must have no short-circuits or ground faults
• Ground fault 3. Motor parameters must match the motor in use
4. Motor must not be obstructed or overloaded
After Steps 1-4 have been checked, increase the ramp time (P1120) and reduce the boost
level (P1310, P1311, P1312).
F0002 • DC-link voltage (r0026) exceeds trip level Check the following:
Overvoltage (P2172) 1. Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on rating plate
• Overvoltage can be caused either by too high 2. DC-link voltage controller must be enabled (P1240) and have parameters set
main supply voltage or if motor is in regenera- correctly
tive mode 3. Ramp-down time (P1121) must match inertia of load
• Regenerative mode can be caused by fast
ramp downs or if the motor is driven from an
active load
F0003 • Main supply failed Check the following:
Undervoltage • Shock load outside specified limits 1. Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on rating plate
2. Supply must not be susceptible to temporary failures or voltage reductions
F0004 • Ambient temperature outside of limits Check the following:
Drive • Fan failure 1. Fan must turn when inverter is running
Overtemperature 2. Pulse frequency must be set to default value
3. Air inlet and outlet points are not obstructed
4. Ambient temperature could be higher than specified for the drive.
F0005 • Drive overloaded Check the following:
Drive I2t • Duty cycle too demanding 1. Load duty cycle must lie within specified limits
• Motor power (P0307) exceeds drive power 2. Motor power (P0307) must match drive power (P0206)
capability (P0206)
F0011 • Motor overloaded 1. Check motor data
Motor • Motor data incorrect 2. Check loading on motor
Overtemperature I2t • Long time period operating at low speeds 3. Boost settings too high (P1310, P1311, P1312)
4. Check parameter for motor thermal time constant
5. Check parameter for motor I2t warning level
F0041 Stator resistance measurement failure 1. Check if the motor is connected to the drive
Stator Resistance 2. Check that the motor data has been entered correctly
Measurement Failure
F0051 Reading or writing of the non-volatile parameter 1. Factory reset and new parameters set
Parameter EEPROM Fault storage has failed 2. Replace drive
F0052 Reading of the powerstack information has failed Replace drive
Powerstack Fault or the data is invalid
F0060 Internal communications failure 1. Acknowledge fault
Asic Timeout 2. Replace drive if repeated
F0070 No setpoint received from communications 1. Check connections to the communications board
Communications board during telegram off time 2. Check the master
Board Setpoint Error
F0071 No response during telegram off time via USS 1. Check connections to the communications board
No Data for USS (RS232 (BOP link) 2. Check the master
Link) During
Telegram Off Time
F0072 No response during telegram off time via USS 1. Check connections to the communications board
No Data from USS (RS485 (COM link) 2. Check the master
Link) During
Telegram Off Time
F0080 • Broken wire Check connection to analog input
Analog Input - • Signal out of limits
Lost Input Signal
F0085 External fault is triggered via terminal inputs Disable terminal input for fault trigger
External Fault
F0101 Software error or processor failure 1. Run self test routines
Stack Overflow 2. Replace drive
F0221 PID Feedback below minimum value P2268 1. Change value of P2268
PI Feedback 2. Adjust feedback gain
Below Minimum Value
F0222 PID Feedback above maximum value P2267 1. Change value of P2267
PI Feedback Above 2. Adjust feedback gain
Maximum Value
F0450 Fault value 1. Inverter may run but certain actions will not function correctly
(Service Mode Only) 1 Some of the power section tests have failed 2. Replace drive
BIST Tests Failure 2 Some of the control board tests have failed
4 Some of the functional tests have failed
8 Some of the IO module tests have failed
16 The Internal RAM has failed its check on
power-up
LEGEND
I2t — Current Squared Time
146
Table AD — Siemens VFD Alarm Messages

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSES TROUBLESHOOTING
A0501 • Motor power does not correspond to the drive 1. Check whether the motor power corresponds to the drive power
Current Limit power 2. Check that the cable length limits have not been exceeded
• Motor leads are too short 3. Check motor cable and motor for short-circuits and ground faults
• Ground fault 4. Check whether the motor parameters correspond with the motor being used
5. Check the stator resistance
6. Increase the ramp-up-time
7. Reduce the boost
8. Check whether the motor is obstructed or overloaded
A0502 • Mains supply too high 1. Check that mains supply voltage is within allowable range
Overvoltage Limit • Load regenerative 2. Increase ramp down times
• Ramp-down time too short NOTE: If the vdc-max controller is active, ramp-down times will be automatically increased
A0503 • Mains supply too low Check main supply voltage (P0210)
Undervoltage Limit • Short mains interruption
A0504 Warning level of inverter heat-sink temperature 1. Check if ambient temperature is within specified limits
Drive (P0614) is exceeded, resulting in pulse fre- 2. Check load conditions and duty cycle
Overtemperature quency reduction and/or output frequency reduc- 3. Check if fan is turning when drive is running
tion depending on parameters set (P0610)
A0505 Warning level is exceeded; current will be Check if duty cycle is within specified limits
Drive I2t reduced if parameters set (P0610 = 1)
A0506 Heatsink temperature and thermal junction Check if duty cycle is within specified limits
Drive Duty Cycle model are outside of allowable range
A0511 Motor overloaded Check the following:
Motor 1. P0611 (motor I2t time constant) should be set to appropriate value
Overtemperature I2t 2. P0614 (Motor I2t overload warning level) should be set to suitable level
3. Are long periods of operation at low speed occurring
4. Check that boost settings are not too high
A0541 Motor data identification (P1910) selected or run- Wait until motor identification is finished
Motor Data ning
Identification Active
A0600 Software error —
RTOS Overrun Warning
LEGEND
I2t — Current Squared Time
Schneider Altivar VFD Operation Schneider Altivar VFD Replacement

The low ambient temperature head pressure controller is pre- For Altivar 212 VFDs, if the controller is replaced the parame-
configured to operate from a 0 to 10 vdc analog input signal ters in Table AE must be configured. It is recommended that the
present on terminals VIA and CC. A jumper between terminals configuration of the VFD is verified per Table AE prior to pro-
P24 and F is required for proper operation. The drive is en- ceeding. Also, the following must be wired (see Fig. G and H):
abled based on an increase in the analog input signal above 0 1. A jumper must be in place from terminal P24 to F.
vdc. Output is varied from 0 Hz to 60 Hz as the analog signal 2. Connect the red and black wires from fan board 0-10 VDC
increases from 0 vdc to 10 vdc. When the signal is at 0 vdc the output to terminal VIA and CC respectively.
drive holds the fan at 0 rpm. The head pressure control set
point is not adjustable. The MBB determines the control set 3. Connect the motor power wires T1, T2 and T3 respec-
point as required. The operating panel is shown in Fig. K. Re- tively to terminal U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 of the drive.
fer to the Quick Start Guide for how to access the program- 4. Connect the line power wires L1, L2 and L3 from control
ming mode, or the documentation available at http:// box respectively to terminal R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 of the
www.schneider-electric.com for a complete set of VFD param- drive.
eters, fault codes and troubleshooting information.
Table AE — Schneider Altivar 212 VFD Operating Parameters
PARAMETER NAME VALUE
uLu Rated Motor Voltage Nominal motor voltage(V) from rating plate
F201 VIA Speed Reference Level 1 5
F202 VIA Output Frequency Level 1 0
F203 VIA Speed Reference Level 2 100
F204 VIA Output Frequency Level 2 60
F401 Slip compensation 60%
F415 Rated Motor Current Nominal motor current(A) from rating plate
F417 Rated Motor Speed Nominal motor speed(RPM) from rating plate
F701 Keypad display: % or A/V 1
tHr Motor Rated Current Overload Setting Nominal motor current(A) from rating plate
uL Rated Motor Frequency 60 Hz
FH Maximum Frequency 60 Hz
LL Low Speed 0 Hz
UL High Speed 60 Hz
ACC Ramp-up Time 10 Sec
dEC Ramp-down Time 10 Sec
cnod Remote Mode Start/Stop Control 0 (Control terminal logic inputs)
Remote Mode Primary Speed reference
fnod 1 (VIA)
Source
147
1
4
2
RUN
5
%
PRG
3 MON Hz
Loc
Rem
MODE 8
6 9
ENT
7 10
RUN STOP
12 11
13 14
CALL CALL
LED/KEY DESCRIPTION LED/KEY DESCRIPTION
OUT OUT
Display Illuminates when a run command is applied to the drive MODE Press to select the Keypad mode. Modes are: Run
1 RUN LED controller. Flashes when a speed reference is present mode (default on power-up), Programming mode, and
9
with the run command. Monitoring mode. Can also be used to go back to the
Display Illuminates when Programming mode is active. Flashes previous menu.
2 PRG LED when -GrU menus are active. 10 Loc/Rem Switches between Local and Remote modes.
Display Illuminates when Monitoring mode is active. Flashes in ENT Press to display a parameter’s value or to save a
3 11
MON LED fault record display mode. changed value.
Display 4 digits, 7 segments 12 RUN LED Illuminates when the Run key is enabled.
4 Unit RUN Pressing this key when the RUN LED is illuminated
The % LED illuminates when a displayed numeric 13
Display starts the drive controller.
5 Unit LED value is a percentage. The Hz LED illuminates when a STOP Stop/reset key. In Local mode, pressing the STOP key
displayed numeric value is in hertz. causes the drive controller to stop based on the setting
Up/Down Depending on the mode, use the arrows to: navigate of parameter F721. In Remote mode, pressing the
6 arrows between the menus, change a value, or change the STOP key causes the drive controller to stop based on
speed reference when Up/Down LED (7) is lit. 14 the setting of parameter F603. The display will indicate
Up/Down Illuminates when the Up/Down arrows are controlling a flashing “E.” If F735 is set to 0 (default setting), press-
7 ing the stop key twice will reset all resettable faults if
LED the speed reference.
the fault condition has been resolved.
Loc/Rem Illuminates when Local mode is selected.
8 LED
Fig. K — Schneider Altivar 212 VFD Display Panel
148
INDEX
Actual start-up 42 Cooler head bolts tightening 55, 56-57 Low fluid temperature 55
Alarms and alerts 60 Cooler protection 55 Low-side protection 59
Alarm codes 62-67 Chilled water flow switch 56 Machine control 29
Alarm descriptions 68, 31-33 Flow rate 56 Maintenance 60, 35-38
BACnet communication option 40-50 Freeze protection 55 Minimum and maximum cooler flow
Boards Loss of fluid flow protection 55 rates table 44
Board addresses 16 Low fluid temperature 55 Minimum fluid loop volume 43
Capacity control 20 Plug components 55 Modular unit combinations 3
Capacity control overrides 23 Tightening cooler head bolts 55, 56-57 Navigator display 4
Compressor stages, circuit cycling 21 Tube plugging 55 Alarms mode 13
Compressor starts and run hours 20 Cooler pump control 29 Configuration mode 6-8
CCN Cooling set point selection 30 Inputs mode 5
ComfortLink communication wiring 16, 17 4 to 20 mA input 30 Operating mode 12
Interface 16 Configuration set point limits 30 Outputs mode 5-6
CCN alarm description 31-33 Control methods and cooling set points Pressure mode 3
CCN control 30 table 30 Run status mode 0-1
CCN global schedule 29 Dual switch 30 Service test mode 2
CCN tables 14-30 Ice mode 31 Set points mode 4
Chilled water flow switch 56 Set point 1 30 Temperature mode 3
Compressor protection 59 Set point 2 30 Time clock mode 9-12
Compressors 59 Set point occupancy 31 Navigator module 4
Oil charge 59 Crankcase heaters 59 Adjusting the backlight brightness 4
Replacement 59 Demand limit 39 Adjusting the contrast 4
System burnout cleanup procedure 59 switch controlled 39 Operating limitations 43
Condenser coils switch controlled configuration table 39 Flow rate requirements 43
Cleaning RTPF coils 56 CCN controlled 41 Minimum and maximum cooler flow
Cleaning MCHX coils 58 Externally powered 40 rates table 44
Condenser fans 58 Externally powered demand limit Minimum fluid loop volume 43
Configuration point conventions 3 configuration table 40 Temperatures 43
Configuration set point limits 30 Electronic expansion valve 7, 52-54 Voltage 43
Control methods 29 Cutaway view of 52 Plug components 55
CCN control 30 Filter drier 53 Recommended maintenance
CCN global schedule 29 Inspecting/opening 53 schedule 60, 35-38
Switch control 29 Installing motor 53 Refrigerant circuit 58
Time schedule 29 Liquid line service valve 53 Relief devices 59
Unit run status 30 Moisture liquid indicator 53 High-side protection 59
Controls 4-42 Troubleshooting procedure 52 Low-side protection 59
Board addresses 16 Flow rate 56 Safety considerations 1
Capacity control 20 Freeze protection 55 Safety devices 59
Carrier Comfort Network® interface 16 Head pressure control 24 Compressor protection 59
ComfortLink display menu structure 5 Fan staging 25 Crankcase heaters 59
Configuring the master chiller 18 High efficiency variable condenser fans 27 Scrolling marquee display 3
Configuring the slave chiller 19 Low ambient 26 Alarms mode 106
Control methods 29 Standard unit 24 Configuration mode 6-8
Control module communication 16 Heat Reclaim Option 48 Display menu structure 5
Cooler pump control 29 EMM Board 14 Inputs mode 5
Demand limit 39 Mode 14 46 Operating mode 12
Dual chiller control 17 Operation 50 Outputs mode 5-6
Electronic expansion valve board 8, 9 Control Schematic 92 Pressure mode 3
Emergency on/off switch 14 Local Display Table 0 Run status mode 0-1
Enable-off-remote contact switch 14 CCN Display Table 18 Service test mode 2
Energy management module 14, 14 Alarm Code Co.04 62, 71 Set points mode 4
Energy management module Alarm Code P.15 62, 74 Temperature mode 3
inputs and outputs 15 Alarm Code P.34 62, 75 Time clock mode 9-12
EXV1 board inputs and outputs 8 Alarm Code P.35 62, 75 Service 52-60
EXV2 inputs and outputs 9 Alarm Code Pr.07 62, 76 Compressors 59
Fan board 1 outputs 11 Alarm Code Pr.08 62, 76 Condenser fans 58
Fan board 2 outputs 12 Alarm Code th.08 62, 77 Cooler protection 55
Fan board 3 inputs and outputs 13 Alarm Code th.09 62, 77 Electronic expansion valve (EXV) 52
Fan boards 10 Alarm Code th.18 62, 78 MCHX coil maintenance and cleaning 58
General 3-4 Alarm Code th.19 62, 78 Refrigerant circuit 58
Heat reclaim 48 High-efficiency variable condenser fans 26 Relief devices 59
Local equipment network 16 Alarms, common 28 RTPF coil maintenance and cleaning 56
Low ambient head pressure Alarms, details 66 Safety devices 59
control 26, 52-57 Danfoss VLT required Start-up 42
Machine control 29 configurations 26 Actual start-up 42
Main Base Board 5 Fan drive operation 26 Operating limitations 43
Main Base Board inputs and outputs 6 Parameters, 6-fan circuits 27 Pre-start-up 42
Minimum load control 17 Parameters, common 27 System check 42
Minutes off time 17 Parameters reset at power cycle 27 Start-up and operation. See Start-up Checklist
Navigator™ module 4 High-side protection 59 Start-up checklist Cl-153 to Cl-162
Ramp loading 17 Local display tables 0-13 Switch control 29
Remote alarm and alert relays 41 Loss of fluid flow protection 55 System check 42
Reverse rotation board 14 Low ambient head pressure control 26 Temperature limits
Scroll protection module (SPM) 7 Danfoss VLT required Standard units 43
Scroll protection module inputs, outputs 8 configurations 26 Low ambient operation 43
Scrolling marquee display 3 Siemens or Schneider operating
Temperature reset 31 instructions 52-57
150
Temperature reset 31
4 to 20mA set point control 32
4 to 20mA temperature reset 36
4 to 20mA temperature reset
configuration 37
Chilled water temperature control 33
Outdoor air temperature reset 33
Outdoor air temperature reset
configuration table 43
Space temperature reset 36
Space temperature reset
configuration 37
Water temperature difference reset 32
Water temperature difference reset
configuration 34
Thermistors 78
Compressor suction gas temperature 78
Condensing entering fluid sensor 78
Condensing leaving fluid sensor 78
Cooler entering fluid sensor 78
Cooler leaving fluid sensor 78
Dual chiller LWT 78
Outdoor air temperature 78
Remote space temperature 78
Subcooled condenser gas
temperature 78
Typical space temperature sensor
wiring 79
Time schedule 29
Transducers 79
Troubleshooting 62-93
Sensors 78
Service test 82
Thermistors 78
Transducers 79
Tube plugging 55
Variable speed fan motors
Alarm details 66
© 2021 Carrier
Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg 151 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T
START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RB LIQUID CHILLER
NOTE: To avoid injury to personnel and damage to equipment or

property when completing the procedures listed in this start-up
checklist, use good judgment, follow safe practices, and adhere to
the safety considerations/information as outlined in preceding sec-
tions of this Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Trouble-
shooting document.
A. PROJECT INFORMATION
Job Name _______________________________________
Address ________________________________________
City _________________ State________ Zip _________
Installing Contractor ______________________________
Sales Office _____________________________________
Start-Up Performed By ____________________________
UNIT
Model _________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
B. PRELIMINARY EQUIPMENT CHECK (This section to be completed by installing contractor)
1. Is there any physical damage?  Yes  No
a. If yes, was it noted on the freight bill and has a claim been filed with the shipper?  Yes  No
b. Will this prevent start-up?  Yes  No
Description ____________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
2. Unit is installed level as per the installation instructions.  Yes  No
3. Power supply agrees with the unit nameplate.  Yes  No
4. Correct control voltage ________vac. Check transformer primary on 208/230 v.  Yes  No
5. Electrical power wiring is installed properly.  Yes  No
6. Unit is properly grounded.  Yes  No
7. Electrical circuit protection has been sized and installed properly.  Yes  No
8. Crankcase heaters energized for 24 hours before start-up.  Yes  No
9. Will this machine be controlled by a third party using BACnet/Lon/Modbus?  Yes  No
If yes, will the controls contractor be present at start-up?  Yes  No
Chilled Water System Check (This section to be completed by installing contractor)

1. All chilled water valves are open.  Yes  No
2. All piping is connected properly.  Yes  No
3. All air has been purged from the system.  Yes  No
4. Chilled water pump is operating with the correct rotation.  Yes  No
5. Chilled water pump starter interlocked with chiller.  Yes  No
6. Units without hydronic package, and units with hydronic package
installed on an open loop: inlet piping to cooler includes a 20 mesh strainer
within 10 ft. of unit.  Yes  No
7. Water loop volume greater than 3 gal/ton for air conditioning  Yes  No
or 6 gal/ton for process cooling and low ambient operation.
8. Has the water system been cleaned and flushed per the installation instructions?
Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg CL-1 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9. Proper loop freeze protection provided to ____ F (C).  Yes  No
Antifreeze type__________________ Concentration _____%.
(If antifreeze solution is not utilized on 30RB machines and the
minimum outdoor ambient is below 32°F (0C)
then items 10, 11, and 12 have to be completed to provide cooler
freeze protection to –20°F. Refer to Installation Instructions
for proper cooler winterization procedure.)
IMPORTANT: Adding antifreeze solution is the only certain means of
protecting the unit from freeze-up if the heater fails or electrical power is
interrupted or lost while temperatures are below 32°F (0C).
10. Outdoor piping wrapped with electric heater tape.  Yes  No
11. Cooler heaters installed and operational.  Yes  No
12. Is the unit equipped with low ambient head pressure control?  Yes  No
If yes, are wind baffles installed? (Required if chiller will run below 32°F  Yes  No
and be exposed to the wind.)
13. Are there any VFDs on the chilled water pumps?  Yes  No
a. Primary loop  Yes  No
b. Secondary loop  Yes  No
14. Chiller controls the pump(s)?  Yes  No
CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

a. If yes, have the pump interlocks been wired?  Yes  No
Preliminary start-up complete.
Installing/Mechanical Contractor ___________________________________________ Date ________________________
CL-2
C. UNIT START-UP (Qualified individuals only. Factory start-up recommended!)
Cooler B3)
Model ________________________________________ Model _________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________
Compressors
B4)
A1)
Model _________________________________________
Model ________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________
C1)
A2)
Model _________________________________________
Model ________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________
C2)
A3)
Model _________________________________________
Model ________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________
C3)
A4)
Model _________________________________________
Model ________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________
B1) C4)
Model _________________________________________
Model ________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________
SPM Address ___________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________
NOTE: SPM = Scroll Protection Module
B2)
Model ________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________ Hydronic Package
SPM Address ___________________________________ P1)
Model _________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
P2)
Model _________________________________________
Serial _________________________________________
1. All liquid line service valves located near EXVs are open.  Yes  No
2. All discharge service valves are open.  Yes  No
3. All suction service valves are open.  Yes  No
4. All compressor rack holddown bolts and the RED compressor
shipping brackets removed.  Yes  No
5. Leak check unit. Locate, repair and report any refrigerant leaks.  Yes  No
6. All terminals are tight.  Yes  No
7. All plug assemblies are tight.  Yes  No
8. All cables, thermistors and transducers have been inspected for cross wires.  Yes  No
9. All thermistors are fully inserted into wells.  Yes  No
10. All armatures move freely on contactors.  Yes  No
11. Cooler heaters installed and operational if equipped.  Yes  No
12. Voltage at terminal block is within unit nameplate range.  Yes  No
13. Check voltage imbalance: A-B______ A-C______B-C______
Average voltage = __________ (A-B + A-C + B-C)/3
Maximum deviation from average voltage = _______
Voltage imbalance = ______% (max. deviation / average voltage) X 100
Is voltage imbalance less than 2%?  Yes  No
(DO NOT start chiller if voltage imbalance is greater than 2%.
Contact local utility for assistance.)
CL-3
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
14. Verify cooler flow rate  Yes  No
Pressure entering cooler _____ psig (kpa)
Pressure leaving cooler _____ psig (kpa)
Cooler pressure drop _____ psig (kpa)
Psig x 2.31 ft/psi = _____ ft of water
kPa x 0.334 m/psi = _____ m of water
Cooler flow rate _____ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure Drop Curve provided in the 30RB Installation Instructions.)
15. Verify that isolation valves on factory-installed pump packages are properly  Yes  No
positioned and locked prior to start-up (slot in-line with piping on both sides of pump).
16. Chilled water flow switch operational.  Yes  No
Start and operate machine. Complete the following:

1. Complete component test (make sure EXVs are checked after liquid line service valves are opened).
2. Check refrigerant and oil charge. Record charge information below.
3. Record compressor and condenser fan motor current.
4. Record operating data.
5. Provide operating instructions to owner’s personnel. Instruction time _______ hours

Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C
Refrigerant Charge __________ ___________ ___________
Additional charge required __________ ___________ ___________
Oil Charge
Indicate level in sight glass of compressors A1, B1 and C1.
Level should be 3/4-7/8 of a full sight glass when off.
A1 B1 C1
Additional oil charge required.
Circuit A ______
Circuit B ______
Circuit C ______
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3

A4 B4 C4
Record Software Versions
MODE — RUN STATUS
SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION
APPL CSA-SR- __ __ __ __ __ __
MARQ
EXV1
VERS EXV2
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
(Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to obtain software versions)
CL-4
Component Test — Complete the following tests to make sure all peripheral components are
operational before the compressors are started.
MODE — SERVICE TEST

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY
TEST* T.REQ OFF/ON Manual Sequence
CP.A1 OFF/ON Compressor A1 Output
HGB.A OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass A Output
CP.B1 OFF/ON Compressor B1 Output
HGB.B OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass B Output
CP.C1 OFF/ON Compressor C1 Output
HGB.C OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass C Output
QUIC† Q.REQ OFF/ON Quick Test Mode
EXV.A xxx% Circuit A EXV % Open
EXV.B xxx% Circuit B EXV % Open
EXV.C xxx% Circuit C EXV % Open
FAN.A X Circuit A Fan Stages
FAN.B X Circuit B Fan Stages
FAN.C X Circuit C Fan Stages
SPD.A xxx% Circ A Varifan Position
SPD.B xxx% Circ B Varifan Position
SPD.C xxx% Circ C Varifan Position
FRV.A OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve A
FRP.A OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out A
FRV.B OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve B
FRP.B OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out B
FRV.C OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve C
FRP.C OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out C
RV.A OPEN/CLSE 4 Way Valve Circuit A
RV.B OPEN/CLSE 4 Way Valve Circuit B
BOIL OFF/ON Boiler Command
HR1.A OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Enter Valve A
HR2.A OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Leaving Valve A
HR3.A OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Enter Valve A
HR4.A OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Leaving Valve A
HR1.B OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Enter Valve B
HR2.B OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Leaving Valve B
HR3.B OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Enter Valve B
HR4.B OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Leaving Valve B
PMP.1 OFF/ON Water Exchanger Pump 1
PMP.2 OFF/ON Water Exchanger Pump 2
CND.P OFF/ON Reclaim Condenser Pump
CL.HT OFF/ON Cooler Heater Output
CP.HT OFF/ON Condenser Heater Output
*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then
place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.
†Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position
to perform Quick Test.
CL-5
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MODE — SERVICE TEST (cont)
QUIC†(cont) CH.A1 OFF/ON Compressor A1 Heater
CH.A2 OFF/ON Compressor A2 Heater
CH.B1 OFF/ON Compressor B1 Heater
CH.C1 OFF/ON Compressor C1 Heater
HGB.A OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass A Output
HGB.B OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass B Output
HGB.C OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass C Output
Q.RDY OFF/ON Chiller Ready Status
Q.RUN OFF/ON Chiller Running Status

SHUT OFF/ON Customer Shut Down Stat
CATO xx.x Chiller Capacity 0-10v
ALRM OFF/ON Alarm Relay
ALRT OFF/ON Alert Relay
C.ALM OFF/ON Critical Alarm Relay
*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then
place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.
†Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position
to perform Quick Test.
CL-6
Operating Data:
Record the following information from the Run Status, Temperatures and Outputs Modes when machine is in a
stable operating condition. If cooling load is insufficient, these readings must be obtained by putting the chiller in
test mode (Service Test) and running each compressor.
TEMPERATURES
COOLER ENTERING FLUID EWT _______________
COOLER LEAVING FLUID LWT _______________
CONTROL POINT CTPT _______________
CAPACITY CAP _______________
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE OAT _______________
LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID CHWS_______________ (Dual Chiller Control Only)
OPTIONAL HEAT RECLAIM
ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE HEWT _______________
LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE HLWT _______________
Install a manifold gage set to obtain readings and verify these against pressure transducers.
SCT.A __________ SCT.B __________ SCT.C___________
SST.A __________ SST.B __________ SST.C ___________
SGT.A __________ SGT.B __________ SGT.C ___________
SUP.A __________ SUP.B __________ SUP.C ___________
EXV.A__________ EXV.B __________ EXV.C ___________
NOTE: EXV A,B,C positions are found in the output mode.
COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT

L1 L2 L3
COMPRESSOR A1 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR A2 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR A3 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR A4 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR B1 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR B2 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR B3 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR B4 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR C1 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR C2 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR C3 ______ ______ ______
COMPRESSOR C4 ______ ______ ______
CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
FAN MOTOR 1 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 10 ______ ______ ______
CL-7
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Record Configuration Information
MODE — CONFIGURATION
DISP TEST OFF/ON Test Display LED’s
METR US-METR Metric Display
LANG x Language
UNIT TYPE x Unit Type
TONS xxx Unit Size
VAR.A x NB Fan on Varifan CIR A
VAR.B x NB Fan on Varifan CIR B
VAR.C x NB Fan on Varifan CIR C
HGBP x Hot Gas Bypass Control
60HZ NO/YES 60 Hz Frequency
RECL NO/YES Heat Reclaim Select
EHS x Electric Heater Stage
EMM NO/YES EMM Module Installed
PAS.E DSBL/ENBL Password Enable
PASS xxxx Password Protection Must be Disabled
FREE NO/YES Free Cooling Select
PD4.D NO/YES Pro_Dialog Users Display

BOIL OFF/ON Boiler Command Select
VLT.S x VLT Fan Drive Select
RPM.F xxxx VLT Fan Drive RPM
MCHX NO/YES MCHX Exchanger Select
FC x Factory Country Code
VFDV xxx VFD Voltage for USA
SERV FLUD x Cooler Fluid Type
MOP xx.x EXV MOP Setpoint
HP.TH xxx.x High Pressure Threshold
SHP.A xx.x Circuit A Superheat Setp
SHP.B xx.x Circuit B Superheat Setp
SHP.C xx.x Circuit C Superheat Setp
HTR xx.x Cooler Heater DT Setp
EWTO NO/YES Entering Water Control
AU.SM NO/YES Auto Start When SM Lost
BOTH NO/YES HSM Both Command Select
LLWT xx Brine Min. Fluid Temp.
LOSP xx.x Brine Freeze Setpoint
HD.PG xx.x Varifan Proportion Gain
HD.DG xx.x Varifan Derivative Gain
HD.IG xx.x Varifan Integral Gain
HR.MI xxx.x Reclaim Water Valve Min

HR.MA xxx.x Reclaim Water Valve Max
AVFA NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan A
AVFB NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan B
AVFC NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan C
OPTN CCNA xxx CCN Address
CCNB xxx CCN Bus Number
BAUD x CCN Baud Rate
LOAD x Loading Sequence Select
LLCS x Lead/Lag Circuit Select
RL.S ENBL/DSBL Ramp Load Select
DELY xx Minutes Time Off
ICE.M ENBL/DSBL Ice Mode Enable
PUMP x Cooler Pumps Sequence
ROT.P xxxx Pump Rotation Delay
PM.PS NO/YES Periodic Pump Start
P.SBY NO/YES Stop Pump in Standby
P.LOC NO/YES Flow Checked if Pump Off
LS.ST xx.xx Night Low Noise Start
LS.ND xx.xx Night Low Noise End
LS.LT xxx Low Noise Capacity Lim
OA.TH xx.x Heat Mode OAT Threshold
FREE xx.x Free Cooling OAT Limit
BO.TH xx.x Boiler OAT Threshold
EHST xx.xx Elec Stag OAT Threshold
EHSB NO/YES Last Heat Elec Backup
E.DEF NO/YES Quick EHS in Defrost
EHSP xx Elec Heat Pulldown
AUTO NO/YES Auto Changeover Select
CL-8
MODE — CONFIGURATION (cont)
RSET CRST x Cooling Reset Type
HRST x Heating Reset Type
DMDC x Demand Limit Select
DMMX xx.x mA for 100% Demand Lim
DMZE xx.x mA for 0% Demand Limit
MSSL x Master/Slave Select
SLVA xxx Slave Address
LLBL ENBL/DSBL Lead/Lag Balance Select
LLBD xxx Lead/Lag Balance Delta
LLDY xx Lag Start Delay
LAGP x Lag Unit Pump Select
LPUL xx Lead Pulldown Time
MODE — SETPOINT
COOL CSP.1 xxx.x Cooling Setpoint 1
CSP.2 xxx.x Cooling Setpoint 2
CSP.3 xxx.x Ice Setpoint
CRV1 xx.x Current No Reset Value
CRV2 xx.x Current Full Reset Value
CRT1 xxx.x Delta T No Reset Temp
CRT2 xxx.x Delta T Full Reset Value
CRO1 xxx.x OAT No Reset Temp
CRO2 xxx.x OAT Full Reset Temp
CRS1 xxx.x Space T No Reset Temp
CRS2 xxx.x Space T Full Reset Temp
DGRC xx.x Degrees Cool Reset
CAUT xx.x Cool Changeover Setpt N/A
CRMP x.x Cool Ramp Loading
HEAT HSP.1 xxx.x Heating Setpoint 1 N/A
HSP.2 xxx.x Heating Setpoint 2 N/A
HRV1 xx.x Current No Reset Val N/A
HRV2 xx.x Current Full Reset Val N/A
HRT1 xxx.x Delta T No Reset Temp N/A
HRT2 xxx.x Delta T Full Reset Temp N/A
HRO1 xxx.x OAT No Reset Temp N/A
HRO2 xxx.x OAT Full Reset Temp N/A
DGRH xx.x Degrees Heat Reset N/A
HAUT xx.x Heat Changeover Setpt N/A
HRMP x.x Heat Ramp Loading N/A
MISC DLS1 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 1
DLS2 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 2
DLS3 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 3
RSP xxx.x Heat Reclaim Setpoint
RDB xx.x Reclaim Deadband
MODE — OPERATING MODE

SLCT OPER x Operating Control Type
SP.SE x Setpoint Select
HC.SE x Heat Cool Select
RL.SE x Reclaim Select
CL-9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
COMMENTS:

SIGNATURES:
Start-up
Technician______________________________________________________ Date___________________________________
Customer
Representative __________________________________________________ Date___________________________________
© 2021 Carrier
Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg CL-10 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service and Troubleshooting

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service and Troubleshooting

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service and Troubleshooting

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AquaSnap®

30RB060-390 Air-Cooled Chillers and

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service

Table 1 — Modular Unit Combinations Pressures

30RB315 30RB160 30RB160 Configuration

30RB345 30RB170 30RB170 Alarms

30RB360 30RB190 30RB170

down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing ENTER will il-

ment. Press ENTER to accept the change. The Navigator module

will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN (local

J10 J13 J9D

Fig. 3 — Main Base Board

pressor contactor and the compressor crankcase heater. The SPM

cuit high pressure switch. The SPM responds to commands from

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-A4 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SPM-B1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 QC2

SPM-B2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SPM-B3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SMD

Address: OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

EXV2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4

Table 5 — EXV1 Board Inputs and Outputs

ADDRESS DIP SWITCH

NOTE: PIN1 OF EACH CONNECTOR MARKED WITH “1”

Fig. 5 — EXV Board

LOCATION OF DIP SWITCH

STATUS SIO (LEN)

STATUS SIO (LEN)

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

Table 8 — Fan Board 2 (AUX1, AUX2) Outputs*

LED STATUS FUNCTION

Table 10 — Energy Management Module (EMM) Inputs and Outputs

Fig. 10 — ComfortLink CCN Communication Wiring

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

ENTER CRST Cooling Reset Type

x5 MSSL Master/Slave Select

ENTER 0 Disable Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password.

1 Master Use up arrows to change value to 1.

ENTER 1 Accepts the change.

SLVA Slave Address

ENTER 1 Flashing to indicate Edit mode.

LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select

ENTER ENBL Factory Default is ENBL

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta

ENTER 168 Factory Default is 168.

LLDY Lead/Lag Start Delay

ENTER 10 Factory Default is 10.

LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time

ENTER 0 Factory Default is 0.

ESCAPE At mode level.

ENTER OPER Operating Control Type

2 This item must match Master Chiller SLVA item.

CONFIGURATION RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

x5 MSSL Master/Slave Select

2 Slave Use up arrows to change value to 2.

ENTER 2 Accepts the change.

SLVA Slave Address Not required.